Register now!!
ヵㄉㄊㄔチㄑㄓㄐㄅㄖㄕチㄊㄔチㄆㄍㄊㄈㄊㄍㄆチㄇㄐㄓ
ㄕㄉㄆチヱビラュチブチヺㄆㄓチヸㄓㄓㄏㄕㄚ
ンㄆㄑㄊㄓチヱㄓㄐㄈㄓㄎハ
ョㄐㄓチㄅㄆㄕㄊㄍㄔネチㄔㄆㄆチㄑㄈㄆチプハ
ㄉㄕㄕㄑホババㄑㄏㄔㄐㄏㄊハㄊㄛバㄔㄗバㄑㄔㄔㄆバ
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AG-HPX600P
AG-HPX600EJ
AG-HPX600EN
Model No.
Model No.
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
ENGLISH
M0812YY0 -YI
VQT4L06A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX600P)
indicates safety information.
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
Trade Name:
AG-HPX600P
Panasonic
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094
Support contact:
1-800-524-1448
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any
unauthorized modifications.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The user may find the booklet “Something About Interference”
available from FCC local regional offices helpful.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and the
user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral devices.
Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.
– 3 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN)
Read this first! (For AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN)
indicates safety information.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose this equipment to rain or moisture.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep
this equipment away from all liquids. Use and
store only in locations which are not exposed
to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and
do not place any liquid containers on top of the
equipment.
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do
not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-
in cabinet or any other confined space. To
prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to
overheating, ensure that curtains and any other
materials do not obstruct the ventilation.
CAUTION:
Do not lift the unit by its handle while the tripod is
attached. When the tripod is attached, its weight
will also affect the unit’s handle, possibly causing
the handle to break and hurting the user. To carry
the unit while the tripod is attached, take hold of
the tripod.
WARNING:
Always keep memory cards (optional accessory)
out of the reach of babies and small children.
CAUTION:
Do not remove panel covers by unscrewing them.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove
cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer
servicing to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and annoying
interference, use the recommended accessories only.
Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the skin
for long periods of time when in use.
Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered if
the high temperature parts of this unit are in direct
contact with the skin for long periods of time.
When using the equipment for long periods of
time, make use of the tripod.
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer
mounting of the optional interface boards to
qualified service personnel.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not jar, swing, or shake the unit by its handle
while the conversion lens or another accessory is
attached.
A coin type battery is installed inside of the unit.
Do not store the unit in temperatures over 60 °C
(140 °F).
Due to the added weight of the conversion lens,
any strong jolt to the handle may damage the unit
or result in personal injury.
Do not leave the unit in an automobile exposed to
direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors
and windows closed.
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Service Europe, a division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
– 4 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN)
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Applicable standards and operating environment
The apparatus is compliant with:
standards EN55103-1 and EN55103-2
electromagnetic environments E1, E2, E3 and E4.
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables
The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral
equipment to be connected to the apparatus.
The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.
Video signal connecting cables
Use double-shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI
(Serial Digital Interface).
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog
video signals.
Audio signal connecting cables
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog
audio signals.
Other connecting cables (IEEE1394, USB)
Use double-shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting
cables.
When connecting to the DVI signal terminal, use a cable with a ferrite core.
If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this
manual.
3. Performance level
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these
standards.
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an
area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones,
etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended
that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment:
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.
4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.
EU
TO REMOVE BATTERY
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)
• To detach the battery, please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual.
• If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
• For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.
– 5 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first!
Read this first!
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
5
1st year
2nd year
3rd year
4th year
5th year
*
2
3
4
P2HD device
Basic warranty
Extended warranty repair
*
*
*
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended
warranty coverage. *3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by
this extended warranty. *5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been
used.
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty: http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
– 6 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f The SDHC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
f HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and/
or other countries.
f MMC (Multi Media Card) is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
f Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
f Screenshots are used according to Microsoft Corporation guidelines.
f Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
f UniSlot is a registered trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., LTD.
f All other names, company names, product names, etc., contained in this instruction manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
f This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License. All other acts are not licensed except private use for personal and non-profit purposes
such as what are described below.
- To record video in compliance with the AVC standard (AVC Video)
- To play back AVC Video that was recorded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
- To play back AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide the video
Visit the MPEG LA, LLC website (http://www.mpegla.com/) for details.
How to read this document
r Illustrations
f Illustrations of the camera, menu screens, and other items, may vary from the actual items.
r Reference pages
f Reference pages in this document are indicated by (page 00).
r Terminology
f Both SD memory card and SDHC memory card are referred to as SD memory card.
f Memory card that has the “P2” logo (such as optional AJ-P2E064FG) is referred to as “P2 card”.
f Video that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a “clip”.
– 7 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Contents
P2 card............................................................................................ 32
For shooting......................................................................................35
Shot mark .......................................................................................107
Deleting clips ..................................................................................109
– 8 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Menu list....................................................................................... 122
Menu list....................................................................................... 139
Error code.......................................................................................158
Index............................................................................................. 175
– 9 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Before using the camera
Before using the camera
r Caution regarding laser beams
The MOS sensor may be damaged if the MOS sensor is subjected to light from a laser beam.
Make sure that laser beams do not strike the lens when shooting in an environment where laser devices are used.
r Note the following points.
f When preparing to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage to verify that both pictures and sound are being recorded
normally.
f Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of the camera or the P2 cards used, we will not assume liability for such failure.
r What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others
Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the camera or a computer will merely change the file management information: it will
not completely erase the data on the cards. When throwing these cards away or transferring them to others, either physically destroy them or use a
data deletion program for computers (commercially available) to completely erase the data. Users are responsible for managing the data stored in their
memory cards.
r Software information about this product
f This product includes software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), and customers
are hereby notified that they have rights to obtain, re-engineer and redistribute the source code of these software.
Details of GPL/LGPL are contained on the installation CD provided with the camera. Refer to the folder LDOC. (These details are originally provided in
English.)
Also, visit the following website for details on how to obtain the source code:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
We do not accept inquiries about the details of the source code obtained by the customer.
f This product includes software licensed under MIT-License.
Details of MIT are contained on the installation CD provided with the camera. Refer to the folder LDOC. (These details are originally provided in
English.)
r Precautions when installing USB drivers
Select “AG-HPX600” when installing USB drivers from the CD-ROM that comes with the camera (AG-HPX600P/AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN) onto a
computer.
– 11 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Main features
Main features
The P2 memory card camera-recorder AG-HPX600P/AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN incorporates the MOS sensor newly developed for the camera unit
to ensure that high-sensitivity F12 (59.94 Hz), high-resolution, and high-quality video can be obtained. The camera also uses a 2/3-inch lens mount to
accommodate many existing interchangeable lenses and features a compact body to provide amazing action for a body weight of approximately 2.8 kg.
The camera supports 50 Hz/59.94 Hz switchable and HD/SD multi-format. The AVC-Intra, DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV compression
recording formats can be selected, and the reliability, instantaneousness and IT functions expected of P2 helps revolutionize work flow.
An add-on system for optional functions (extra-cost options) is also available for selecting and installing only required functions.
r Function extension (extra-cost options)
As of start of sales, the following functions (extra-cost options) are available:
f Video encoder board AG-YDX600G
This enables proxy recording. This is effective in checking and editing clips.
f HD/SD SDI input board AG-YA600G
This enables recording of the SDI signal input from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal.
f Upgrade Software Key AG-SFU601G (Network function)
This enables addition of text memos from IT devices.
In explanations from here on, this option is referred to as “network function (extra-cost option)”.
f Upgrade Software Key AG-SFU602G (Production pack)
This allows the following functions to be used to achieve substantial video production functions:
- 1080/23.98PsF system
- Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function
In explanations from here on, this option is referred to simply as “production pack (extra-cost option)”.
r 50 Hz/59.94 Hz switchable and HD/SD multi-format
Recording by the HD/SD video format is supported. 50 Hz/59.94 Hz switchable accommodates all kinds of applications and global content production
in addition to news reporting and program/video production. For 1080i/720P HD recording, the highly reliable AVC-Intra/DVCPRO HD codecs can be
selected for broadcasting use, and for SD video, the DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV multi-codecs can be selected.
4-channel recording (all formats) is provided for 16-bit/48 kHz non-compressed high-quality audio.
r SmartUI
New operability is provided by integrating the conventional LCD window and audio selector switches. Remote control from IT devices and other
functionality ensure expandability for future applications.
– 12 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Features of the camera unit
Features of the camera unit
r Progressive 2/3-inch MOS sensor
It incorporates a newly developed 2/3-inch MOS sensor to ensure high-sensitivity and high-resolution video.
r 14-bit digital circuit
The camera has in-built high performance DSP (digital signal processor) for processing 14-bit signal input and 20-bit internal computations. This circuit
sets gamma and other corrections for each R/G/B color of 1080/60P video, and batch processes up to conversion (P/I conversion, line conversion, down
conversion) to various HD/SD formats. This ensures high-resolution video output in any video format.
r Seven gamma curve modes including cine-like gamma
You can select from seven gamma curve modes, including cine-like gamma for easily reproducing film-like tones, for greater breadth in video
production.
r Slow/synchro/high-speed shutter
The shutter speed can be selected at will from the slowest speed of 1/12 seconds up to the highest speed of 1/7200 seconds*. The synchro scan
function suited to recording on monitor screens can also be provided.
* The above is the shutter value when the [SYNCHRO SCAN] item on the [SCENE FILE] screen is set to [3d].
r Shooting assist function
f <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>):
Frequently used functions can be assigned to the three <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) and executed by simply pressing the
required button.
f Focus assist:
Enlarging the the center part of the screen and displaying the focus bar assist focusing.
f Eight lens chromatic aberration files/four shading compensation files that are compatible with replacement lenses provided
f Color temperature conversion:
Color-temperature can be fine-adjusted after the white balance is set.
f Rec review function:
The last several seconds of the previously recorded clip can be quickly checked.
f Equipped with optical ND filters at four positions
r Chromatic aberration compensation function (CAC)
The camera is equipped with a function to automatically correct registration error that occurs mainly due to slight chromatic aberration, etc., which
cannot be compensated on the lens itself, and minimizes color smearing in peripheral images.
r Remote control supported
The remote control unit (optional/AJ-RC10G) and extension control unit (optional/AG-EC4G) are supported. You can control the camera, such as
adjusting the camera image or performing recording operations, remotely while monitoring the camera image.
r Auto tracking white balance (ATW) function
The white balance is automatically adjusted according to the subject in real time. This feature is effective when you have no margin for adjusting white
balance manually, for example, when recording in an emergency.
r Dynamic range stretcher (DRS) function
With this function, the video signal level of high brightness areas that may be skipped with white blanks in regular recording methods can be expanded
by compressing images and maintaining the contrast.*
* The dynamic range stretcher function does not work in the 1080/24P, 1080/30P, and 1080/25P modes.
r Camera extension system
By combining the optional camera adaptor (AG-CA300G) and base station (AG-BS300), you can operate the camera as a camera extension system.
For connections with these devices, refer to the connection methods and precautions described in the instruction manual of each device.
The camera only supports the HD viewfinder. To display return video images on the viewfinder screen with the system where the optional VF interface
box (AG-YA500G) is connected, set the [SYSTEM MODE] item to [1080-59.94i] or [1080-50i]. The [SYSTEM MODE] item can be selected from the
setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
r Viewfinder connection
1080/59.94i or 1080/50i signals are output from the viewfinder connector of the camera.
By connecting the optional view finder (AG-CVF10G, AJ-HVF21KG, AJ-CVF100G), images compatible with multi-format can be viewed.
– 13 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Features of recorder/play unit
Features of recorder/play unit
r Various interfaces
f <USB2.0> terminal (host/device) provided
By connecting to a computer via USB 2.0, the P2 card inserted on the camera can be used as mass storage.
The camera also incorporates the USB host function, allowing data on the P2 card to be saved on the hard disk drive connected with USB 2.0 or clips
saved on the hard disk drive to be viewed or written back to the P2 card.
f <LAN> terminal provided
By installing the network function (extra-cost option), metadata can be input from a computer.
r Large-capacity, high-speed transfer, highly reliable P2 card
P2 cards are semiconductor memory that is highly resistant to impact, vibration and temperature changes, and are highly reliable since they have
no parts that rotate or contact other parts when recording or playing back, like on tape or disk, which enables these cards to be repeatedly used for
recording and initialized over a prolonged period of time. Connectors have also been designed for professional use to ensure greater durability when
cards are removed or inserted.
Recorded A/V data is recorded to P2 cards as files for individual cuts that do not require digitizing, which means that they are ready for nonlinear editing
or transfer over a network. Optical disks can be worked on at ease at an amazing transfer speed. The PC card standard is also supported, which means
1
that PC cards can be plugged in directly to the PC card slot on your computer.*
The unit is equipped with two P2 card slots, enabling continuous recordings for two P2 cards, and they also provide the following recording capabilities
specific to memory card recorders:
f Card selection:
2
The recording slot can be selected (switched) in a standby state* . When recording material is forwarded immediately after it is recorded for editing or
transmission, recording can be continued by an interruption far shorter than by tape or disk replacement.
f Hot swap recording:
Cards can be replaced even during recording. This capability allows continuous recording without any interruption since recorded cards can be
successively swapped while recording is continued on another card slot.
f Loop recording:
The unit can retain a certain amount of previously recorded material at all times by successively loop recording data into a specified recording area.
*1 The P2 card driver (provided with the respective equipment) must be installed. For details on the operating environment required for the P2 card driver, visit
the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
*2 Set the [SLOT SEL] function to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>).
r Instant start and secure data protection
Recording is started instantaneously from a standby state. Since recording is automatically performed to free space on the card, there is no need to cue
up blank area as you do for VTRs. Recording can be started immediately even during a preview simply by pressing the <REC> button. In the Normal
mode, recorded data is never lost by it being overwritten. So, you can be rest assured that your data is safe unless files are deleted or the card is
initialized.
r Other features
f Pre-recording:
Critical moments that you might have missed can be recovered. In a standby state, approximately three seconds and approximately seven seconds
of video and audio input to the camera is stored in memory in the HD and SD modes, respectively. This means that video and audio are recorded for
several seconds preceding pressing of the <REC> button.
f One-shot recording:
This function records for the preset time (single frame to one second) at each press of the <REC> button and is handy for producing animations.
f Interval recording:
In this mode, single frames are recorded at a preset interval (two frames to ten minutes). This allows monitoring and observation, and special effects
to be obtained by ultra-undercrank shooting.
f One-clip recording:
This function allows multiple recordings into a combined clip and does not isolate single recording (from recording start to stop). The combined clip can
he handled with ease in transferring or copying, etc. as the clip can be handled as a single thumbnail or as a single clip in editing. Up to 99 recordings
can be combined into a single clip.
f Proxy recording (extra-cost option):
By installing the video encoder board (extra-cost option), video recordings in MPEG4 format or H.264 format and real-time metadata such as time
code data can be recorded to the P2 card and SD memory card simultaneously, in addition to the video and audio of the materials recorded on the
camera. This is effective in checking and editing clips.
r Clip thumbnail preview
Recordings are made as clips (files) for each cut. A thumbnail image and file information are automatically appended to each clip. When previewing on
the viewfinder screen, the clip selected from the thumbnail list display can immediately be played back or the clip data can be checked. This thumbnail
and file information is also displayed on a computer (by P2 Viewer*) or in nonlinear editing software.
* P2 Viewer is viewing software for Windows PCs provided to P2 users by free download.
r Shot marks and text memo
Shot marks which, for example, can help you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts, are assigned to each clip. Shot marks can be added both during and
after a recording. Only marked clips can be displayed when clips are mounted on a computer (by P2 Viewer).
A function for recording text memos is also provided so that empty tag-like text memos can be registered by pressing the <USER> buttons (<USER
MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) assigned with this function at any locations (up to 100) in a clip during recording or preview. Memos can be searched for
later on a computer (P2 Viewer) to write text to.
In addition, by copying clips by text memo block, only the necessary portions can be extracted from a single clip with the camera.
– 14 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Features of recorder/play unit
r SD memory card slot
The camera is provided with the SD memory card slot. Scene files and user setting files can be saved and loaded. Metadata upload files (created on P2
Viewer) containing the name of the camera person or reporter, shooting location, text memos or other information can be read to the SD memory card
or read as clip metadata.
r HD/SD SDI output and down converter
Video output lines (BNC x2) are provided as standard. This enables flexible support of monitor or line recording. A built-in down converter is also
provided to allow the aspect mode to be selected. Composite output is also supported.
r HDMI output
Video can be output to a monitor compatible with the <HDMI> terminal.
f The camera is not compatible with VIERA Link.
r HD/SD SDI input (extra-cost option):
By installing the HD/SD SDI input board (extra-cost option), SDI signals input from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal can be recorded.
Note, however, that only SDI signals in the same recording format as the camera can be recorded.
r Control for fine-adjustment of audio recording level
A control for fine-adjusting the audio recording level is provided on the front of the camera. This is particularly useful for adjusting the audio level when
you are taking photos alone. This control can also be disabled.
r Support for built-in UniSlot wireless receiver
The camera is designed to support an optional slot-in wireless receiver. (page 98)
It also supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
– 15 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — How to use the camera
How to use the camera
The camera records to P2 cards. These large-capacity P2 cards feature outstanding transfer speeds to enable HD recording, smooth editing and
dubbing.
Editing, saving using external equipment
9LDꢀWKHꢀꢄ86%ꢅꢃꢆ!ꢀWHUPLQDO
&RQQHFWLRQꢀWRꢀH[WHUQDOꢀHTXLSPHQWꢀLQꢀ86%ꢀGHYLFHꢀPRGH
'DWDꢀꢁILOHVꢂꢀIRUꢀSHUIRUPLQJꢀQRQOLQHDUꢀHGLWLQJꢀRQꢀDꢀFRPSXWHUꢀDUHꢀ
WUDQVIHUUHGꢃ
3ꢅꢀFDUGꢇꢈ
3HUVRQDOꢀFRPSXWHU
86%ꢀꢅꢃꢆꢀꢁGHYLFHꢀPRGHꢂꢇꢅ
9LDꢀWKHꢀꢄ86%ꢅꢃꢆ!ꢀWHUPLQDO
&RQQHFWLRQꢀWRꢀH[WHUQDOꢀHTXLSPHQWꢀLQꢀ86%ꢀKRVWꢀPRGH
7KHꢀFDPHUDꢀGLUHFWO\ꢀFRQWUROVꢀWKHꢀKDUGꢀGLVNꢀGULYHꢀWRꢀWUDQVIHUꢀGDWDꢃ
([WHUQDOꢀKDUGꢀGLVNꢀGULYH
86%ꢀꢅꢃꢆꢀꢁKRVWꢀPRGHꢂꢇꢅ
%1&ꢀFDEOHꢀꢁFRPSRVLWHꢉ6',ꢂꢇꢊ
+'0,ꢀFDEOHꢇꢋ
9LGHRꢀ
HTXLSPHQWꢉPRQLWRU
$XGLRꢀSLQꢀFDEOHꢇꢈ
*1 P2 cards and cables are optionally available. They are not supplied with the camera.
*2 The USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the camera. Prepare a commercial USB 2.0 cable (double-shielded for noise suppression).
*3 For the BNC cable (optional) connected to the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> and <MON OUT> terminals, prepare a double-shielded cable equivalent to 5C-FB.
*4 Prepare the HDMI cable (optional) with double or more shielded. For the HDMI cable, use of the Panasonic HDMI cable is recommended.
– 16 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — System configuration
System configuration
+'ꢀYLHZILQGHU
$*ꢁ&9)ꢂꢃ*
$-ꢁ+9)ꢄꢂ.*
$-ꢁ&9)ꢂꢃꢃ*
5DLQꢀFRYHU
6+$1ꢁ5&ꢐꢃꢃ
6RIWꢀFDUU\LQJꢀFDVH
8QL6ORWꢀZLUHOHVVꢀPLFURSKRQHꢀUHFHLYHU
$-ꢁ6&ꢅꢃꢃ
/&'ꢀPRQLWRU
%7ꢁ/+ꢉꢃ:
+DUGꢀFDUU\LQJꢀFDVH
%7ꢁ/+ꢅꢃꢃꢒꢀHWFꢍ
$*ꢁ+3;ꢋꢃꢃ3ꢎ
$*ꢁ+3;ꢋꢃꢃ(-ꢎ
$*ꢁ+3;ꢋꢃꢃ(1
5HPRWHꢀFRQWUROꢀXQLWꢌꢏ
$-ꢁ+7ꢅꢃꢂ*
6KRWJXQꢀPLFURSKRQH
ꢆ3KDQWRPꢀꢇꢈꢉ9ꢊ
$-ꢁ5&ꢂꢃ*
$*ꢁ0&ꢄꢃꢃ*
5HPRWHꢀFRQWUROꢀFDEOH
$-ꢁ&ꢂꢃꢃꢑꢃ*
/HQV
ꢆ%D\RQHWꢀW\SHꢊ
([WHQVLRQꢀFRQWUROꢀXQLW
)8-,121ꢎ&$121
7ULSRGꢀDGDSWRU
6+$1ꢁ70ꢐꢃꢃ
$*ꢁ(&ꢈ*
%DWWHU\
+<7521ꢑꢃꢎꢂꢈꢃꢌꢂ
:LUHOHVVꢀPRGXOH
$-ꢁ:0ꢏꢃ
',21,&ꢀ+&ꢎꢅꢃꢎꢂꢋꢃꢌꢂ
9ꢁPRXQWꢀW\SHꢀ
EDWWHU\ꢀSODWH
(1'85$ꢀ(ꢁꢐ
(1'85$ꢀ(ꢁꢂꢃ
6'ꢀPHPRU\ꢀFDUGꢌꢄ
3ꢄꢀFDUGꢌꢄ
86%ꢀꢄꢍꢃꢀFRPSOLDQWꢀGHYLFH
([WHUQDOꢀ'&ꢀSRZHUꢀVXSSO\
8SJUDGHꢀ6RIWZDUHꢀ.H\
$*ꢁ6)8ꢋꢃꢂ*
1HWZRUNꢀIXQFWLRQꢀꢆH[WUDꢁFRVWꢀRSWLRQꢊꢌꢈ
9LGHRꢀHQFRGHUꢀERDUG
$*ꢁ<';ꢋꢃꢃ*
8SJUDGHꢀ6RIWZDUHꢀ.H\
$*ꢁ6)8ꢋꢃꢄ*
3URGXFWLRQꢀSDFNꢀꢆH[WUDꢁFRVWꢀRSWLRQꢊ
+'ꢎ6'ꢀ6',ꢀLQSXWꢀERDUG
$*ꢁ<$ꢋꢃꢃ*
*1 A battery holder is provided as standard on the main unit.
*2 For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
*3 Refer to the AJ-RC10G instruction guide on the CD-ROM provided with the camera.
*4 To use the wireless LAN function for the network function, the wireless module AJ-WM30 is required. To use the streaming function of the network function, the
video encoder board AG-YDX600G is required.
– 17 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview — Accessories
Accessories
CD-ROM
f Operating Instructions
f Utility software
For installation procedures, refer to the installation manual on the CD-
ROM.
NOTE
@@
t After unpacking the product, dispose of the packing material
properly.
– 18 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Power supply and accessory mounting section
Power supply and accessory mounting section
9
10
8
11 12 13
2
14
3
4
1
5 6
7
15 16
17 18 19
20
1
2
3
Used to turn on/off the power.
13 Viewfinder left/right positioning ring
To adjust the left/right position of the viewfinder, loosen this ring,
and slide the viewfinder to the left or right to adjust it to an easy-to-
view position. Tighten the ring to clamp the viewfinder in place after
adjusting the viewfinder.
Pull this battery release lever down to release the battery.
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery.
14 <VF> terminal
Mount the viewfinder AG-CVF10G (optional).
4
5
This is the input terminal for the external power supply. Connect to the
external DC power supply.
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.
Connect the lens connection cable. For a detailed description of the
lens used, refer to the Operating Instructions for the lens.
6
This is the DC 12 V output terminal. It provides a maximum current of
1.5 A.
Attach the optional tripod adaptor (SHAN-TM700) when mounting the
camera on the tripod.
NOTE
@@
t When connecting external equipment to this terminal, first fully
check the polarities of the connection. Failure to do so may
result in a malfunction.
Mount the lens.
After mounting the lens to the lens mount, tighten the lever to secure
the lens.
7
8
Connect the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional) to remote-
control some functions.
Connect the extension control unit AG-EC4G (optional) to remote-
control some functions.
Raise the lens lever to remove the cap. Replace the cap when the
lens is not mounted.
Light output terminal
Connect the Anton/Bauer Ultralight 2 (optional) or an equivalent
product of 50 W or under for the video light.
The battery charge level drops sharply when the light is illuminated.
When using the light, using a battery of 90 Wh or more is
recommended.
9
Cable holders
Used for clamping the light and microphone cables in place.
10 Accessory mounting holes
Attach accessories. Do not use for purposes other than attaching
accessories.
f Mounting hole size
- 1/4-20 UNC (screw length 10 mm or shorter)
- 3/8-16 UNC (screw length 10 mm or shorter)
Attach the shoulder strap.
12 Light shoe
Attach the video light.
f Mounting hole size
1/4-20 UNC (screw length 6 mm or shorter)
– 20 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Audio (input) function section
Audio (input) function section
6
2
4
3
5
1
1
f Connect the microphone (optional).
f Can also be used for connecting the phantom microphone. When
using the phantom microphone, set the [F.MIC POWER] item on the
setting menu [AUDIO SETUP] screen to [ON].
2
<F.AUDIO LEVEL> (audio recording level adjustment) dial
f Adjust the recording level of audio channels 1 to 4.
f When the adjustment method for the recording level is set to
[MANU] on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI, the recording
level of the audio channel can be adjusted with this dial.
f Set which input terminal operation of this control works on by the
[FRONT VR CH1], [FRONT VR CH2], [FRONT VR CH3], and
[FRONT VR CH4] items on the setting menu [AUDIO SETUP]
screen.
3
<AUDIO IN CH1/3>, <AUDIO IN CH2/4> (audio input channel 1/3,
Connect audio equipment or the microphone.
4
<LINE>/<MIC> (line input/microphone input) selector switch
Switch the audio input signal connected to <AUDIO IN CH1/3> and
<AUDIO IN CH2/4> (audio input channels 1/3, 2/4) terminals.
<LINE>
<MIC>
Audio input signals from line-input audio equipment
Audio input signal from the microphone
5
6
Turn on/off the power supply to the microphone connected to the
<AUDIO IN CH1/3> and <AUDIO IN CH2/4> (audio input channels
1/3, 2/4) terminals.
<+48V>
Supplies +48 V power to the microphone.
<OFF>
Does not supply power to the microphone.
Mount the UniSlot wireless receiver (optional).
– 21 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Audio (output) function section
Audio (output) function section
2
1
4
3
1
<MONITOR> (volume adjustment) dial
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and earphone.
2
Speaker
During recording, EE audio can be monitored, and during playback,
playback audio can be monitored.
Audio from the speaker is automatically turned off when an earphone
is connected to the <PHONES> terminal.
3
<PHONES> (earphone) terminal (mini jack)
This is the terminal for connecting the audio monitor earphone.
(stereo)
4
f Output audio signals recorded on audio channel 1/2 or 3/4.
f Select output signals on the [AUD03:MONI] screen of SmartUI.
– 22 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Shooting and recording/playback functions section
Shooting and recording/playback functions section
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
r Shooting and recording (Camera unit)
f Push it towards the <CHK> side to display all information such as
the setting status of the shooting functions and functions assigned
to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) on
the viewfinder screen during camera standby or shooting. While the
information is displayed, push it towards the <CHK> side again to
display the proxy and network setting status (only when the option
is installed). The mode check information display disappears after
approximately three seconds.
1
Adjust the amount of light entering the MOS sensor. Used when there
is strong natural light.
Dial position
Setting
Description
<1>
<CLEAR>
The ND filter is not used.
The amount of light entering the MOS
sensor is reduced to 1/4.
<2>
<3>
<4>
<1/4ND>
<1/16ND>
<1/64ND>
6
f Switch the video amplifier gain according to the lighting conditions
under which you are shooting.
The amount of light entering the MOS
sensor is reduced to 1/16.
The amount of light entering the MOS
sensor is reduced to 1/64.
f The gain values for the <L>/<M>/<H> positions can be set by [LOW
GAIN], [MID GAIN] or [HIGH GAIN] items on the setting menu [SW
MODE] screen.
2
Turn on/off the electronic shutter.
f Factory settings are L=0 dB, M=6 dB and H=12 dB.
7
<OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch
Select the video signals output to the memory, viewfinder and video
monitor from the camera unit.
<OFF>
<ON>
The electronic shutter is disabled.
The electronic shutter is enabled.
<SEL>
The speed of the electronic shutter can be changed.
Video captured on the camera is output and the auto
This is a spring switch. Each turn towards the <SEL> side alters the
shutter speed.
CAM.AUTO knee function is activated.
KNEE ON
Instead of the auto knee function, the dynamic range
stretcher (DRS) function can be assigned.
3
Video captured with the camera is output and the auto
White balance is automatically adjusted. When this
switch is operated with the <WHITE BAL> switch on
the side set to the <A> or <B> position, adjustment is
performed in several seconds and adjustment values
are stored in memory.
When the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <PRST>
CAM.AUTO knee function is not activated.
KNEE OFF
The knee point is fixed to the level set by menu
operations.
The color bar signal is output. The auto knee function is
disabled.
<BARS>
<AWB>
position, the preset color temperature can be changed
by setting the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the
<AWB> side, and setting it once again towards the
<AWB> side while the color temperature is displayed.
NOTE
@@
t Auto knee function
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery
against a strongly lit background, the background will be totally
white-out, with buildings and other objects blurred. In such a
case, the auto knee function reproduces the background clearly.
The auto knee function is effective when shooting the following
scenes:
<ABB>
Black balance is automatically adjusted.
4
Assign user-selected functions to each button. Pressing each button
performs the assigned function.
5
- The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear
sky.
- The subject is a person inside a car or a building, and you
also want to capture the background visible through a window.
- The subject is a high-contrast scene.
This is the spring switch to check the shooting status of the camera.
f When it is pushed towards the <OFF> side, all displays other than
the operating mode display and frame display such as area, and the
counter, marker, and safety zone on the viewfinder screen turn off.
8
<WHITE BAL> (white balance memory selector) switch
Select the white balance adjustment method.
– 23 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Shooting and recording/playback functions section
Set the switch to this position when you have no time to
adjust the white balance.
f The factory setting is 3200 K.
Pressing the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards <AWB>
automatically adjusts the white balance and saves the
adjusted value to memory A or B.
<A>/<B>
f The color temperature can be changed successively to
3200 K, 5600 K, and the user-specified variable value
by the setting menu or by pushing the <AUTO W/B
BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side, and pushing
the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side
again while the color temperature is displayed. The
You can also assign the auto tracking white balance (ATW) function to
<PRST>
9
Focal plane index <
>
Indicates the focal plane of the MOS sensor.
It provides a reference for making accurate focal distance
measurements from the subject.
10
28
29
30
33
27 26
32
31
25
24
11
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
16
17
18
19
20
CAM
TC
NDF SLAVE P -REC
0
AUDIO
SETUP
-10
-18
-20
-30
dB
MEDIA CH1
F
A
E
E
13
14
12
CH2
BATT
F
1
2
HOME
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
THUMBNAIL
KEY LOCK
SET TOP
SHIFT
MENU
15
21
MULTI SEL
EXIT
CANCEL BOTTOM
22 23
r Shooting and recording/playback functions section (Recording
13 <FF/)> (fast forward) button
unit)
Press this button during a pause to perform fast playback.
Press it during playback to perform fast playback at approximately 4x
speed.
If it is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is
paused at the start point of the next clip (cued state).
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
Press this button to start recording, and press again to stop recording.
This button has the same function as the VTR button on the lens side.
11 <MONITOR SEL> button
Switch the audio channel that is output to the speaker, the
<PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT> terminal to [CH1/2] or
[CH3/4] each time you press the button. The channel display of the
audio channel level meter is switched together.
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
14 <STOP> (stop) button
Press this button to stop playback.
Also press it to stop interval recording and one-shot recording, or to
end combining of clips in one-clip recording.
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
12 <%/REW> (rewind) button
Press this button during a pause to perform fast-reverse playback.
Press it during playback to perform fast-reverse playback at
approximately 4x speed.
If it is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is
paused at its start point (cued state).
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
15 <PLAY/PAUSE> (play/pause) button
Press this button to view the playback image using the viewfinder
screen or the monitor screen.
Pressing this button during playback pauses playback.
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
16 <LIGHT> button
Control lighting of SmartUI. Each press toggles lighting of SmartUI on
and off.
– 24 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Shooting and recording/playback functions section
30 <LAN> terminal (100BASE-TX)
Display the [CAMERA] screen on SmartUI.
Enabled when the network function (extra-cost option) is installed.
For the cable to be connected to the <LAN> terminal, use the
shielded cable.
Display the [AUDIO] screen on SmartUI.
Display the [SETUP] screen on SmartUI.
32 <USB2.0> terminal (sub-host)
Attach the wireless module AJ-WM30 (optional).
Display the [HOME] screen on SmartUI.
33 <FOCUS ASSIST> button (page 82)
Turn on/off the function for enlarging the video at the center of the
screen.
21 <KEY LOCK> switch (page 136)
Disable button operations related to SmartUI and thumbnail
operations. However, <LIGHT> button operation is available.
Connect the USB 2.0 cable.
When the [PC MODE] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN]
screen is set to [ON], data transfer using USB 2.0 is enabled.
In this state, recording/playback and clip operations on the camera
are limited.
24 P2 card insertion slot
Indicate the access status of recording and playback of each card.
This is the insertion slot for the SD memory card (optional). Use the
SD memory card for recording/opening the setting menu and lens
files for the camera, or uploading metadata or proxy recording (extra-
cost option), etc.
NOTE
@@
t Cautions in using SD memory cards
- On the camera, use SD memory cards that are compliant with
the SD standard or the SDHC standard.
- MMC (Multi Media Card) cannot be used. (Bear in mind that
taking pictures may no longer be possible if you do use them.)
- When using miniSD/microSD cards with the camera, always
install the adaptor specially designed for miniSD/microSD
cards. (The camera will not work properly if only the miniSD/
microSD adaptor is installed. Make sure that the card has
been inserted into the adaptor before use.)
- Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and miniSD/microSD
cards is recommended. Be sure to format cards on the
camera before use.
- Any SD memory card with a capacity of 8 MB to 2 GB and any
SDHC memory card up to 32 GB can be used on the camera.
Also, when performing proxy recording (extra-cost option), use
SDHC memory cards or SD memory cards with a capacity of
256 MB to 2 GB marked “High Speed”, etc.
- For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Indicate the active status of the SD memory card, and is illuminated
when the card is active.
NOTE
@@
t Do not insert or remove the card while the lamp is lit. This might
damage the SD memory card.
Output the SDI signal.
f By installing the HD/SD SDI input board (optional), SDI signals can
This is the video output terminal for the monitor. Video independent
from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal can be output. Also, HD SDI
signal or down-converted SD SDI signal, or VBS signal can be
selected on the [SET02:MON/HDMI FORMAT] screen of SmartUI.
Cross-conversion and up-conversion are not supported.
– 25 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Menu operation section and thumbnail operation section
Menu operation section and thumbnail operation section
3
4
5
6
7
1 2
1
f With the setting menu open, navigate through setting menu pages,
select items, and set values.
f Turn the jog dial button downwards or upwards while the setting
menu is displayed to move the menu cursor downwards and
upwards, respectively. Press the jog dial button to fix the settings.
f When the shutter switch is set to <ON> and synchro scan is
selected without the menu opened, the synchro scan speed can be
adjusted.
2
f Hold down this button to display the setting menu screen on the
viewfinder screen. Press the button again to return to the original
image.
f Button operations are not accepted while thumbnails are displayed
or during recording.
3
Press the button to display the thumbnail screen on the viewfinder
screen and the monitor connected to the camera. Button operations
are disabled during recording and playback.
4
Restore the display to the previous state while the thumbnail menu or
property screen is displayed.
Also, pressing this button with the <SHIFT> button held down makes
it function as a cancel button, which is convenient when batch-
canceling clip selections.
5
6
Operate the setting menu, menu bars and thumbnails.
The four triangular buttons are the cursor buttons, and the square
button in the center is the <SET> button.
<THUMBNAIL MENU> button (page 105)
Press this button with the thumbnail displayed to move to the
thumbnail operations, allowing clip deletion operation, etc.
NOTE
@@
t Use the cursor/<SET> button and the <EXIT>/<CANCEL>
7
Press this button with other buttons held down at the same time.
f <SHIFT> button + cursor button (`/{)
This moves the pointer to the thumbnail of the clip at the start or the
end in the thumbnail screen.
f <SHIFT> button + <SET> button
Select all clips from the previously selected clip up to the clip at the
pointer position.
f <SHIFT> button + <EXIT>/<CANCEL> button
Operations with the <SHIFT> button held down are displayed at the
bottom of each button.
– 26 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Time code section
Time code section
1
2
3
4
5
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
CAM
TC
NDF SLABE P -REC
0
AUDIO
SETUP
-10
-18
-20
-30
dB
MEDIA CH1
F
A
E
E
CH2
BATT
F
1
2
HOME
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
THUMBNAIL
KEY LOCK
SET TOP
SHIFT
MENU
MULTI SEL
EXIT
CANCEL BOTTOM
1
Input reference signals when setting the generator lock on the camera
unit, or when externally locking the time code.
NOTE
@@
t Supply Y signals of HD or or composite signals as an input
signal. However, the sub-carrier of the composite signal on the
camera cannot be externally locked.
2
f Switch input/output in the menu.
f Input the reference time code to this terminal when the time code is
locked.
f Connect to the time code input terminal of the external device when
locking the time code of the external device to the time code on the
3
<HOLD> button
The time data indication on the counter display area is retained for
the duration that this button is held down. However, the time code
generator continues to advance. Press again reactivates the counter.
This function is used to learn the time code or counter value of a
particular recorded scene.
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
4
Each press of this button displays the counter value, time code, user
bits, and frame rate information on the viewfinder screen.
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
5
<RESET> button
Reset the counter value in the time code display area to 0 (zero).
When the screen other than the [HOME] screen of SmartUI is
displayed, the function corresponding to each setting screen is
executed.
– 27 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Warning and status display section
Warning and status display section
1
3
4
2
1
2
3
Back tally lamp
When the back tally switch is set to on, the lamp acts in the same way
as the front tally lamp at the viewfinder.
Rear tally lamp
When the back tally switch is set to on, the lamp acts in the same way
as the back tally lamp.
Back tally switch
Control the action of the back and rear tally lamps.
ON
The back and rear tally lamps are enabled.
The back and rear tally lamps are disabled.
OFF
4
Start flashing or is illuminated if something unusual occurs in the
memory.
– 28 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — SmartUI display ([HOME] screen)
SmartUI display ([HOME] screen)
4
5
TC
NDF SLAVE P -REC
3
1
2
MEDIA
CH1
CH2
A
E
E
F
F
BATT
1
2
6
Indicated when the time code is in the non-drop
frame mode.
1
2
3
Media remaining space indicator bar
Indicates the remaining free space in the P2 card using a 7-segment
display.
Each segment is equivalent to three minutes, and the decreasing
P2 card remaining time is indicated by the segments going out one
segment at a time.
[NDF]
[DF]
Indicated when the time code is in the drop
frame mode.
Indicated when the time code generator/read
value is held.
[HOLD]
Indicated when the time code is set to advance
continuously regardless of the recording
operation.
Battery charge level indicator bar
[F-RUN]
When a battery with a digital indication (% indication) is used, all
seven segments up to the F position light if the battery charge level is
70% or higher.
When the battery charge level falls below 70%, the segments go out
one by one for each 10% drop.
Indicated when the time code is set to advance
only during recording.
[R-RUN]
[SLAVE]
Indicated when the time code is externally
locked.
Audio channel level meter
One segment indicates 2 dB increment, with the smallest indication
being −36 dB and the [OVER] indication displayed by ( at the
topmost position.
Each time you press the <MONITOR SEL> button, CH1/CH2, stereo,
CH3/CH4 are switched, and the channel display of the level meter is
switched together. (page 141)
Channels output to the monitor audio are displayed in white dropout.
When the stereo is selected, both channels are displayed in white
dropout.
5
6
Recording mode display
[REC]
Standard recording
[P-REC]
[i-REC]
[L-REC]
When pre-recording mode is set
Interval recording setting
Loop recording setting
Status information
Audio level display
Indicates whether audio CH1/CH3 or CH2/CH4
audio volume and audio level are in the auto
adjustment mode. In the auto adjustment mode,
[A] is displayed.
4
Time code indications
Each time you press the <COUNTER> button, the display changes in
the order of [CLIP] → [TC] → [tc] → [UB] → [FR] → [CLIP] (viewfinder
screen not displayed)* → [CLIP].
Audio input
Indicates the input settings of audio CH1, CH2,
CH3, and CH4.
* The time code on the viewfinder screen is hidden.
At a USB connection Indicated when the [PC MODE] item on the
setting menu [PC/USB/LAN] screen is set to
[ON], and a device selected at [PC MODE SEL]
is connected.
Indicates the counter value in
hours:minutes:seconds.
[CLIP]
Indicates the time code value in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
[TC]
f In the USB host mode: [USB
HOST CONNECTED]/[USB HOST
DISCONNECTED]
Indicates the time code value in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. The frame is
displayed after converting the frame digit to 24
frames.
[tc]
f In the USB device mode: [USB
DEVICE CONNECTED]/[USB DEVICE
DISCONNECTED]
[UB]
Indicates the user bits value.
Indicates the information of the frame rate at
which recording is performed.
Error, card warning
display
Indicates the error code when something has
caused an error on the camera.
[60I]
60i interlace mode (60 fields/sec)
60P progressive mode (60 frames/
sec)
[60P]
30P progressive mode (30 frames/
sec)
[30P]
24P progressive mode (24 frames/
sec)
[24P]*
[FR]
[24PA]*
[50I]
24P advance mode (24 frames/sec)
50i interlace mode (50 fields/sec)
50P progressive mode (50 frames/
sec)
[50P]
[25P]
25P progressive mode (25 frames/
sec)
* In the case of 24P and 24PA, the sequence
number is indicated.
– 29 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Setting the date/time of the internal clock
Setting the date/time of the internal clock
The value of the time [CLOCK SETTING] is recorded to content (clips) and affects the thumbnail playback order. Before recording, be sure to check and
set [CLOCK SETTING] and [TIME ZONE].
The following describes the procedure for setting the date and time to September 1, 2012 and 5:20 p.m.
Set the <POWER> switch to <ON>.
Select [CHANGE] at the [CLOCK SETTING] item on the
setting menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen, and press the
jog dial button.
1
2
4
Select the [TIME ZONE] item on the setting menu [OTHER
FUNCTIONS] screen, and press the jog dial button.
The [CLOCK SETTING] screen is displayed.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Set the time difference from Greenwich mean time using the
jog dial button.
3
USER FILE
>>>
ON
ACCESS LED
REC TALLY
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
Set this by referring to the time zone table.
RED
OTHER FUNCTIONS
RETURN
CHANGE
HD SDI
0
USER FILE
>>>
ON
ACCESS LED
REC TALLY
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
H PHASE
SEEK SELECT
CLIP
RED
>>>
0:00
HD SDI
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
H PHASE
Turn the jog dial button to select [YEAR], and press the jog
dial button.
5
SEEK SELECT
CLIP
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
2012
SEP
1
r Time zone table
MONTH
DAY
Time
difference
Region
Time
difference
Region
HOUR
MINUTE
13
7
00:00 Greenwich
Central Europe
+01:00
+01:30
+02:00
+02:30
+03:00
+03:30
+04:00
+04:30
+05:00
+05:30
+06:00
+06:30
+07:00
+07:30
+08:00
+08:30
+09:00
+09:30
+10:00
+10:30
+11:00
+11:30
+12:00
+12:45
+13:00
−00:30
−01:00
−01:30
−02:00
−02:30
−03:00
−03:30
−04:00
−04:30
−05:00
−05:30
−06:00
−06:30
−07:00
−07:30
−08:00
−08:30
−09:00
−09:30
−10:00
−10:30
−11:00
−11:30
−12:00
+00:30
Azores
Eastern Europe
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Mid-Atlantic
Moscow
Tehran
Turn the jog dial button, set [YEAR] to [2012], and press the
jog dial button.
6
Buenos Aires
Newfoundland
Halifax
Abu Dhabi
Kabul
The year can be set from [2000] to [2037].
Islamabad
Bombay
Dakar
Turn the jog dial button to select [MONTH], and press the jog
dial button.
7
8
9
New York
Chicago
Yangon
Bangkok
Turn the jog dial button, set [MONTH] to [SEP], and press the
jog dial button.
By the same operation for [YEAR]/[MONTH], set [DAY]/
[HOUR]/[MINUTE].
Denver
Beijing
[HOUR] is displayed in the 24-hour format.
Los Angeles
Tokyo
Darwin
CLOCK SETTING
Alaska
Guam
YEAR
2012
SEP
1
Marquesas Islands
Hawaii
Lord Howe Island
Solomon Islands
Norfolk Island
New Zealand
Chatham Islands
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
17
20
Midway Islands
Kwajalein Atoll
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
@@
t Clock accuracy is a lunar inequality of approximately ±30
seconds with the power off.
t When accurate time is required, check and reset the time. If
the value set to the [TIME ZONE] item on the setting menu
[OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen is changed after the time is set,
the display and recorded time changes to the time with the time
difference added.
– 31 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — P2 card
P2 card
Inserting a P2 card
Press the eject button that pops up to the right.
NOTE
4
@@
When a P2 card is inserted, the P2 card access LED for the
t When using the camera for the first time, be sure to set the time
P2 card access LED
Set the <POWER> switch to <ON>.
1
Open the slot cover.
2
Close the slot cover.
5
Slot cover
NOTE
@@
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot.
3
t To prevent cards from falling out, dust from entering and reduce
the risk of exposure to static electricity, close the slot cover
before moving the camera.
f Insert the card until the eject button pops out.
f Insert the card with the logo facing up.
Eject button
t Be sure to format P2 cards only on a P2 device.
Removing a P2 card
Open the slot cover.
t If a P2 card is inserted while another card is being played back,
the inserted card is not recognized and the P2 card access LED for
that card does not light. P2 card recognition starts when playback
of the other card ends.
t Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant card slot during recording,
the media may not be recognized immediately in the following
instance:
1
2
3
Raise the eject button.
Press in the eject button to remove the P2 card.
- Immediately after a pre-recording
t The P2 card access LED can be set to off at all times at the
[ACCESS LED] item on the setting menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS]
screen. In this case, turn off the power before removing the card,
or, after the card is inserted or after operation (recording, playback,
etc.) has stopped, wait for the charging to complete before
removing the card.
NOTE
t If thumbnails are displayed, the thumbnail screen will be canceled
when the P2 card is removed.
@@
t After insertion, do not remove the P2 card while it is being
accessed or recognized (the P2 card access LED is flashing
orange). Doing so may result in a malfunction.
t If the P2 card is removed while being accessed, [TURN POWER
OFF] is displayed on the viewfinder screen, the camera gives out
a warning indication by an alarm or <WARNING> lamp, etc. All P2
card access LEDs flash rapidly in orange, so, if this is the case,
turn off the power. (page 157)
t If the P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it may
become irregular. Check the clips and restore them, if required.
t If the P2 card being formatted is removed, formatting of the P2
card is not guaranteed. In this case, [TURN POWER OFF] is
displayed on the viewfinder screen displays. Turn off the power
then back on again, and reformat the P2 card.
– 32 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — P2 card
Preventing accidental erasure
To prevent the content of a P2 card from being accidentally erased, set the write-protect switch on the P2 card to the Protect position.
NOTE
@@
t Write-protect switch can be switched while the card is being
accessed (during recording or playback), but does not take effect
until accessing of the card stops.
Write-protect switch
P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards
P2 card access LED
Is illuminated green
P2 card status
Mode check display*
[ACTIVE]
Recording possible
Recording target
Accessing card
Reading/writing both possible
Reading/writing both possible. The card is currently
recording target (including loop recording, interval
recording, one-shot recording).
Is illuminated orange
[ACTIVE]
Flashing orange
Reading/writing are currently being performed.
[ACCESSING]
The card is being
recognized.
Flashing orange rapidly
The P2 card is being recognized.
[INFO READING]
There is no free space on the P2 card. The card can only
be read.
Card full
[FULL]
Flashing green slowly
The write-protect switch on the P2 card is at the Protect
position. The card can only be read.
Write protect
[PROTECTED]
[NOT SUPPORTED]
This card cannot be used on the camera. Replace the
card.
Card not supported
Format error
No card
Off
The P2 card is not properly formatted. Reformat the card. [FORMAT ERROR]
No P2 card is inserted. The card is waiting to be
[NO CARD]
recognized.
P2 card recording time
r P2 cards supported on the camera
Optional P2 cards with a capacity of 4 GB to 64 GB can be used with the camera. (As of September, 2012)
NOTE
@@
t AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) cards cannot be used.
t For the latest information not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
r P2 card recording times
(When a 64 GB card is used)
System mode
Recording format (codec)
AVC-I 100
DVCPRO HD
Recording time
Approx. 64 min
HD (1080i, 720P)
AVC-I 50
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 128 min
DVCPRO50
SD (480i)
DVCPRO
DV
Approx. 256 min
NOTE
@@
t The above table shows values for regular recording. With native recording, even longer recording times are available depending on the
t In the case of 32 GB P2 cards, the recording time becomes 1/2 of the above recording times, in the case of 16 GB P2 cards, the recording
time becomes 1/4, and in the case of 8 GB P2 cards, the recording time becomes 1/8.
t Indicated capacities include management and other area, so the space available for recording is less than the values in the table above.
– 33 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — P2 card
Dividing clips recorded on P2 cards
If P2 cards of capacity 8 GB or greater are used on the camera, recording is automatically continued as another clip when a single continuous recording
time exceeds the times in the table below. Also, when thumbnails for clips are handled (displayed, deleted, restored, etc.) on P2 devices, they can be
handled as a single clip. Clips are sometimes displayed as separate clips in nonlinear editing software and on a computer.
Recording format (excluding native recording)
Continuous recording time
AVC-I 100
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 5 min
AVC-I 50
DVCPRO50
Approx. 10 min
Approx. 20 min
DVCPRO
DV
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
P2 cards are semiconductor memory cards that are used as the recording medium in the professional video production and broadcasting devices that
make up the DVCPRO P2 series.
f Since data recording in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVC-Intra are in a file format, they have excellent compatibility with computers. However, the file
structure is a unique format, which in addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains various other important information items. The folder
structure links the data as shown below.
'ULYHꢂ?
&217(176
$8',2
&/,3
,&21
352;<
9,'(2
92,&(
/$67&/,3ꢀ7;7ꢁ
$OOꢃWKHVHꢃIROGHUVꢃDUHꢃUHTXLUHGꢀ
7KLVꢃLVꢃWKHꢃILOHꢃWRꢃZKLFKꢃWKHꢃLQIRUPDWLRQꢃRIꢃWKHꢃILQDOꢃ
FOLSꢃWKDWꢃZDVꢃUHFRUGHGꢃZLWKꢃWKHꢃ3ꢄꢃGHYLFHꢃLVꢃZULWWHQꢀ
NOTE
@@
t If even part of this information is modified or deleted, the data may no longer be recognized as P2 data, or the memory card may not longer
be able to be used with P2 devices.
t When transferring data from a P2 card to a computer, or when rewriting data saved on a computer back to a P2 card, to prevent data loss, be
sure to download the special “P2 Viewer” software from the following website and use the downloaded software. For details on the operating
environment required for the P2 Viewer, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
t When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a computer, follow the instructions below.
However, be sure to use P2 Viewer when returning data back to a P2 card.
- Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.
- Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.
- When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.
- When transferring the data in multiple P2 cards to a computer, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from
being overwritten.
- Do not delete data from the P2 card.
- Be sure to format P2 cards only on a P2 device.
– 34 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Basic procedures
Basic procedures
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording. Before you actually start shooting, pre-inspect your system to see ensure that it
works properly. (page 154)
Power supply setup to P2 card insertion
Insert a charged battery pack.
1
Turn the <POWER> switch <ON>, and check the battery
charge level indicator on the viewfinder screen or the
[HOME] screen of SmartUI.
2
If the battery charge is low, replace with a fully charged battery.
NOTE
@@
t If a low battery charge level is indicated even after replacing
with a fully charged battery, make sure that the battery has
been inserted correctly. (page 130)
Insert a P2 card, make sure that the P2 card access LED is
illuminated orange or green, and then close the slot cover.
3
When two P2 cards are inserted in the P2 card slots, the P2 card with
1
the smaller slot number will be recorded to first. Note, however, that
regardless of the slot number, if a P2 card is inserted later, that P2
card will not be accessed until the previously inserted P2 card has
been recorded to.
2
Note that the recording P2 card number is held even if the power
is turned off, and when the power is next turned on, recording will
continue on the same P2 card written before powering off.
f Example: When P2 cards are inserted in two slots
If both slots contain P2 cards, the P2 cards are recorded in order
slot number 1 → 2. However, if the P2 card is slot number 1 is
removed and then re-inserted, the P2 cards will be used in the
following order: slot number 2 → 1.
Shooting and recording switch settings
After turning on the power and inserting the P2 card, set the switches as follows before starting to use the camera.
a
b c
d
a: <USER MAIN> button
c: <OUTPUT> switch
Set this switch to CAM.AUTO KNEE ON.
d: SmartUI
On the [SET01:TC/UB] screen, set it to [F-RUN] or [R-RUN].
On the [AUD02:INPUT] screen, set [LVL] to [AUTO].
The [Y GET] function is assigned in the factory setting.
b: <GAIN> switch
Normally, set this to <L> (0 dB). If conditions are too dark, set gain to
an appropriate value.
1
2
For shooting
White/black balance adjustment to completion of recording
For shooting, use the following steps.
– 35 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Basic procedures
b
a
b
c d
e
a: <ND FILTER> dial
b: <REC> button
r To adjust the white balance on the spot:
f Select a filter matched to the lighting conditions, set the <WHITE
BAL> switch to <A> or <B>, shoot a white test subject, and adjust
the white balance by the following steps.
c: Shutter switch
d: <AUTO W/B BAL> switch
e: <WHITE BAL> switch
1) Press the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side to
Select a filter by the <ND FILTER> dial according to the light
conditions.
1
2) Set the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <ABB> side to
Operate the <WHITE BAL> switch.
2
3) Press the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side to
adjust the white balance again.
r When the white balance is already saved in memory:
f Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <A> or <B>.
Point the camera at your subject and adjust the focus and
zoom.
3
r When neither white or black balance is saved in memory and
you have no time to adjust the white balance:
When using the electronic shutter, set the shutter speed and
4
f Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <PRST>.
f The value can be changed to 3200 K, 5600 K, and the user-
specified variable value by pushing the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch
towards the <AWB> side, and pushing the <AUTO W/B BAL>
switch towards the <AWB> side again while the color temperature is
Press the <REC> button to start recording.
To stop recording, press the <REC> button again.
NOTE
5
6
@@
t When highly bright subjects (e.g. sun or lighting) are shot, the
periphery of the subject might be colored.
Standard recording
Pressing the <REC> button starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card.
A group of data consisting of video and sound generated by a single shooting action, together with additional information, is called a “clip”.
<REC> button
NOTE
@@
t In the following cases, it may take time to complete writing to the P2 card.
Pressing the <REC> button does not accept operations immediately.
- When short-burst recording is stopped
- When stopping recording immediately after recording to two P2 cards
– 36 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Standard recording and native recording
Standard recording and native recording
You can select between two recording methods: Native recording method that is performed with the shooting frame rate of the camera unchanged, and
the standard recording method where the frame rate is pulled down to 59.94 frames.
Standard recording (Pull-down recording)
Images at 24P are pulled down at a ratio of 2:3, and images at 30P are pulled down at a ratio of 2:2 and recorded at 59.94i or 59.94P.
24PA (2:3:3:2 advanced pull-down) is also supported.
AVC-Intra does not support pull-down recording.
$
%
&
'
&DPHUDꢀVKRRWLQJ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢃꢅꢆꢇ3ꢀ2YHUꢈꢃLꢉ
ꢆꢊꢋꢀSXOOꢌGRZQꢀ ꢀUHFRUGLQJ
$R $H %R %H %R &H &R 'H 'R 'H
$
%
&
'
&DPHUDꢀVKRRWLQJ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆ3ꢀ2YHUꢇꢄ3ꢈ
ꢃꢉꢊꢀSXOOꢋGRZQꢀ ꢀUHFRUGLQJ
$
$
%
%
%
&ꢀ
&
'
'
'
9DOLGꢀIUDPHV
Native recording
This recording method extracts and records valid frames at the shooting frame rates in AVC-Intra recording in 1080i, and DVCPRO HD and AVC-Intra
recording in 720P.
In the case of 720P, recording can be performed 2 to 2.5x longer than that by pull-down recording.
Even in native recording, the rate for outputting camera images and playback images is 59.94 frames that are pulled down.
&DPHUDꢀVKRRWLQJ
$
%
&
'
ꢁꢂꢃꢄꢃꢅꢆꢇ31ꢈ
ꢆꢉꢊꢀSXOOꢋGRZQ
$R $H %R %H %R &H &R 'H 'R 'H
5HFRUGLQJ
$
%
&
'
&DPHUDꢀVKRRWLQJ
$
%
&
'
ꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆ31ꢇ
ꢃꢈꢉꢀSXOOꢊGRZQ
$
$
%
%
%
&
&
'
'
'
5HFRUGLQJ
$
%
&
'
9DOLGꢀIUDPHV
NOTE
@@
t Recording starts from the top of a 5-frame cycle for 24P/24PA recording, 4-frame cycle for 24PN (native recording), and 2-frame cycle for
30PN (native recording) in 720P. Therefore, the time code may become non-continuous when recording clips continuously in system modes
with different recording cycles.
t Just after inserting a P2 card or turning on the power, recording is started using the internal memory of the camera. In this case, recording
cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognized.
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side and check the P2 card status on the [SLOT1] and [SLOT2] rows displayed on
the viewfinder screen.
t With 24PA (2:3:3:2 advance pull-down) compatible editing software, editing can be performed with less degradation compared with 24P (2:3
pull-down).
t When 24PA-compatible editing system is not used, shoot in the standard 24P mode.
– 37 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function (extra-cost option)
Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function (extra-cost option)
The variable frame rate (VFR) function can be used by installing the production pack (extra-cost option) on the camera. Time-lapse (undercrank) and
high-speed (overcrank) shooting can be performed in the 1080P and 720P modes. You can select between native (PN) and standard (OVER) recording
modes.
Native variable frame rate recording
r Setting example in the 720-59.94P mode
f It can also be set on the [CAM03:SETUP] screen of SmartUI
Set the [REC FORMAT] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM
SETUP] screen to [AVC-I100/24PN].
1
f The frame rate can be selected from 1 frame (1P) to 60 frames
(60P).
Press the <REC> button.
Set the [VFR] item on the setting menu [SCENE FILE] screen
to [ON], and set the [FRAME RATE] item to match your
specific shooting requirement.
3
2
Recording is performed in the variable frame rate mode (native
variable frame rate).
Combinations of AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50, DVCPRO HD, 30PN, and 24PN can be selected as the recording format.
For details, refer to “List of recording/playback and output formats” (page 49), “[SYSTEM SETUP] screen” (page 124).
NOTE
@@
t Note the following when recording in the native variable frame rate mode:
- During recording, the P2 card to record to cannot be switched.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, and one-clip recording are not possible.
- During recording, [ON]/[OFF] setting of the [VFR] item does not change even by switching the scene file number.
- Audio cannot be recorded.*
- The time code is fixed to rec-run (R-RUN).*
- The thumbnail screen is sometimes created with a one frame delay following the video currently recorded to the P2 card.
- If the exposure time acquired by operating the frame rate and shutter is 1/12 seconds or longer, images are clipped at the upper limit of the
brightness level when the exposure time is 1/12 seconds.
* Audio can be recorded when the recording mode is 24PN/25PN/30PN and the frame rate is 24/25/30 respectively. Also, the time code can be set to free-run
(F-RUN).
Standard variable frame rate recording (pull-down recording)
r Setting example in the 720-59.94P mode
f It can also be set on the [CAM03:SETUP] screen of SmartUI
Set the [REC FORMAT] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM
SETUP] screen to [AVC-I100/60P].
1
f The frame rate can be selected from 1 frame (1P) to 60 frames
(60P).
Press the <REC> button.
Set the [VFR] item on the setting menu [SCENE FILE] screen
to [ON], and set the [FRAME RATE] item to match your
specific shooting requirement.
3
2
Recording is performed in the variable frame rate mode (Over60P).
AVC-I 100/60P, AVC-I 50/60P and DVCPRO HD/60P can be selected as the recording format.
For details, refer to “List of recording/playback and output formats” (page 49), “[SYSTEM SETUP] screen” (page 124).
If the frame rate is set to a low value and a fast-moving subject is shot at 60P, the image will look as if it is flowing when it is played back to create an
interesting visual effect.
NOTE
@@
t When the active frames are extracted by the frame rate converter, and overcrank or undercrank is set, audio can no longer be played back.
t Note the following when recording in the standard variable frame rate mode:
- During recording, the P2 card to record to cannot be switched.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, and one-clip recording are not possible.
- During recording, [ON]/[OFF] setting of the [VFR] item does not change even by switching the scene file number.
- Audio is recorded.
- If the exposure time acquired by operating the frame rate and shutter is 1/12 seconds or longer, images are clipped at the upper limit of the
brightness level when the exposure time is 1/12 seconds.
Using the variable frame rate recording function
Standard-speed shooting for film production
With productions intended for showing on screen, the 24 fps (24 frames/second) frame rate the same as film screening is regularly used (1x speed).
The same playback as film screening can be achieved by setting as follows. Film like video can be achieved by progressive shooting and CINE-LIKE
Gamma.
– 38 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function (extra-cost option)
r Standard settings for film production
Setting
Recording frame rate
[SYSTEM MODE]
Other item settings
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
[720-59.94P]
[OFF]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[DVCPROHD/60i]
24 frames
[REC FORMAT]
[1080-59.94i]
1
[CAMERA MODE]*
[24P]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
2
[1080-23.98PsF]*
[REC FORMAT]
*1 Only when the [REC FORMAT] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is set to [DVCPROHD/60i]
*2 Can be selected by installing the production pack (extra-cost option).
Normal speed shooting for commercials/drama production
With productions intended for screening on TV screen such as HDTV/SDTV broadcasts, a 30 fps (30 frames/second) or 25 fps (25 frames/second)
frame rate is regularly used (i.e. 1x speed). The same playback as a broadcasting station can be achieved by setting as follows. Commercials and
music videos can be recorded as film like video and, moreover, at number of frames/second ideal for TV broadcasts.
r Standard settings for CM/drama production
Setting
Recording frame rate
[SYSTEM MODE]
Other item settings
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[DVCPROHD/30PN]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
[720-59.94P]
[OFF]
30 frames
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[DVCPROHD/60i]
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA MODE]*
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
[1080-59.94i]
[720-50P]
[30P]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
[OFF]
25 frames
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA MODE]*
[1080-50i]
[25P]
* Only when the [REC FORMAT] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is set to [DVCPROHD/60i] or [DVCPROHD/50i]
Undercrank shooting
This is a quick motion effect that can be applied to scenes showing the flow of clouds, people standing in the middle of crowds, and kung fu, etc. For
example, when shooting in recording format 24P for specifying the playback frame, a 2x speed quick motion effect can be obtained by setting the
variable frame rate to 12 fps.
r Standard settings for undercrank shooting
Setting
Recording frame rate
[SYSTEM MODE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
[FRAME RATE]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[720-59.94P]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
[ON]
Set to [22FRAME] or less.
1 to 22 frames
1 to 24 frames
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[1080-59.94i]
[720-50P]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
[ON]
Set to [24FRAME] or less.
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[1080-50i]
f Even if recording is not performed in the Native recording mode, Quick motion effects can be obtained by processing recorded video on a nonlinear
editing system.
f [VFR] cannot be set if [SYSTEM MODE] is set to [1080-23.98PsF].
– 39 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function (extra-cost option)
Overcrank shooting
This is a slow motion effect that can be applied to scenes such as car chases, action, climaxes, etc. For example, when recording in recording format
24P for specifying the playback frame, a 2.5x speed slow motion effect can be obtained by setting the recording frame rate to 60 fps. 720P progressive
images are smooth and provide a high-quality slow motion effect.
r Standard settings for overcrank shooting
Setting
Recording frame rate
[SYSTEM MODE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
[FRAME RATE]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
[720-59.94P]
25 to 60 frames
25 to 30 frames
26 to 50 frames
[ON]
Set to [25FRAME] or more.
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[1080-59.94i]
[720-50P]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[ON]
Set to [26FRAME] or more.
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
f Even if recording is not performed in the Native recording mode, slow motion effects can be obtained by processing recorded video on a nonlinear
recording system.
f [VFR] cannot be set if [SYSTEM MODE] is set to [1080-23.98PsF].
– 40 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Special recording functions
Special recording functions
When recording to P2 cards, the special recording functions of pre-recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, loop recording, and one-clip
recording can be performed by setting on the setting menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen.
Pre-recording and one-clip recording can be performed in all recording modes, excluding when [VFR] is set to [ON].
Interval recording, one-shot recording and loop recording can be used only in the following setting combinations.
[SYSTEM MODE]
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA MODE]
—
[VFR]
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
[1080-59.94i]
[DVCPROHD/60i]
[60i] or [30P]
[OFF]
[DVCPROHD/60P]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
[720-59.94P]
[480-59.94i]
[1080-50i]
[720-50P]
[576-50i]
—
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[60i] or [30P]
—
[OFF]
—
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
—
—
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
-—
Pre-recording
This function enables recording of video and audio from a fixed amount of time (approx. three seconds in HD recording and approx. seven seconds in
SD recording) before recording is actually started.
2SHUDWLRQꢀWRꢀVWDUWꢀUHFRUGLQJ
2SHUDWLRQꢀWRꢀVWRSꢀUHFRUGLQJ
ꢂ7LPHꢃ
$FWXDOꢀUHFRUGLQJꢀWLPH
3UHꢁUHFRUGLQJꢀWLPH
Check the settings for each item on the setting menu
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
Press the <REC> button.
1
3
Video and audio from the fixed amount of time is recorded,
f In the following instances, pre-recording is invalid and recording
begins from the moment that each operation is performed:
- When the recording format is switched
- When playback moves to recording
- At interval recording
Set the [PREREC MODE] item on the setting menu
[RECORDING SETUP] screen to [ON].
2
- At one-shot recording
The following is displayed in the special recording display area of the
- At loop recording
f Video and audio from the specific amount of time cannot be
recorded even if recording is started immediately after the thumbnail
display or playback is switched to camera video, the power is turned
on, or the [PREREC MODE] item is changed.
Recording in progress
Paused
P-REC illuminated
P-PAUSE illuminated
Interval recording
This function enables recording of single frames at the time interval set at the [INTERVAL TIME] item.
ꢀꢁIUDPHꢂUHFRUGLQJ ꢀꢁIUDPHꢂUHFRUGLQJ ꢀꢁIUDPHꢂUHFRUGLQJ
ꢃ7LPHꢄ
>,17(59$/ꢂ7,0(@ꢂSUHVHWꢂWLPH
>,17(59$/ꢂ7,0(@ꢂSUHVHWꢂWLPH
Check the settings for each item on the setting menu
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
Set the time at the [INTERVAL TIME] item on the setting
menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen.
1
3
Press the <REC> button.
4
f The single-frame recording operation is repeated at the time interval
set at the [INTERVAL TIME] item.
Set the [REC FUNCTION] item on the setting menu
[RECORDING SETUP] screen to [INTERVAL].
2
– 41 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Special recording functions
f To stop recording, press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME]
- Paused: I-PAUSE illuminated
screen of SmartUI, and press the <STOP> button.
seconds, recording in progress I-REC flashes according to the
preset time.
Recording cannot be stopped on screens other than [HOME],
because the function other than stop function is assigned to the
<STOP> button.
- Stopped: I- of I-PAUSE flashing
f To clear settings, either turn off the power or set to [NORMAL] at the
setting menu [REC FUNCTION] item.
NOTE
@@
t The pre-recording and one-clip recording are disabled.
t Audio is not recorded.
f The setting should be as follows at the left of the operating mode
display:
t Data recorded in this mode (data until the <STOP> button is
pressed) is grouped together into a single file.
- Recording: I-REC illuminated
One-shot recording
This function performs recording once only for the preset time.
f To clear settings, either turn off the power or set to [NORMAL] at the
setting menu [REC FUNCTION] item.
Check the settings for each item on the setting menu
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
1
f The setting should be as follows at the left of the operating mode
display:
- Recording: I-REC illuminated
- Paused: I-PAUSE illuminated
- Stopped: I- of I-PAUSE flashing
Set the [REC FUNCTION] item on the setting menu
[RECORDING SETUP] screen to [ONE SHOT].
2
NOTE
@@
Set the time at the [ONE SHOT TIME] item on the setting
menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen.
3
t While this function is enabled, other operations are not
accepted.
t The pre-recording and one-clip recording are disabled.
t Audio is not recorded.
t Data recorded in this mode (data until the <STOP> button is
pressed) is grouped together into a single file.
t Acceptance of other recording operations sometimes slows
down when recording is continued by one-shot recording.
Press the <REC> button.
4
recording is paused.
f To stop recording, press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME]
screen of SmartUI, and press the <STOP> button.
Recording cannot be stopped on screens other than [HOME],
because the function other than stop function is assigned to the
<STOP> button.
Loop recording
f This function successively records to two P2 cards inserted in the P2 card slots.
f When there is no more free space on the card, recording returns to the first card, and recording is continued while erasing existing data already saved
on that card.
ꢁVWꢀFDUG
ꢂQGꢀFDUG
1RꢀUHFRUGHGꢀFRQWHQW
&RQWHQWꢀUHFRUGHG
%HIRUHꢀORRSꢀUHFRUGLQJꢀVWDUWV
6WDUWꢀUHFRUGLQJ
5HFRUGLQJꢀF\FOHꢀꢁ
5HFRUGLQJꢀF\FOHꢀꢂ
A
B
B
C
Check the settings for each item on the setting menu
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
NOTE
1
@@
t When this function is used, each P2 card must have at least
one minute of free space.
t When the mode check screen is switched to, the standard
recording time in accordance with the recording format is
displayed as the P2 card remaining space. When loop recording
is stopped immediately after an old recording is erased, the time
recorded on the card is sometimes less than the indicated time.
t The pre-recording and one-clip recording are disabled.
t It may take time for recording to stop. The subsequent operation
is not accepted until the P2 card access LED stops flashing and
stays illuminated.
Set the [REC FUNCTION] item on the setting menu
[RECORDING SETUP] screen to [LOOP].
2
Press the <REC> button.
3
f Recording is started.
f To stop recording, press the <REC> button.
f To clear settings, either turn off the power or set to [NORMAL] at the
t During loop recording, all P2 card access LEDs on the P2 cards
used for recording are illuminated or flash orange. Note that
loop recording stops when these P2 cards are removed.
t Loop recording may stop when the input reference signal of the
generator lock is disrupted during loop recording.
setting menu [REC FUNCTION] item.
f The setting should be as follows at the left of the operating mode
display:
- Recording: L-REC illuminated
- Stopped: L-PAUSE illuminated
- Little free space left: P2 LACK L- flashing
– 42 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Special recording functions
One-clip recording
This function allows multiple recordings into a combined clip and does not isolate single recording (from recording start to stop).
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW 5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
ꢂQGꢀUHFRUGLQJ QWKꢀUHFRUGLQJ
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWRS 5HFRUGLQJꢀVWRS
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
ꢁVWꢀUHFRUGLQJ
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWRS
6LQJOHꢀFRPELQHGꢀFOLS
8SꢀWRꢀꢃꢃꢀUHFRUGLQJVꢀFDQꢀEHꢀFRPELQHGꢄꢀ:KHQꢀWKHꢀꢃꢃWKꢀUHFRUGLQJꢀHQGVꢅꢀUHFRUGLQJVꢀDUHꢀQRꢀORQJHUꢀ
DXWRPDWLFDOO\ꢀFRPELQHGꢀLQWRꢀWKHꢀVDPHꢀFOLSꢅꢀDQGꢀVXEVHTXHQWꢀUHFRUGLQJꢀVWDUWVꢀDVꢀDꢀQHZꢀFOLSꢄ
To use this function, set the [ONE CLIP REC] item on the [RECORDING SETUP] screen to [ON] by menu operations.
When the one-clip recording mode is selected, [1-CLIP] is displayed at the top of the viewfinder screen.
Pressing the <REC> button on the camera starts the first recording, and [START"1CLIP] is displayed.
Subsequent recordings are automatically combined into the clip. Up to 99 recordings can be combined into a single clip.
Recording a new clip
Follow the instructions below to use a new and separate clip, and end combining to the clip.
f While recording is paused, press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen on SmartUI, and press the <STOP> button for two seconds or
longer. (When operating while recording is on standby)
On screens other than [HOME], the function other than stop function is assigned to the <STOP> button.
f Press and hold the <REC> button for approximately two seconds during recording to end recording. (When operating during recording)
Follow the instructions above to end combining to the clip. [END 1-CLIP] is displayed, and subsequent recordings are made to a new and separate clip.
NOTE
@@
t In addition to the above steps, recordings are no longer automatically combined into the same clip and subsequent recording are combined
into a new clip in the following instances:
- When the power is turned off
- When the P2 card with the previous recording is removed
- When the P2 card is formatted or the clip is deleted (when the previous combined lip does not exist)
t Combining to a clip does not end even by pressing the <STOP> button in the menu or in the thumbnail display.
t Combining to a clip cannot be stopped even by pressing the <STOP> or <REC> button on the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) and on the
extension control unit (AG-EC4G).
Exiting the one-clip recording mode
Set the [ONE CLIP REC] item to [OFF] by menu operations.
Cueing to the start of the combined section of a clip
A text memo can be automatically attached to the start of the recording, the start of a section can be cued for playback, and the thumbnail of the location
can be checked before each recording.
To automatically attach a text memo at the start of recording, set the [START TEXT MEMO] item on the [RECORDING SETUP] screen to [ON] by menu
operations.
To check and play back the location of the attached text memo, select [THUMBNAIL] → [TEXT MEMO CLIPS] from the thumbnail menu and move the
cursor over the desired clip.
Also, to cue the location of the text memo for playback, set the [SEEK SELECT] item on the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen to [CLIP&T], and press the
<FF/)> or <%/REW> button while playback is paused.
Proxy recording (extra-cost option) in the one-clip recording mode
Proxy recording is possible even in the one-clip recording mode.
Since proxy data is also grouped together in the same way as a combined clip, it can be handled as a single clip in a P2 viewer, for example. However,
note the following when recording the proxy data to SD memory cards.
f When the SD memory card is removed and replaced while combining of clips is in progress, proxy recording is not performed to the SD memory card
until combining of subsequent clips ends. Check available space and the number of the files (maximum 1000 clips) before using the card. To continue
proxy recording after the SD memory card has been replaced midway, hold down the <STOP> button for approximately two seconds to end combining
of clips and start recording as a new clip.
f The proxy data on the SD memory card to which recording was stopped midway will not match the data of the clip recorded on the P2 card and will be
incomplete.
Notes on the one-clip recording mode
f The one-clip recording mode is disabled when interval recording, one-shot recording, loop recording, and variable frame rate recording functions are
selected.
– 43 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Special recording functions
f Menu and thumbnail operations are restricted as follows when combining to the clip is in progress. Press the <STOP> button for approximately two
seconds to stop combining to the clip, and try the operations again.
- The following setting menus cannot be changed.
[SYSTEM MODE], [REC SIGNAL], [CAMERA MODE], [REC FORMAT], [PC MODE], [REC FUNCTION], [25M REC CH SEL]
NOTE
@@
t The [VFR] item can be changed to “ON” by the jog dial or menu even while combining to the clip is in progress. In this case, combining of
the clip ends, and subsequent recordings are made to separate clips each time.
f The following menu items relating to reading/writing of the SD memory card and reading of setting files cannot be executed:
- [LOAD/SAVE/INIT] item on the [SCENE FILE] screen
- Each item on the [CARD FUNCTIONS] screen
- [CAC CARD READ] item on the [LENS SETUP] screen
- [USER FILE] and [MENU INIT] items on the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen
f The following thumbnail menu items cannot be selected and executed:
[OPERATION] → [COPY]
f To enable combining of the clip at the next recording, end processing of recording may take slightly longer than standard recording.
f Fade processing on non-continuous audio is not made at combining of recordings in clips at playback.
f When clips containing many clip combinations are used in nonlinear editing software, operation of the clip may not be normal depending of the type of
software. (As of September, 2012)
For the latest information on software whose operation has been verified, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Proxy recording function (extra-cost option)
By installing the video encoder board (extra-cost option), video recordings in MPEG4 or H.264 format and real-time data such as time code data can be
recorded to the P2 card and SD memory card simultaneously in addition to the video and audio of the materials recorded on the camera.
Hot swap recording
When P2 cards are inserted into two P2 card slots, recording can be performed continuously across two cards.
Also, the card other than the one currently being recorded to can be swapped and recording can be continued on two or more cards. (hot swap
recording function)
Note, however, P2 card recognition might slow down depending on the timing (immediately after pre-recording or before and after continuous recording
across two card slots) that the P2 card is inserted into the vacant card slot. When inserting a P2 card, make sure that there is at least one minute of free
space on the card to be recorded to.
NOTE
@@
t Hot swap playback is not supported.
Rec review function
f After recording ends, pressing the <RET> button on the lens automatically cues to approximately the last two seconds of video just recorded. The
playback time can be increased up to ten seconds by holding down the <RET> button on the lens.
In this way, you can check whether or not video has been recorded properly. After playback, the camera is again ready to start recording. For short
clips, however, when the start of the clip is cued to, holding down the <RET> button does not play back any clips before the current clip.
f The rec review function can be assigned to each of the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) at the [USER MAIN], [USER1], and
[USER2] items on the setting menu [SW MODE] screen.
NOTE
@@
t Note that when a backup device is connected to the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal, etc., and the backup image is being recorded, the
playback image currently in use by the recording review function will be recorded.
t In the one-clip recording mode, the furthest rewind point using rec review and the playback start point after pausing recording is not at the
start of the clip, but at the start of the most recent recording.
Shot mark recording function
Shot mark is the mark added to the thumbnail of each clip to distinguish that clip from others.
Only clips with shot marks attached can be displayed or played back.
Adding shot marks
f Another press of the button displays [SHOT MARK OFF] and the
shot mark disappears.
Assign shot marks to the desired <USER> buttons (<USER
MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) or the <RET> button on the lens
on the setting menu [SW MODE] screen.
1
NOTE
@@
t When the shot mark is added during a recording pause, it is added
to the clip recorded immediately before.
During recording or a pause after recording, press the
button to which the shot mark is assigned (the <USER>
buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) or the <RET>
button on the lens).
2
t Shot marks can also be added while the thumbnail display is
active.
t Shot marks cannot be added in loop recording, interval recording
and one-shot recording. If an operation is invalid, [SHOT MARK
INVALID] is displayed when the button is pressed.
f [SHOT MARK ON] is displayed, and the short mark is added to the
clip currently being recorded.
– 44 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Special recording functions
t During playback, setting or canceling the shot mark is not
available, but while pausing the playback, setting or canceling the
shot mark is available.
t When video data obtained by a single shooting session by hot
swap recording comprises multiple clips, the shot mark can be
set or deleted only if all P2 cards containing that video data are
inserted in the card slots. Also, with video data comprising multiple
clips like this, the shot mark can be added to the top clip only.
Text memo recording function
Text memos can be added to any video point while a clip is being recorded or played back.
Only clips with a text memo added can be selected and displayed as thumbnails, thumbnails and time codes at text memo positions can be displayed
Adding text memos
Assign text memos to the desired <USER> buttons (<USER
MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) or the <RET> button on the lens
on the setting menu [SW MODE] screen.
1
During recording or a pause after recording, press the
2
button to which the text memo is assigned (the <USER>
buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) or the <RET>
button on the lens).
[TEXT MEMO] is displayed, and the text memo is added to the video
clip that was displayed when the button was pressed.
NOTE
@@
t Up to 100 text memos can be recorded to a single clip.
t Text memos cannot be added in loop recording, interval recording
and one-shot recording. If an operation is invalid, [TEXT MEMO
INVALID] is displayed when the button is pressed.
– 45 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback — Normal and variable speed playback
Normal and variable speed playback
r Normal speed playback
Color playback images can be viewed on the viewfinder screen by pressing the <PLAY/PAUSE> button. Likewise, color playback images can be viewed
on a color video monitor connected to the <MON OUT>, <SDI OUT/IN (OP)>, or <HDMI> terminal.
Playback can also be paused by pressing the <PLAY/PAUSE> button during playback.
r Fast-forward and fast-reverse playback
The <FF/)> and <%/REW> buttons provide 32x and 4x fast-forward and fast-reverse playback. Pressing these buttons during a stop and playback
fast-forwards and fast-reverses at 32x and 4x speed, respectively.
r Cueing clips
If the <FF/)> button is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the next clip (cued state). If the <%/
REW> button is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the clip currently being played back (cued
state).
NOTE
@@
t When playing back or switching to the thumbnail screen immediately after removing or inserting the P2 card or the power is turned on, it may
take time to read the clip information. During this time, [UPDATING..] is displayed on the thumbnail screen.
t If a P2 card is inserted while another card is being played back, the clips on the inserted card cannot be played back. A P2 card inserted
during playback is recognized after playback ends.
t When playing back clips spread over multiple P2 cards at variable speed, audio might be instantaneously interrupted, though this is not a
malfunction.
t To play back clips in the different system mode, match the [SYSTEM MODE] item to the format of the clip and set the camera again.
t Audio of CH5 to CH8 recorded on another device cannot be played back.
– 46 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for
Recording
This chapter describes how to set convenient functions such as adjusting
white and black balance, adjusting shooting functions such as flash
band compensation (FBC) function, assigning functions to the <USER>
buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>), and setting the time data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Multi formats
Multi formats
Selecting recording signals
The camera records images in the format of HD (1080i, 720P) signals combining the AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codecs, and SD (480i/576i) signals
combining the DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV codecs respectively.
Various shooting frames and recording frames (native recording) can be selected according to your specific requirements.
You can select recording and shooting signals in the following setting menus.
Setting menu screen
Setting menu item
Description of settings
Select the 1080i/720P/480i/576i signal format.
[SYSTEM MODE]
When this setting is changed, wait until [TURN POWER OFF] is displayed, and turn off the power
then back on again.
Can be switched between recording of shooting with the camera [CAMERA] and input recording of
the SDI signal [SDI IN] by installing the HD/SD SDI input board (extra-cost option).
[REC SIGNAL]
[REC FORMAT]
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen
Select the codec of AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD in the HD mode, and select each codec of
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV in the SD mode. Set the shooting frame rate at the same time.
[CAMERA MODE]
[ASPECT CONV]
Select the pull-down shooting mode when not in the native recording.
In the SD mode, select the video aspect ratio for recording and output.
Can be switched by installing the production pack (extra-cost option). When is set to [ON],
shooting by the variable frame rate recording function is possible, and shooting and recording can
be performed according to the shooting frame rate setting of the [FRAME RATE] item.
[VFR]
[SCENE FILE] screen
Can be switched by installing the production pack (extra-cost option). Set the number of frames for
variable frame rate shooting when the [VFR] item is set to [ON].
[FRAME RATE]
NOTE
@@
t When the [SYSTEM MODE], [REC SIGNAL], [REC FORMAT], or [CAMERA MODE] item is changed, video or audio may be interrupted, but
this is not a malfunction.
List of recording formats and recording functions
The table below shows the formats supported by the camera and recording functions.
r Recording formats and recording playback times
Recording format
Capacity
AVC-Intra 100
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 32 min
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 16 min
Approx. 32 min
AVC-Intra 50
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 256 min
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 32 min
Approx. 64 min
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 32 min
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 16 min
Approx. 32 min
DVCPRO50
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 256 min
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 32 min
Approx. 64 min
DVCPRO/DV
Approx. 256 min
Approx. 512 min
Approx. 128 min
Approx. 256 min
Approx. 64 min
Approx. 128 min
1 card
2 cards
1 card
64 GB
32 GB
16 GB
2 cards
1 card
2 cards
f Recording playback time becomes 1.25 times longer in 24PN native recording.
f The above times were obtained by continuous recording as a single clip. The overall recording time might be shorter than the times above depending
on the number of clips to record.
List of recording settings and recording functions
The recording modes of the camera act as follows depending on the menu settings.
Setting
Recording setting (setting menu)
[REC
FUNCTION]
Recording/operation enabled/disabled
[REC
FORMAT]
Pre-
recording
One-clip
1
1
Operation mode [REC SIGNAL]
Interval recording
[VFR]*
Proxy*
Text memo Shot mark
recording
[INTERVAL]
One-shot
recording
Not
available
Not
available
Not
available
Not
available
Not
available
[ONE SHOT]
[LOOP]
Disabled
[ON]
Disabled
Loop recording
Native variable
[CAMERA]
[24PN],
Not
Not
available*
Not
available*
2
2
2
frame rate (VFR)
[30PN], [25PN] available*
Other than
Not
available
[30PN], [25PN]
Standard variable
frame rate (VFR)
[NORMAL]
Disabled
Not
available
Not
available
[24PN],
Available
Available
Standard recording
[OFF]
All formats
Available
Available
Available
Available
Input recording of
[SDI IN]
[60i], [50i],
[60P], [50P]
Not
available
Not
available
Disabled
SDI signal
*1 This becomes valid when the production pack (extra-cost option) is installed.
*2 This becomes valid when the frame rates of [REC FORMAT] and [VFR] are the same.
– 48 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Multi formats
Selecting video output
The video output method can be selected.
Video output can be selected, for example, in the following setting menus.
Setting menu item
Description of settings
[MON]
Select the signal method used to output to the <MON OUT> and <HDMI> terminals.
([SET02:MON/HDMI FORMAT] screen of SmartUI)
Select the setup level of the signal (composite) to output to the <MON OUT> terminal.
f [0%]: 0% setup for both output and recording
[SETUP]
([SYSTEM SETUP] screen)
f [7.5%A]: 7.5% setup for output only (recording 0%)
The [SETUP] menu setting is valid at playback, too.
[D.CON]
Select the screen type at down conversion output (composite and SD SDI output) in the HD
mode (1080i, 720P).
([SET02:MON/HDMI FORMAT] screen of SmartUI)
Selecting video output from each terminal
Monitor output setting
([SET02:MON/HDMI
FORMAT] screen of
SmartUI)*
Video output
[SYSTEM MODE]
[MON]
[AUTO]
[480i]
[HDMI]
[1080i/720P]
[480P]
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
<MON OUT> terminal
1080/59.94i (HD SDI)
480/59.94i (SD SDI)
480/59.94i (VBS)
1080/59.94i (HD SDI)
480/59.94i (SD SDI)
480/59.94i (VBS)
720/59.94p (HD SDI)
480/59.94i (SD SDI)
480/59.94i (VBS)
480/59.94i (SD SDI)
480/59.94i (VBS)
1080/50i (HD SDI)
576/50i (SD SDI)
576/50i (VBS)
<HDMI> terminal
1080/59.94i
480/59.94p
480/59.94p
1080/59.94i
480/59.94p
480/59.94p
720/59.94p
480/59.94p
480/59.94p
480/59.94p
480/59.94p
1080/50i
[1080-59.94i]
1080/59.94i
[VBS]
[AUTO]
[480i]
[480P]
[1080i/720P]
[480P]
[1080-23.98PsF]
(extra-cost option)
1080-23.98PsF
[VBS]
[AUTO]
[480i]
[480P]
[1080i/720P]
[480P]
[720-59.94P]
[480-59.94i]
[1080-50i]
720/59.94p
480/59.94i
1080/50i
[VBS]
[SDI]
[480P]
[480P]
[VBS]
[AUTO]
[576i]
[480P]
[1080i/720P]
[576P]
576/50p
[VBS]
[AUTO]
[576i]
[576P]
576/50p
[1080i/720P]
[576P]
720/50p (HD SDI)
576/50i (SD SDI)
576/50i (VBS)
720/50p
[720-50P]
[576-50i]
720/50p
576/50i
576/50p
[VBS]
[SDI]
[576P]
576/50p
[576P]
576/50i (SD SDI)
576/50i (VBS)
576/50p
[VBS]
[576P]
576/50p
* The [MON] item and the [HDMI] item are interlocked.
List of recording/playback and output formats
r Camera recording mode (when the [REC SIGNAL] item is [CAMERA])
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-59.94i])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
MODE]
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
1080/60i
1080-59.94i
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
Disabled
1080/30PN Native
4ch
4ch
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
1080/24PN Native
1080/60i
[60i]
[OFF]
Disabled
1080-59.94i
1080/30P Over60i 2:2 Pull
Down
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
[30P]
[DVCPROHD/60i]
DVCPRO HD
1080/24P Over60i 2:3 Pull
Down
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
[24P]
1080/24PA Over60i 2:3:3:2
Pull Down
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
[24PA]
– 49 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Multi formats
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-59.94i])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
MODE]
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
1080/60i
4ch
1080/30PN Native VFR
(At 30P: 30PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 30P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
[1] - [30P]
1080-59.94i VFR
1080/24PN Native VFR
(At 24P: 24PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 24P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
[ON]*
[60i]
[30P]
[24P]
[24PA]
[1] - [30P]
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1080/60i
1080-59.94i VFR
4ch
—
Not available
Not available
Not available
—
—
—
DVCPRO
HD
[DVCPROHD/60i]
—
—
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-50i])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/50i]
1080/50i
1080-50i
[AVC-I50/50i]
Disabled
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
4ch
[AVC-I100/25PN]
1080/25PN Native
1080/50i
1080-25PsF Over50i 2:2
1080-50i
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[OFF]
Disabled
[50i]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
[25P]
DVCPRO HD
4ch
4ch
1080/25P Over50i 2:2 Pull
Down
1080-25PsF Over50i 2:2
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
1080/50i
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
[1] - [25P]
1080-50i VFR
1080/24PN Native VFR
(At 25P: 25PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 25P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[ON]*
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[50i]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
[25P]
[1] - [25P]
Disabled
1080/50i
1080-50i VFR
4ch
DVCPRO HD
Not available
—
—
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-23.98PsF]*)
[CAMERA
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
1080-23.98PsF
Over47.96i 2:2
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1080/24PN Native
4ch
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [720-59.94P])
[CAMERA
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
720/60P
720-59.94P
4ch
4ch
4ch
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720-29.97P Over59.94P
2:2
720/30PN Native
720/24PN Native
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
720-23.98P Over59.94P
2:3
Disabled
[OFF]
Disabled
720-59.94P
[DVCPROHD/60P]
720/60P
720-59.94P VFR
4ch
4ch
720-29.97P Over59.94P
2:2
DVCPRO HD
[DVCPROHD/30PN]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
720/30PN Native
720/24PN Native
720-23.98P Over59.94P
2:3
– 50 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Multi formats
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [720-59.94P])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
MODE]
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
720/60P VFR
4ch
720/30PN Native VFR
(At 30P: 30PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 30P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/24PN Native VFR
(At 24P: 24PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 24P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
720/60P (At 60P)
720/30P Over60P 2:2 Pull
Down (At 30P)
Disabled
[ON]*
[1] - [60P]
720-59.94P VFR
[DVCPROHD/60P]
720/24P Over60P 2:3 Pull
Down (At 24P)
4ch
For other than above,
720/60P VFR
DVCPRO HD
720/30PN Native VFR
(At 30P: 30PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 30P: 4ch
available)
[DVCPROHD/30PN]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
720/24PN Native VFR
(At 24P: 24PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 24P: 4ch
available)
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [720-50P])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
720/50P
720-50P
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
4ch
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
720/25PN Native
720/50P
720-25P Over50P 2:2
720-50P
Disabled
[OFF]
Disabled
[DVCPROHD/50P]
DVCPRO HD
4ch
4ch
720/25P Over50P 2:2 Pull
Down
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
720-25P Over50P 2:2
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
720/50P VFR
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/25PN Native VFR
(At 25P: 25PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 25P: 4ch
available)
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
720/50P (At 50P)
720/25P Over50P 2:2 Pull
Down (At 25P)
For other than above,
720/50P VFR
Disabled
[ON]*
[1] - [50P]
720-50P VFR
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
4ch
DVCPRO HD
720/25PN Native VFR
(At 25P: 25PN Native audio
recordable)
Mute
(At 25P: 4ch
available)
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [480-59.94i])
[CAMERA
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[60i]
480/60i
480-59.94i
480/30P Over60i 2:2 Pull
Down
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
[30P]
[24P]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
Disabled
Disabled
4ch or 2ch
480/24P Over60i 2:3 Pull
Down
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
480/24PA Over60i 2:3:3:2
Pull Down
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
[24PA]
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [576-50i])
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
576-50i
Audio
MODE]
[50i]
576-50i
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
Disabled
Disabled
4ch or 2ch
576/25P Over50i 2:2 Pull
Down
[25P]
576-25PsF Over50i 2:2
* The variable frame rate recording function, [1080-23.98PsF] in [SYSTEM MODE] are enabled when the production pack (extra-cost option) is installed.
[24P] is recorded at 23.98P, [30P] is recorded at 29.97P, [60P] and [60i] are recorded at 59.94P and 59.94i. In the native recording mode, only valid frames are
recorded.
With DVCPRO50, the CH4 setting is applied, and with DVCPRO and DV, [2CH] or [4CH] setting of the [25M REC CH SEL] item on the [AUDIO SETUP] screen is
applied.
– 51 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Multi formats
r SDI signal input recording mode (when the [REC SIGNAL] item is [SDI IN])
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-59.94i])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1080/60i
1080-59.94i
4ch
[DVCPROHD/60i]
DVCPRO HD
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [1080-50i])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1080/50i
1080-50i
4ch
[DVCPROHD/50i]
DVCPRO HD
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [720-59.94P])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
720/60P
720-59.94P
4ch
[DVCPROHD/60P]
DVCPRO HD
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [720-50P])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
720/50P
720-50P
4ch
[DVCPROHD/50P]
DVCPRO HD
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [480-59.94i])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[FRAME
RATE]
[REC FORMAT]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
4ch
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
480/60i
480-59.94i
2ch or 4ch
Setting ([SYSTEM MODE] = [576-50i])
<MON OUT> terminal (<SDI OUT/IN
(OP)> terminal)
Recording format
[CAMERA
[REC FORMAT]
[FRAME
RATE]
[VFR]
Video format
Audio
MODE]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
4ch
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
576/50i
576-50i
2ch or 4ch
When [1080-23.98PsF] (extra-cost option) is selected, SDI signal input recording is not available.
– 52 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Adjusting the white and black balance
Adjusting the white and black balance
To obtain high-quality video at all times using the camera, the white and black balance must be adjusted according to conditions.
To obtain higher quality, perform the adjustment in the order of AWB (white balance adjustment) → ABB (black balance adjustment) → AWB (white
balance adjustment).
NOTE
@@
t When white or black balance is adjusted while video is disrupted by the generator lock, adjustment may not be performed correctly. Adjust
white or black balance again after video has returned to normal.
Adjusting the white balance
The white balance must be adjusted again when the lighting conditions change. To adjust the white balance automatically, follow the procedure below.
a
b
c
d
e
a: <ND FILTER> dial
d: <OUTPUT> switch
Adjust the amount of light entering the MOS sensor.
Set this switch to <CAM>.
b: <AUTO W/B BAL> switch
e: <WHITE BAL> switch
Used to execute the automatic white balance.
Set this switch to <A> or <B>.
c: <GAIN> switch
Normally, set this to 0 dB. If conditions are too dark, set gain to an
appropriate value.
r When the <WHITE BAL> switch is set to <A>
Set the <GAIN>, <OUTPUT>, and <WHITE BAL> switches.
Set the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side,
and then release it.
1
5
Select the <ND FILTER> dial setting according to the light
conditions.
2
The switch returns to the central position with the white balance
automatically adjusted.
For details on setting example of the <ND FILTER> dial, refer to
During an adjustment, the following message is displayed on
the viewfinder screen:
6
Place the white pattern at a point where the light conditions
match those for the light source for the subject, and zoom
in on the white pattern so that the white color appears in the
screen.
3
AWB Ach ACTIVE
The adjustment is compete in several seconds, and the
following message is displayed:
7
A white object (cloth or wall) near the subject may also be used
instead of a white pattern. The illustration below shows the required
size for the white space.
f The adjusted value is automatically stored in the specified memory
(A or B).
NOTE
@@
AWB
A
OK 3.2K
t Do not allow bright spotlights within the screen.
t The white object must appear at the center of the screen.
ꢀꢁꢂꢃRUꢃPRUHꢃRIꢃWKHꢃVFUHHQꢃZLGWK
f If the [COLOR TEMP] setting of the scene file at this time is other
than 0, [C TEMP+7] to [C TEMP−7] is displayed.
If the color temperature of the subject is lower than 2300 K
or higher than 9900 K, the following message is displayed:
8
f If the arrow points down (↓), the actual temperature is lower than
the indicated temperature, and if the arrow points up (↑), the actual
temperature is higher than the indicated temperature.
ꢀꢁꢂꢃRUꢃPRUHꢃRIꢃWKHꢃ
VFUHHQꢃKHLJKW
AWB
A
OK 2.3K
Adjust the lens aperture.
4
Activate the [Y GET] function (page 60), and adjust the iris so that
the display is approximately 70%.
– 53 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Adjusting the white and black balance
When you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <PRST>.
The value can be changed to 3200 K, 5600 K, and the user-specified variable value by pressing the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side
and pressing the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards the <AWB> side again while the color temperature is displayed. The variable value can be set at
SmartUI.
When the white balance has not been automatically adjusted
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted, the viewfinder screen displays an error message.
Error message
[AWB Ach NG] or [AWB Bch NG]
Description
The color temperature is too high or too low.
There is insufficient light.
[LOW LIGHT]
[LEVEL OVER]
There is too much light.
Viewfinder display for white balance
Setting the auto tracking white balance (ATW) function
The camera is equipped with the Auto Tracking White Balance (ATW) function that automatically tracks the white balance of images according to the
lighting conditions.
The auto tracking white balance function can be assigned to <B> of the <WHITE BAL> switch by setting the [ATW] item on the setting menu [SW
MODE] screen to [Bch].
The auto tracking white balance function can be assigned to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>).
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
12dB
Bch
3.2K
Y_GET
BACKLIGHT
TEXT MEMO
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Canceling the auto tracking white balance
Press the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to which the auto tracking white balance function is assigned again, or select the
<WHITE BAL> switch. However, when the auto tracking white balance function is set to <B> of the <WHITE BAL> switch, the function cannot be
canceled with the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>).
NOTE
@@
t This function does not guarantee 100% accuracy for the white balance. The tracking performance relative to changes in ambient lighting and
white balance performance has been given a certain degree of latitude.
– 54 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Adjusting the white and black balance
Adjusting the black balance
Black balance must be adjusted in the following instances:
f When the camera is used for the first time
f When the camera has not been used for a long time
f When the ambient temperature has changed considerably
f When the gain switchover value has been changed
f When the [SYSTEM MODE] and [REC FORMAT] items on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen has been changed
To shoot optimum video, we recommend adjusting the black balance immediately before shooting.
a
b
a: <AUTO W/B BAL> switch
Used to execute the automatic black balance.
b: <OUTPUT> switch
Set this switch to <CAM>.
Set the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch towards <ABB> and then
release it.
1
The switch returns to the central position with the black balance
automatically adjusted.
During an adjustment, the following message is displayed on
the viewfinder screen:
2
ABB ACTIVE
The adjustment is complete in several seconds, and the
following message is displayed:
3
ABB END
The adjusted value is automatically stored in memory.
NOTE
@@
t Make sure that the lens connector is connected and that the lens
aperture is in the close mode.
t During black balance adjustment, the aperture is set to
automatically shut out light. Note, however, that [ABB NG] is
sometimes displayed when light is not shut out due, for example, to
the lens connector becoming disconnected.
t During recording, black balance cannot be adjusted.
t During the automatic black balance execution, recording to the P2
card is not performed by pressing the <REC> button.
– 55 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the electronic shutter
Setting the electronic shutter
Setting the shutter mode and speed
r In the case of 30P recording
Press the shutter switch positioned at OFF towards ON.
1
S/S (1/15) 1/30 1/50 1/60
1/250 1/500 1/1000
1/120
r In the case of 24P recording
S/S (1/12) 1/24 1/50 1/60
1/250 1/500 1/1000
1/120
f When [VFR] is [ON], the speed in parentheses ( ) cannot be
selected.
NOTE
@@
t Whichever mode the electronic shutter is used in, the higher the
shutter speed, the lower the sensitivity of the camera becomes.
t When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will increasingly
open and the depth of focus will become shallower as the
shutter speed is increased.
Shutter switch
Press the shutter switch from <ON> towards <SEL>, and
repeat this operation until the desired mode or speed is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
2
t The screen might be disrupted when the synchro scan and
shutter settings are changed.
f If all modes and speeds are available, the display changes in the
following order.
t Under lighting conditions using fluorescent lighting or other
discharge tube, horizontal stripes might appear on screen. If
this happens, this can be improved by adjusting the shutter
speed.
r In the case of 60i, 60P recording
t A subject that quickly crosses the camera may appear distorted
when shot. This is due to the method applied for reading the
signals from the pickup device (MOS sensor), and is not a
malfunction.
S/S (1/15) (1/30) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/500 1/1000 1/2000
1/250
t Red, blue or green spots might appear on screen at slow
shutter speeds, though this is not a malfunction.
Viewfinder screen display for shutter
Setting the synchro scan mode
Follow the steps below to set the mode.
Press the shutter switch from the <ON> side towards the
<SEL> side to set to the synchro scan mode.
1
Jog dial button
Shutter switch
Operate the jog dial button to switch the setting between
the range of 1/60.0 and 1/249.8 seconds successively (in 60i
mode).
2
Press and turn the jog dial button to change the shutter speed setting
value faster.
– 56 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the electronic shutter
Variable ranges in each mode
60P/60i mode
1/60.0 - 1/249.8
1/50.0 - 1/250.0
1/25.0 - 1/250.0
1/30.0 - 1/249.8
1/24.0 - 1/249.8
50P/50i mode
25P/25PN mode
30P/30PN mode
24P/24PA/24PN mode
When [SYNC SCAN DISP] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] is [deg] 3.0d to 360.0d
f The shutter speed may vary before and after [SYSTEM MODE] is switched.
f When the variable frame rate is less than 12P, the selection step becomes less precise.
f Set the [SYNC SCAN DISP] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen to [deg] to set and display as the shutter open angle.
– 57 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Flash band compensation (FBC) function
Flash band compensation (FBC) function
The camera is equipped with a function for compensating and reducing band-like interference (called “flash band”) that occurs due to the MOS pickup
device when shooting in environments where flash strobe light such as that from still cameras is present.
Change over time
Flash firing
Shot image
(FBC OFF)
Flash band
Setting the flash band compensation function
Assign the flash band compensation function to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>).
By pressing the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to which the flash band compensation function, the function turns on, and flash
strobe from a still camera, etc. can be detected and compensated.
<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2> buttons
When the flash band compensation function is enabled, FBC is displayed on the status screen.*
T C * 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2
9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
F U L L
I - P AU S E 1 - C L I P
U S E R - 1
C AC D Z x 2
F B C
SDI
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
60
P 3 .2K
ERR
PROXY
0
dB
L T . BOX
E X
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
S E P
DR S
1/ 1 2 3 . 4
1
2 0 1 2 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 PN
= = = = = = = =
S PO T
F 5 . 6
FM 6 0
CH 1
CH 2
0
Z 6
* This is not displayed when the [OTHER DISPLAY] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set to [OFF].
NOTE
@@
t When the flash strobe lights, the following phenomena may occur, but these are due to the flash band compensation function and are not
malfunctions:
- Moving subjects look as if they have stopped suddenly.
- The resolution when the flash strobe light drops.
- Horizontal lines appear in the video when the flash strobe lights.
Using the flash band compensation function
The flash band compensation function is activated when there are large changes in brightness at the bottom of the screen regardless of whether there
is flash strobe light. The flash band compensation function may be activated depending on the shooting environment such as where a bright window has
zoomed in and then out, so, we recommend use of this function in shooting environments where flash strobe lighting is anticipated.
Even if flash strobe lighting occurs, sufficient flash band compensation function effect may not be obtained in some shooting environments.
– 58 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Flash band compensation (FBC) function
Operation conditions for the flash band compensation function
f The flash band compensation function can be used when the camera is in the 59.94i, 59.94P, 50i, or 50P mode, and the shutter switch is set to <OFF>
and the digital zoom function turns off.
f Even if the flash band compensation function is activated, the flash band compensation function is forcibly turned off if the camera is changed to the
mode where the flash band compensation function cannot be used.
To use the function again, return to the mode where the function can be used, and press the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>)
to turn on the flash band compensation function.
f Even if the flash band compensation function is activated, the flash band compensation function temporarily turns off when the shutter switch is set to
<ON>. The flash band compensation function returns to on when the shutter switch next changes to <OFF>.
f The flash band compensation function turns off once the power is turned off.
– 59 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Assigning functions to <USER> buttons
Assigning functions to <USER> buttons
Selected functions can be assigned to the <USER MAIN>, <USER1>, and <USER2> buttons.
Set the functions to be assigned at the [USER MAIN], [USER1], and [USER2] items on the setting menu [SW MODE] screen. Each item is set from the
setting menu [SW MODE] screen.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
3.2K
Y_GET
BACKLIGHT
TEXT MEMO
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Selectable functions
Item name
Description
[SPOT LIGHT]
[BACK LIGHT]
[ATW]
Assigns on/off of auto iris control for spotlight.
Assigns on/off of auto iris control for the backlight compensation.
Switches the auto tracking white balance function on/off.
[ATW LOCK]
Fixes the white balance value when pressing this item while the auto tracking white balance function is activated. Resumes the auto
tracking white balance function when pressing again.
[GAIN:18dB]
Assigns the function for increasing gain to 18 dB.
[D.ZOOMX2]
[D.ZOOMX4]
Assigns the digital zoom function.
Zooms in on the field angle by 2x/4x vertically and horizontally.
[FBC]
Switches the flash band compensation function on/off.
[Y GET]
[WFM]
Assigns the function for displaying the brightness level of the frame area displayed near the center.
Assigns the function for switching the waveform display. Select the waveform display at the [WFM] item (page 126) on the setting menu
[SW MODE] screen.
[PRE REC]
Assigns the function for switching the pre-recording function on/off.
Assigns the rec review function.
[REC REVIEW]
[TEXT MEMO]
[SHOT MARK]
[SLOT SEL]
Assigns text memo recording.
Assigns the shot mark recording function.
Assigns P2 card slot selection.
[A.MONI SEL]
Switches CH1 monaural, CH1/CH2 stereo, and CH2 monaural when the audio monitor channel is CH1/CH2. Switches CH3 monaural,
CH3/CH4 stereo, and CH4 monaural when the audio monitor channel is CH3/CH4.
[PC MODE]
[INHIBIT]
Assigns the function for switching USB device mode or USB host mode on/off. Select the USB device mode or USB host mode at the [PC
MODE SEL] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN] screen.
Disables assignment of functions.
NOTE
@@
t Factory assignment settings are as follows:
<USER MAIN>
<USER1>
[Y GET]
[BACK LIGHT]
[TEXT MEMO]
<USER2>
– 60 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
The camera supports independent 4-channel sound recording in any recording format (HD, SD).
When the [LVL] setting is set to [AUTO] on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI, the recording level of audio channels 1/2/3/4 is automatically
adjusted. Also, you can adjust the level manually by setting to [MANU].
Selecting audio input signals
[
]
CH3 4
/
AUD02:INPUT
CH1
CH2
FRONT
FRONT
W.L. AUTO
W.L. AUTO
REAR MANU REAR MANU
[
] [
] [
] [
LVL
]
IN
LVL
IN
When using the DVCPRO or DV format, the factory settings are set to not record audio channels 3 and 4. When recording channel 4, set the [25M REC
CH SEL] item on the setting menu [AUDIO SETUP] screen to [4CH].
NOTE
@@
t The audio signals recorded in 4-channel are output with SDI signals.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FRONT VR CH2
FRONT VR CH3
FRONT VR CH4
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Adjusting the recording levels
Adjust the recording level to audio channels 1/2 by the following procedure.
Press the <MONITOR SEL> button on the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI so that the audio channel level meter displays CH1
and CH2, and make sure that the display is 1 and 2.
1
Set [LVL] on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI to
[MANU].
2
Adjust the level by [+] or [−] on the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen of
SmartUI while viewing the audio channel level meter display.
3
When the topmost bar (0 dB) is exceeded, [
] of the [OVER]
display is illuminated to indicate that input audio is excessive. Adjust
the maximum level so that the display does not reach 0 dB.
[
][ ]
RST CH3 4
/
AUD01:LEVEL
CH3
CH4
A
100
23
[
] [
] [
] [
]
–
+
–
+
When operating the camera alone, use the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial to
adjust the audio level.
Select the audio channel to be adjusted in advance, and while
viewing the level meter of the viewfinder screen, adjust the level by
the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial so that input does not become too great.
– 61 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
Selecting <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial function
Set whether to enable <F.AUDIO LEVEL> (audio recording level adjustment) dial operation by the [FRONT VR CH1], [FRONT VR CH2], [FRONT VR
CH3], and [FRONT VR CH4] items on the setting menu [AUDIO SETUP] screen. When the input signal is selected in the menu, the <F.AUDIO LEVEL>
dial operation is enabled for that input signal.
f The audio level when the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial is at level 10 becomes the value set in the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen of SmartUI.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FRONT VR CH2
FRONT VR CH3
FRONT VR CH4
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
The recording level of CH3/CH4 can be set in the same way as CH1/CH2.
– 62 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
Setting the time data
The camera provides time codes, user bits, and date/time (real time) data as time data, and they are recorded in frame in sync with video. They are also
recorded as data for clip metadata files.
Definition of time data
r Time code
Rec run and free run can be switched by the [TC_MD] setting on the [SET01:TC/UB] screen of SmartUI.
f Free run: The time code always advances even when the power is turned off, and it can be handled in the same way as time. It can also be slaved to
the time code input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
f Rec run: The time code advances only during recording. Normally, the time code is recorded as sequential values to the previously recorded clip, and
is held even if the power is turned off or the P2 card is replaced.
NOTE
@@
t Values are not sequential in the following instances:
- When a recorded clip has been deleted
- When the 24P or 24PA frame rate has been switched to
- When 24PN or 30PN has been switched to
- When an error such as [REC WARNING] has stopped recording midway
r User bits
f Two types of user bits are built in: LTC UB (recorded as LTC, and output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal and as LTC of HD SDI signals) and VITC UB
(with DVCPRO, recorded in the VIDEO AUX area, and output as VITC of HD SDI signals).
f For LTC UB, you can select and record each respective user set values, time, year/month/day, with the same value as time codes, camera photo
frame rate information, input value of external signals (from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal), etc.
f For VITC UB, the camera photo frame rate information is recorded.
f The LTC UB value at the start of recording is recorded to the user bits of the clip metadata.
r Date/time (real time)
f The internal clock measures the year, month, day, and time, and can display these on the viewfinder screen and on the output video from the <MON
OUT> terminal, etc.
f The internal clock is used for measuring the free run time code while the power is off and as the time and year/month/day data of the user bits, as well
as the reference for file generation times during clip recording, which determine the sorting order of thumbnails and the order of playback.
f It is also used to generate clip metadata and UMID (Unique Material Identifier).
Recording and output of time codes and user bits
Recording and output of time codes
System setting state
[REC FORMAT]
Recording TC
Output TC
LTC of HD
SDI, VITC
Display TC
[SYSTEM
MODE]
[REC
SIGNAL]
[CAMERA [FRAME
TC tc (24/30
conversion)
LTC
VITC
TC OUT
1
MODE]
RATE]*
[60i], [30P]
—
2
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[DF]/[NDF]
[1FRAME]
to
[30FRAME]
(60i)
30 frames
[DVCPROHD/60i]
3
2
2
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[NDF] fixed
[24P],
[24PA]
—
30 frames
LTC is output.
[1FRAME]
to
[30FRAME]
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[DF]/[NDF]
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
—
—
30 frames
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[DF]/[NDF]
[30FRAME]
[1080-59.94i] [CAMERA]
30 frames
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[R-RUN] fixed
[DF]/[NDF]
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
Other than
[30FRAME]
At each valid frame
30 frames
30 frames/second
4
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
Converted to 30 frames based
on LTC.
[24FRAME]
[NDF] fixed
24 frames
Recording
TC: 24 frames
Playback
TC: 24 frames
tc: 30 frames
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
—
—
[R-RUN] fixed
[NDF] fixed
At each valid frame
24 frames
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
Other than
[24FRAME]
30 frames/second
5
[DVCPROHD/60i]
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
[1080-59.94i]
[SDI IN]
—
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
LTC is output.
– 63 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
System setting state
[REC FORMAT]
Recording TC
Output TC
LTC of HD
SDI, VITC
Display TC
[SYSTEM
MODE]
[REC
SIGNAL]
[CAMERA [FRAME
TC tc (24/30
conversion)
LTC
VITC
TC OUT
1
MODE]
RATE]*
Recording
TC: 24 frames
Playback
TC: 24 frames
tc: 30 frames
6
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[NDF] fixed
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
LTC is output.
24 frames/second
1
[1080-23.98PsF]*
—
—
—
24 frames
2
3
7
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[DF]/[NDF]
Other than
[24FRAME]
—
—
—
[DVCPROHD/60P]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
30 frames
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[NDF] fixed
[24FRAME]
[30FRAME]
LTC is output.
30 frames
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
[DVCPROHD/30PN]
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[R-RUN] fixed
[DF]/[NDF]
At each valid frame
30 frames
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
[CAMERA]
Other than
[30FRAME]
—
—
[720-59.94P]
30 frames/second
LTC is
4
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
converted to
LTC is output.
30 frames and
[24FRAME]
[NDF] fixed
24 frames
Recording
TC: 24 frames
Playback
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
output.
[R-RUN] fixed
[NDF] fixed
At each valid frame
24 frames
TC: 24 frames
tc: 30 frames
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
Other than
[24FRAME]
—
—
30 frames/second
5
[DVCPROHD/60P]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
[SDI IN]
—
—
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
LTC is output.
[R-RUN]/
2
[F-RUN]*
[60i], [30P]
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
[CAMERA]
[R-RUN]/
Same value
as LTC
(except, none
at DV)
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
3
[24P],
[24PA]
[F-RUN]*
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
[480-59.94i]
—
LTC is output.
None
[NDF] fixed
30 frames
[R-RUN]/
5
[F-RUN]*
[SDI IN]
—
—
—
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
[50i], [25P]
(50i)
[1FRAME]
to
[25FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
2
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
25 frames
LTC is output.
[1FRAME]
to
[25FRAME]
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
—
—
—
[CAMERA]
TC: 25 frames
[1080-50i]
2
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
25 frames
[25FRAME]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[R-RUN] fixed
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
Other than
[25FRAME]
At each valid frame
25 frames
25 frames/second
[DVCPROHD/50i]
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
5
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[SDI IN]
[CAMERA]
[SDI IN]
—
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
TC: 25 frames
TC: 25 frames
TC: 25 frames
25 frames
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
[1FRAME]
to
[50FRAME]
2
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
—
—
—
25 frames
7
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
[25FRAME]
25 frames
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
[720-50P]
[R-RUN] fixed
At each valid frame
25 frames
Matched to recording TC at
start of recording
Other than
[25FRAME]
25 frames/second
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
5
[R-RUN]/[F-RUN]*
—
—
LTC is output.
25 frames
– 64 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
System setting state
[REC FORMAT]
Recording TC
Output TC
Display TC
[SYSTEM
MODE]
[REC
SIGNAL]
[CAMERA [FRAME
LTC of HD
TC tc (24/30
conversion)
LTC
VITC
TC OUT
1
MODE]
RATE]*
SDI, VITC
[R-RUN]/
2
[CAMERA]
[50i], [25P]
—
[F-RUN]*
25 frames
LTC is output.
TC: 25 frames
TC: 25 frames
Same value
as LTC
(except, none
at DV)
[DVCPRO50]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
[576-50i]
None
[R-RUN]/
5
[SDI IN]
—
—
[F-RUN]*
25 frames
LTC is output.
*1 This becomes valid when the production pack (extra-cost option) is installed.
*2 For free run, the time code is slaved to the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
*3 For free run, the time code is slaved when the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal is a non-drop frame. However, it cannot be slaved during recording.
*4 For free run, the time code is slaved to the value obtained by conversion to 24 frames when the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal is a 30-frame non-drop
frame. However, it cannot be slaved during recording.
*5 For free run, the time code is slaved to the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal. It is not slaved to LTC or VITC of the SDI input signal.
*6 For free run, the time code is slaved when the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal is a non-drop frame of 24 frames. However, it cannot be slaved during
recording.
*7 For free run, the time code is slaved to the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal. However, it cannot be slaved during recording.
Recording and output of user bits
System setting state
Recording UB
Output UB
UB of <TC
IN/OUT>
[SYSTEM
MODE]
[REC
SIGNAL]
[CAMERA [FRAME
LTC UB of HD
[REC FORMAT]
LTC UB
VITC UB
VITC UB of HD SDI
1
MODE]
RATE]
SDI*
1
terminal*
[60i], [30P]
—
[1FRAME]
to
[30FRAME]
(60i)
[DVCPROHD/60i]
[24P],
[24PA]
—
[1FRAME]
to
[30FRAME]
LTC UB is output.
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
—
—
[CAMERA]
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
Frame rate
information
—
[1080-59.94i]
2
MODE]*
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[30FRAME]
Other than
[30FRAME]
[24FRAME]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
Output matched to over60i
based on LTC UB.
—
—
Other than
[24FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/60i]
[AVC-I100/60i]
[AVC-I50/60i]
[SDI IN]
—
LTC UB is output.
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
LTC UB is output (native
output).
Frame rate
information
3
[1080-23.98PsF]*
—
—
—
—
2
MODE]*
Other than
[24FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/60P]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
—
—
[24FRAME]
[30FRAME]
Other than
LTC UB is output.
[DVCPROHD/30PN]
[AVC-I100/30PN]
[AVC-I50/30PN]
[CAMERA]
—
—
—
[30FRAME] Following [UB
Frame rate
information
Frame rate
information
[720-59.94P]
2
MODE]*
[24FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/24PN]
[AVC-I100/24PN]
[AVC-I50/24PN]
Output matched to Over60P
based on LTC UB.
Other than
[24FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/60P]
[AVC-I100/60P]
[AVC-I50/60P]
[SDI IN]
—
—
—
LTC UB is output.
[CAMERA]
[60i], [30P]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[24P],
[24PA]
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
LTC UB is
None
[480-59.94i]
—
None
2
MODE]*
output.
[SDI IN]
—
—
– 65 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
System setting state
Recording UB
Output UB
UB of <TC
IN/OUT>
[SYSTEM
MODE]
[REC
SIGNAL]
[CAMERA [FRAME
LTC UB of HD
[REC FORMAT]
LTC UB
VITC UB
VITC UB of HD SDI
1
MODE]
RATE]
SDI*
1
terminal*
[50i], [25P]
—
[1FRAME]
to
[DVCPROHD/50i]
(50i)
[25FRAME]
[1FRAME]
to
[25FRAME]
[CAMERA]
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
—
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
Frame rate
information
[1080-50i]
LTC UB is output.
2
MODE]*
[25FRAME]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
—
Other than
[25FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/50i]
[AVC-I100/50i]
[AVC-I50/50i]
[SDI IN]
[CAMERA]
[SDI IN]
—
—
—
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
[1FRAME]
to
[50FRAME]
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
—
—
[25FRAME]
[DVCPROHD/25PN]
[AVC-I100/25PN]
[AVC-I50/25PN]
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
Frame rate
information
[720-50P]
[576-50i]
Other than
[25FRAME]
2
MODE]*
[DVCPROHD/50P]
[AVC-I100/50P]
[AVC-I50/50P]
—
—
[DVCPRO50]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
[CAMERA]
[SDI IN]
[50i], [25P]
—
—
Following [UB
Frame rate
information
LTC UB is
output.
None
None
2
MODE]*
—
*1 When [UB MODE] is set to [FRM.RATE], the pull-down frame rate information read out from VITC UB is output during native clip playback.
*2 With [EXT], UB of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal is slaved.
*3 This becomes valid when the production pack (extra-cost option) is installed.
User bits settings
Set the user bits to record to sub-code area by the [UB MODE] item on the setting menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen.
Item name
[USER]
Description
Records internal user values. User values can be set at [UBG] on the [SET01:TC/UB] screen of SmartUI. Setting values are held even
when the power is turned off.
[TIME]
Records the time measured by the internal clock.
[DATE]
[EXT]
Records the hour digit of year/month/day/date-time measured by the internal clock.
Records the user bit values currently input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
The time code value is recorded.
[TCG]
[FRM.RATE]
The camera photo frame rate information is recorded.
When playing back clips recorded in native format, the same frame rate information as VITC UB is output regardless of the recorded
value. Use at this setting when the editing device such as a computer uses the frame rate information of the user bits.
f Set to [EXT] when the user bits are slaved to the values currently input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
f While the user bits are slaved, the [UB] display is inverted.
f Once the time code is slaved, the slave state is maintained even if there are no longer inputs to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal. However, the slave state
of the user bits is canceled in the following instances:
- When the [UB MODE] item is set to other than [EXT]
- When [UB PRESET] has been performed
- When the power is turned off
Slaved values are held for the internal user values even after the slave state is canceled.
How to input user bits
By setting user bits, information such as memos (date, time) up to eight digits long (hexadecimal) can be recorded.
– 66 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
4
2
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
CAM
TC
NDF SLABE P -REC
0
AUDIO
SET UP
-10
-18
-20
MEDIA CH1
F
A
E
E
-30
dB
CH2
BATT
F
3
1
2
HOME
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
1
1
2
3
4
<HOME> button
<COUNTER> button
<SETUP> button
<HOLD> button
Item name
[→]
Description
The digit to be set (displayed inverted) moves to the
right.
The value of the inverted digit is incremented by one.
[+]
The value of the inverted digit is decremented by
one.
[−]
Use the <HOME> button to set the SmartUI screen to the
[HOME] screen.
1
2
3
[RST]
The values of all digits are reset to 0.
Use the <COUNTER> button to set the counter display to
[UB].
Press [UBG] to apply the user bit setting values and end
setting of user bits.
6
7
Use the <SETUP> button to set the SmartUI screen to the
[SET01:TC/UB] screen.
NOTE
@@
t Newly set values are invalid if the screen is switched without
Set the [UBG] item to [SET].
Set the user bits.
4
5
pressing [UBG].
Select [USER] at the [UB MODE] item on the setting menu
[RECORDING SETUP] screen.
Retention of user bits in memory
User bit settings are automatically saved in memory and are retained even if the power is turned off.
Frame rate information recorded to user bits
If the frame rate value of video information to be shot and recorded based on the frame rate set by each item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP]
screen or by the [FRAME RATE] item (option) is recorded in the user bits, it can be edited the editing device (such as computer editing software).
This information is recorded to VITC UB at all times.
If the setting menu [UB MODE] item is set to [FRM.RATE], it is also recorded to user bits (LTC UB). In playback of clips recorded in native format, the
same values as the frame rate information obtained by playing back recorded user bits are also output as HD SDI output signals or user bits of TC
output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
Frame rate information
The frame rate and video pull-down menu are linked to the time code and user bits as follows:
Checking information for the 6 digits at right Fixed
value
Media management information
Updated frame flag, valid frame flag
REC mark
・
・
Sequence No.
24P, 24PA: 0 - 4
Other than the above: Fixed
at F
Camera video mode
Example)
・60i：600
・60P：608
・30P：308
・24P：248
・24PA：24C
・24PN：24C
・＊＊P：＊＊9
・＊＊P：＊＊D
(Shooting)
(720P/30PN or 60P VFR)
(720P/24PN VFR shooting)
– 67 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
r When 1080i or 480i
Time code frame digit
00 01 02
Frame rate:24P Over 60i (2:3)
Start field for updated frame
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
Time code frame digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Updated frame information
10 10 10
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
r 720P mode
Sequence No.
Frame rate:24P Over 60P (2:3)
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame
Updated frame information
Time code frame digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
C D D D A A B B B C C D D D
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Frame rate:24PA Over 60i (2:3:3:2)
Video
Time code frame digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
A A B B B C C D D D A A B B
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De
Frame rate:30P Over 60P (2:2)
Sequence No.
Time code frame digit
00 01 02
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information
Video
A A B B C C
10 10 01 00 10 10 10
00 10 10 10 01 00 10
Frame rate:30P Over 60i (2:2)
Updated frame information
10 10 10
Setting the time code
Set the [TC MODE] item on the setting menu [RECORDING
SETUP] screen to [DF] or [NDF].
1
Item name
[→]
Description
The digit to be set (displayed inverted) moves to the
right.
f To advance the time code in the drop frame mode, set to [DF],
and to advance it in the non-drop frame mode, set to [NDF]. Note,
however, that the time code runs by [NDF] at all times in the 24P,
24PA and 24PN modes.
The value of the inverted digit is incremented by one.
[+]
The value of the inverted digit is decremented by
one.
[−]
[RST]
The values of all digits are reset to 0.
Use the <HOME> button to set the SmartUI screen to the
[HOME] screen.
2
Press [TCG] to apply the time code setting values and end
setting of the time code.
7
8
Set the counter display to [TC] by the <COUNTER> button.
3
4
Press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI.
Use the <SETUP> button to set the SmartUI screen to the
[SET01:TC/UB] screen.
NOTE
@@
Set the [TCG] item to [SET].
Set the time code.
5
6
t When using in the 24P or 24PA mode, the time code setting
is adjusted in 5-frame units. In the 24PN mode, the setting is
adjusted to multiples of four, and in the 720/30PN or 720/25PN
mode, it is adjusted to an even number. The time code cannot
be set during recording.
Time code available ranges
For 59.94 Hz (except for 00:00:00:00 - 23:59:59:29
24PN)
t Newly set values are invalid if the screen is switched without
pressing [TCG].
24PN
00:00:00:00 - 23:59:59:23
00:00:00:00 - 23:59:59:24
For 50 Hz:
[
]
SET01:TC/UB
RST
s
h
min
F-RUN
SET R-RUN
] [ ] [
frm
[
] [
]
TCG TCMD
-
+
Time code function during battery replacement
Even during battery replacement, the backup mechanism functions, allowing the time code generator to continue operating.
NOTE
@@
t When the <POWER> switch has been switched to <ON> → <OFF> → <ON>, the backup accuracy of the time code in the free run mode is
approximately ±2 frames.
– 68 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
Time code at the variable frame rate (VFR)
f In the 24PN mode, recording is performed at 24 frames, and output is performed at 30 frames matched to 2:3 pull-down video.
f When [FRAME RATE] (shooting frame rate) is set to 24P, the advance speed of the time code for recording and output matches real time and does
not match real time in modes other than 24P. (Example: In the 60P mode, the advance speed for recording becomes 60/24x.)
f In this instance, operation is fixed to recording run, and the time code value to output at the start of recording is matched to the recording time code.
f The same applies at other than 30P shooting in the 30PN mode.
r 24PN recording for 60P shooting
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWRS
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
2XWSXWꢀYLGHR
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢃ
ꢂꢂ ꢂꢃ ꢂꢄ ꢂꢅ
ꢅꢆ ꢅꢇ ꢈꢀ ꢈꢁ ꢈꢂ ꢈꢃ
ꢈꢉ ꢈꢆ
2XWSXWꢀ7&
ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢁ
ꢀꢀꢊꢁꢁ
ꢀꢀꢊꢁꢂ
ꢀꢀꢊꢂꢇ
ꢀꢁꢊꢀꢀ
ꢀꢁꢊꢀꢁ
ꢀꢂꢊꢂꢀ
ꢀꢂꢊꢂꢀ
6NLSSHG
5HFRUGHGꢀYLGHR
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢃ
ꢂꢂ ꢂꢃ ꢂꢄ ꢂꢅ
ꢅꢆ ꢅꢇ ꢈꢀ ꢈꢁ ꢈꢂ ꢈꢃ
ꢈꢉ ꢈꢆ
5HFRUGLQJꢀ7&
ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢀ ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢁ ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢂ ꢀꢀꢊꢀꢃ
ꢀꢀꢊꢂꢂ ꢀꢀꢊꢂꢃ ꢀꢁꢊꢀꢀ ꢀꢁꢊꢀꢁ
ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢀ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢁ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢂ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢃ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢄ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢅ
ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢈ
ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢈ ꢀꢂꢊꢁꢉ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢀFRQYHUVLRQ
r 30PN recording for 15P shooting
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
2XWSXWꢀYLGHR
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWRS
5HFRUGLQJꢀVWDUW
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁꢂ ꢁꢂ ꢁꢂ ꢁꢂ ꢁꢃ ꢁꢃ ꢁꢃ ꢁꢃ
ꢄꢀ ꢄꢀ ꢄꢀ ꢄꢀ ꢄꢁ ꢄꢁ
2XWSXWꢀ7&
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢁ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢄ
ꢁ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢆ
ꢀꢀꢅꢄꢈ
ꢀꢀꢅꢄꢇ
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢉ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢉ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢊ
6NLSSHG
5HFRUGHGꢀYLGHR
5HFRUGLQJꢀ7&
ꢁꢂ
ꢁꢃ
ꢄꢁ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢁ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢂ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢉ
ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢉ
Externally locking the time code
The internal time code generator of the camera can be locked to an external generator. In addition, the time code generator of an external device can be
locked to the internal time code generator of the camera.
Example of connections for external locking
As shown in the figure, connect both the reference video signal and the reference time code.
r When locking onto an external signal
NOTE
@@
t As a reference video signal, a composite video signal can also be
input in addition to an HD Y reference signal.
t When the system mode is set to 480i, 576i (SD) and 720P, input
the composite video signal.
Reference video signal
<GENLOCK IN>
t If the system mode is 720P, the video signal generator lock is
activated when the HD-Y signal is input, however , the time code
may shift by one field.
Reference time code
<TC IN/OUT>
t When the generator lock input reference signal is disrupted,
recording cannot be performed normally, and [TEMPORARY
PAUSE IRREGULAR FRM SIG] flashes red on the viewfinder
screen and the clip is divided. The continuity of the time code is not
guaranteed. Recording resumes when the signal returns to normal.
However, recording does not resume in interval recording, one-
shot recording, and loop recording.
External lock operation procedure
To externally lock the time code, follow the steps below.
Set the [TC IN/OUT SEL] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT
SEL] screen to [TC IN].
Press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI.
1
5
A reference time code and reference video signal that are in a phase
relationship (that conforms to time code specifications) are supplied to
the <TC IN/OUT> and <GENLOCK IN> terminals.
f Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the reference
time code.
Set the counter display to [TC] by the <COUNTER> button.
2
3
Set the SmartUI screen to the [SET01:TC/UB] screen by the
<SETUP> button.
Set the [TC_MD] item to [F-RUN].
4
– 69 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
f When the time code is externally locked, the time code is
- When [TC PRESET] has been performed
- When the power is turned off
- When [TC MODE] has been switched
- When [TC_MD] has been set to [R-RUN] on the [SET01:TC/UB]
screen of SmartUI
instantaneously locked to the external time code, the same value as
the value of the external time code is output to the counter display
area, and the [TC] display is inverted. Do not set to the recording
mode for several seconds until the sync generator has stabilized.
- When [REC FORMAT] and [CAMERA MODE] have been switched
* Slave function refers to locking of the time code to TC IN input
and making the time code continue as it is even if the time code is
discontinued.
f Once the time code is slaved, the slave state* is maintained even
if there are no longer inputs to the <TC IN/OUT> or <GENLOCK
IN> terminal. However, the slave state is canceled in the following
instances:
Setting of user bits when the time code is externally locked
To externally lock user bits, set the [UB MODE] item on the setting menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen to [EXT].
The user bits are slaved to the user bit values input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal regardless of [F-RUN]/[R-RUN].
Canceling the external lock
Stop supply of the external time code, and set the [UB MODE] item on the setting menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen to other than [EXT].
Cautions when switching the power supply from the battery to the external power supply while an external lock is
active
To keep the time code generator power supply on continuously, connect an external power supply to the <DC IN> terminal and then remove the battery
pack. If the battery pack is removed first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.
External synchronization of the camera unit while an external lock is active
While an external lock is active, the generator lock is activated on the camera unit by the reference video signal input to the <GENLOCK IN> terminal.
NOTE
@@
t To externally lock multiple units with the camera as the master device, set to the same setting as on the setting menu [CAMERA MODE]
screen on the camera. Note that in a system using a mixture of interlaced and progressive scanning, the continuity of the video and time
codes is not guaranteed.
t When externally locking in the 24P, 24PA and 24PN (native) modes, be sure to input non-drop frame time codes. An external lock is not
possible using drop frames. Also, images may be disrupted the instant that the external lock is activated, though this is due to alignment of
the 5-frame cycle and is not a malfunction.
Supplying time codes to external devices
To supply the time code output according to the camera image or the playback image to a VTR or other recording devices, set the [TC IN/OUT SEL]
item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen to [TC OUT], and the [TC VIDEO SYNC] item to [VIDEO OUT].
Also, set the [GL PHASE] item on the setting menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen to [HD SDI] or [COMPOSITE] according to the video output to be
supplied, and set the [TC OUT] item on the [IN/OUT SEL] screen to [TCG/TCR].
AG-HPX600P/AG-HPX600EJ/AG-HPX600EN
Composite output
SDI output
Time code output
Time code input
Video input
SDI input
VTR, etc.
HD SDI input
NOTE
@@
t When the [TC VIDEO SYNC] item is set to [VIDEO OUT], the input time code is output according to the delayed video output.
– 70 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Setting the time data
r When two cameras are connected and use one as a reference camera
Reference camera
Slave camera
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
<MON OUT> terminal
<GENLOCK IN> terminal
f Set whether to use the <TC IN/OUT> terminal as an output or input at the [TC IN/OUT SEL] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen.
f Set the [TC VIDEO SYNC] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen to [RECORDING], and the [GL PHASE] item on the [OTHER FUNCTIONS]
screen to [COMPOSITE] for both cameras.
f If the [TC VIDEO SYNC] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen is set to [RECORDING], the same time code can be added to the video which
is recorded at the same time with both cameras.
f The sub-carrier of the VBS signal from the <MON OUT> terminal cannot be externally locked.
Connecting and setting the generator lock and time code input/output
Generator lock input and output phase of the
Setting of the
Conditions of use of the camera
camera
camera
Matching: l, Not matching: ×
Video/reference signal supplied
externally
Generator lock
input
Video output and
SDI output (SD)
Time code
output
Recording format
[GL PHASE]
SDI output (HD)
SDI output (1080i)
Video output
[HD SDI]
[COMPOSITE]
[HD SDI]
90H delay
l
90H advance
l
l
l
l
l
×
1080i
SD (480i)
720P
l
90H delay
l
1080i
SDI output (1080i)
Video output
[COMPOSITE]
[HD SDI]
90H advance
l
SDI output (720P)
Video output
120H delay
l
[COMPOSITE]
[HD SDI]
120H advance
l
×
720P
480i
SDI output (720P)
Video output
120H delay
l
l
l
SD (480i)
SD (480i)
[COMPOSITE]
120H advance
SDI output (480i)
Video output
Disabled
None
l
l
Counter setting and display
When the counter display is set by using the <COUNTER> button, the counter value is displayed on the time code display area of the viewfinder screen.
The counter value is indicated in hours:minutes:seconds. The value is not displayed during playback.
Two types of counts are available at the [REC COUNTER] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen.
Item name
[TOTAL]
Description
The count is totaled and continued until it is reset by button operation.
The counter value is held even if a P2 card is inserted or the power is turned off.
[CLIP]
The counter value is cleared and the counter is started from 0 (zero) each time recording is started.
This allows shooting while constantly verifying the recording time of the clip currently being recorded.
NOTE
@@
t Pressing the <RESET> button while the counter value is displayed resets the counter value and restarts the counter from 0 (zero).
t The counter value range is 0:00:00 to 9:59:59 and the count is incremented in 1-second units.
– 71 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
Viewfinder status display
In addition to video, the viewfinder displays messages that indicate the camera settings and operation status, a center marker, safety zone marker,
zebra patterns, and other information.
Lamp display in the viewfinder
The example is for the AJ-HVF21KG. (For information on the viewfinder, refer to the Operating Instructions for the optional viewfinder.)
1
3
1
TALLY/REC (recording) lamp
2
BATT (battery) lamp
Illuminated red during recording, and flashes if an abnormality occurs.
Starts flashing when the battery voltage drops and before the
battery charge starts to run out, and is illuminated after the battery is
completely flat. To prevent operation from being interrupted, replace
the battery before it is nearly flat.
3
SAVE lamp
Not supported on the camera.
Mode check screen displays (mode check function)
The camera settings and status can be displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch on the camera towards the <CHK> side switches between two screens.
[STATUS] screen display → [PROXY/NETWORK] screen (displayed only when the option is installed)
Each screen is displayed for approximately three seconds. Pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side while the screen is
displayed moves the display to the next screen. While pushing the switch towards the <CHK> side, the status confirmation screen keeps displaying.
T C * 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2
9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
F U L L
I - P AU S E D I ONC 9 0
1 - C L I P
F L UO .
C AC D Z x 2
F B C
S L O T 1 :
S L O T 2 :
S U P POR
T E D
NO T
NO
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
60
A B B NG
AWB NG
P 3 .2K
C AR
D
MA I N : Y
G
E T
L I GH T
MEMO
1
: B AC
K
T
1 1 9 min
L T . BOX
SD1
2
: T E X
dB
0
R E T : R E
R E V I EW
C
ND 1
EX
8 3% ND 1
S E P
1
2 0 1 2 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
A.REC
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DR S
1/ 1 2 3 . 4
S PO T
F 5 . 6
MF 6 0
Z 6 0
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
[STATUS] screen
<PROXY>
MEDIA
MODE
SUPER
:P2&SD
:STD 2CH MP4
:UPPER
PROXY BOARD ERROR
<NETWORK>
NETWORK :LAN
ERROR
STREAM :ERROR
!PRE REC
[PROXY/NETWORK] screen (option)
– 72 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
Configuration of status display on viewfinder screen
The status indicators are displayed on the normal screen.
T C * 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2
9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
F U L L
I - P AU S E 1 - C L I P
F L UO .
C A C D Z x 2
F B C
SDI
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
60
P 3 .2K
ERR
PROXY
0
dB
L T . BOX
EX
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
S E P
DR S
1/ 1 2 3 . 4
1
2 0 1 2 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 PN
= = = = = = = =
S PO T
F 5 . 6
MF 6 0
Z 6 0
CH 1
CH 2
Selecting display items on viewfinder screen
To select display items on the viewfinder screen, switch display [ON]/[OFF] or type at each item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF TYPE
0
LOW
COLOR
ON
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
70%
85%
SPOT
ON
MARKER
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Screen display
35 33
32
30
T C * 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2
9 9 min B 9 0%
1
2
3
P 2
28
27
26
F U L L
I - P AU S E 1 - C L I P
F L UO .
C AC D Z x 2
F B C
SDI
5
34
31
1 0 8 0 i
AVC-I
4
6
100
29
60
25
24
23
11
12
22
P 3 .2K
ERR
PROXY
7
8
0
dB
9
L T . BOX
EX
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
S E P
10
13
14
1
2 0 1 2 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
A.REC
6 0 : 2 4 PN
CH 2
DR S
1/ 1 2 3 . 4
S PO T
F 5 . 6
MF 6 0
Z 6 0
CH 1
= = = = = = = =
21
15
16
17
18 19 20
1
Time code display
Every time you press the <COUNTER> button, you switch to the following data (or no display).
Counter
[TC]
Counter value (recording mode only)
Time code value
When operating in the drop frame mode, the “:” (colon) between the second and frame turns into a “.” (dot).
[tc]
Time code value (displayed after frame digit is converted to 24 frames)
When operating in the drop frame mode, the “:” (colon) between the second and frame turns into a “.” (dot).
[UB]
[FR]
User bits value
Information of frame rate used for shooting
f FR60I -: 60i interlace mode (60 fields/sec)
f FR60P -: 60P progressive mode (60 frames/sec)
f FR30P -: 30P progressive mode (30 frames/sec)
f FR24P*: 24P progressive mode (24 frames/sec)
f FR24PA*: 24P advance mode (24 frames/sec)
f FR50I -: 50i interlace mode (50 fields/sec)
f FR50P -: 50P progressive mode (50 frames/sec)
f FR25P -: 25P progressive mode (25 frames/sec)
*: In the FR24P and FR24PA modes, the sequence information of frame conversion is displayed at the last digit.
– 73 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
NOTE
@@
t [TC], [tc], and [UB] become white dropout display [ ] → [ ] when locked to TC IN input.
2
Warning information display
Flashes when the P2 card is not inserted or recording is disabled.
[
]
Flashes where there is no space remaining on the P2 card.
[
FULL]
Flashes when there is insufficient remaining space on the P2 card while loop recording is set.
[
LACK]
]
Illuminated when the built-in battery for the internal clock is flat.
[
3
HD SDI REMOTE recording status
f This indicates the recording start and stop control status for the external device connected by <SDI OUT/IN (OP)>.
f This is displayed when the setting of the [HD SDI REMOTE] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen is [ON].
Recording control instruction status for externally connected device
Recording standby instruction status for externally connected device
[SDIn]
[SDI&]
4
Recording format and system mode display
System mode
f 1080i
f 1080 (1080-23.98PsF mode)
f 720P
f 480i
f 576i
Recording format
f When the system mode is 1080i, 720P
- [AVC-I100]: AVC-Intra 100 format
- [AVC-I50]: AVC-Intra 50 format
- [DVCPROHD]: DVCPRO HD format
f When the system mode is 480i (576i)
[DVCPRO50], [DVCPRO], [DV]
5
Information display
The following information is displayed according to the status:
f Auto white balance and auto black balance operation status
f Warning displays, error displays
f Switch and button operation information
6
7
System frequency display
Displays system frequency.
[60]
[50]
When the system frequency set by the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is 59.94 Hz
When the system frequency set by the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is 50 Hz
When the system frequency set by the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is 23.98 Hz
[24] (option)
Proxy information display (option):
Displayed when the video encoder board (extra-cost option) is installed.
Flashes white when there is less than one minute of recording space left. It is displayed during recording.
Displayed only during a mode check executed on the proxy SD memory card capacity.
Displayed when an error has occurred on the video encoder board or in proxy recording.
[
END]
[
***min]
[PROXY ERR]
8
9
Letterbox recording display
Displayed when the recording format is 480i or 576i, and [LETTER BOX] is selected at the [ASPECT CONV] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM
SETUP] screen is selected and letterbox recording is being executed.
Y GET brightness display
In the Y GET mode, the image level in the frame displayed near the center of the screen is displayed as 0% to 109%.
10 Extender
Displays [EX] when the lens extender is used.
11 Recommended ND filter display
Displays the ND filter recommended for the current shooting conditions.
– 74 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
12 Date and time display
0RQWKꢀ
-$1ꢁꢂ-DQXDU\ꢃꢄꢁ)(%ꢁꢂ)HEUXDU\ꢃꢄꢁ0$5ꢁꢂ0DUFKꢃꢄꢁ$35ꢁ
ꢂ$SULOꢃꢄꢁ0$<ꢁꢂ0D\ꢃꢄꢁ-81ꢁꢂ-XQHꢃꢄꢁ-8/ꢁꢂ-XO\ꢃꢄꢁ$8*ꢁ
ꢂ$XJXVWꢃꢄꢁ6(3ꢁꢂ6HSWHPEHUꢃꢄꢁ2&7ꢁꢂ2FWREHUꢃꢄꢁ129ꢁ
ꢂ1RYHPEHUꢃꢄꢁ'(&ꢁꢂ'HFHPEHUꢃ
'D\
<HDUꢀꢁꢅꢆꢆꢆꢁ²ꢁꢅꢆꢇꢈ
+RXU
0LQXWH
6HFRQG
PPPꢀGGꢀ\\\\ꢀKKꢁPPꢁVV
13 Focus bar display
Displays the following at the bottom left of the viewfinder. The high-frequency component of the video is converted to a numerical value and
displayed.
White bar
Green line
Focus bar display
Peak display
14 Shooting/recording and playback frame rate display
In the native recording mode, the number of shooting frames and number of recording/playback frames are displayed.
Example) 60:24PN (variable frame rate 24PN recording (VFR) in 60P shooting)
By playback, this becomes 24P Over 60P at 2:3 pull-down to indicate that playback is 24/60x slow playback.
In Standard recording, only the shooting frame rate is displayed.
Example) 24PA (2:3:3:2 pull-down over60i recording at 24PA)
15 Audio level meter display
r When the [HEADROOM] setting on the [AUDIO SETUP] screen is set to [−20dB]
-20dB
0dB
CH 1
CH 2
r When the [HEADROOM] setting on the [AUDIO SETUP] screen is set to [−18dB]
-18dB
0dB
CH 1
CH 2
r When a monaural channel is selected on the [AUD03:MONI] screen of SmartUI
The channel number that is not selected is not displayed.
The recording level of each channel is displayed with each level bar, and this indicates that the audio channels to be output to speaker, the
<PHONES> and <AUDIO OUT> terminals are monaural.
CH 1
--
When audio channel 1 is selected
16 Audio recording not available display
In native variable frame rate recording, the [
] mark is displayed when audio is not recorded.
This is also displayed in interval recording and one-shot recording since audio is not recorded (mute recording).
17 Shutter speed display
Displays the shutter speed.
With synchro scan, the display is as set by the [SYNC SCAN TYPE] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen (hour (minute) display or
shutter open angle display).
18 Dynamic range stretcher (DRS) function display
Displayed when the dynamic range stretcher function is activated.
19 Iris display
Displays F value.
f [NC] is displayed when a lens connector is not connected.
20 Auto iris control display
[SPOT]
[BACK]
Auto iris control for spotlight
Auto iris control for the backlight compensation.
This is displayed also when the lens iris is set manually, though no operation is performed.
– 75 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
21 Zoom position display
Displays the zoom position with [Z00] (maximum wide-angle) - [Z99] (maximum zoom).
f When connecting the lens that supports auto focus, the unit can be switched to [mm/m] at the [ZOOM/FOCUS] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY
SETUP] screen.
f The focus position display does not move linearly. [NUMBER] is displayed as the factory setting.
22 Focus control information
Displays the focus control information with [99] to [00]. [AF] is displayed when auto focus is set with the auto-focus compatible lens connected, and
[MF] is displayed when manual focus is set. When auto-focus incompatible lens is connected, the focus control information is not displayed.
When connecting the lens that supports auto focus, the unit can be changed at the [ZOOM/FOCUS] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP]
screen.
23 ND filter display
f The currently selected ND filter is displayed.
f When ND-- is displayed, the <ND FILTER> dial is out of position (i.e. not within <1> to <4>), so check the position of the <ND FILTER> dial.
24 Gain display
Displays the gain value of the image amplifier configured.
25 <WHITE BAL> switch position display
Displays the currently selected position. Also, white balance operation is displayed when the automatic white balance is preset. In auto tracking white
balance function mode, [ATW] is displayed, and when the auto tracking white balance function is locked, [LOCK] is displayed.
If the preset is set to [VAR], the set color temperature such as [V3.2K] is displayed.
26 Flash band compensation (FBC) function display
Displayed when the flash band compensation function is activated.
27 Digital zoom factor display
Displays digital zoom factor.
[DZx2]
[DZx4]
2 times
4 times
28 Scene file name display
The [SCENE FILE] (F1 to F6) scene file name is displayed.
29 Chromatic aberration compensation function (CAC)
Displayed when the chromatic aberration compensation function is active. (Only when the mode check is performed)
30 Battery charge level display
This changes [5] → [4] → [3] → [2] → [1] as the battery charge level gets lower.
When there is no more battery charge left, [2] ([1]) flashes.
(When the AC adaptor is used, other than [5] may be displayed, but this is not a problem.)
r Batteries that support the battery charge level % (percentage) display
The battery charge level is displayed as follows:
10% - 99%
[B**%]
Displays the battery charge level as %.
[MAX]
[EMP]
Displays in a fully charged state.
Displays when the charge level is less than 10%.
r Batteries that do not support the battery charge level % (percentage) display
The battery voltage is displayed.
[13.5V]
Displays the current voltage value.
31 One-clip recording mode status display
[1-CLIP]
A new clip is about to be recorded by one-clip recording.
A new clip can be combined with the previous clip and recorded by one-clip recording.
[1"CLIP]
32 Media free space display
f When the [P2CARD REMAIN] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set to [ONE-CARD], the slot number is displayed to the left of
the remaining space of the current P2 card for recording. When [TOTAL] is set, the total remaining space of the two cards is displayed.
f The [ONE-CARD] and [TOTAL] display is swapped in the mode check.
f Nothing is displayed while free space is being calculated and in the USB device mode. [LOOP] is displayed during loop recording.
f In the mode check during loop recording, the standard recording time that is possible by loop recording is displayed.
f Free space is displayed in 1-minute units in the range 0 to 999 minutes. 999 minutes is displayed for remaining space exceeding 999 minutes.
f The display flashes when the remaining space falls to two minutes or below.
33 Media information display
Displays the card slot in which the P2 card is inserted and basic information.
Recordable P2 card
[
] illuminated
] illuminated green
] flashing
P2 card for recording target
The card is being recognized.
No card inserted
[
[
[
[
]
]
The card is write-protected.
– 76 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
No remaining free space
[
[
[
]
]
]
The card cannot be recognized.
The P2 card is in an illegal format. (This can be corrected by formatting the card.)
34 Recording/playback operation status display
[REC]
[PAUSE]
[&]
Recording
Standing by for recording
Playback paused
Playback
[w]
Fast-forward/fast-forward playback (fast-reverse/fast-reverse playback)
4x search
[)][%]
[4X)][4X%]
Clip feed (clip return), cue up by individual clip units
[CLIP &w]
[CLIP q&]
Cue up by clip and text memo unit feed (return) (When the [SEEK SELECT] item on the menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen is set
to [CLIP&T])
[CLIP&T &w]
[CLIP&T q&]
[START]
[END]
Displayed when recording of a new clip is started by one-clip recording.
Displayed when combining of clips has ended by one-clip recording.
In the display off status, only [REC], [START], and [END] are displayed at the top right. These are also displayed when pre-recording, loop recording,
interval recording, and one-shot recording are set.
r Special recording status display
This is displayed when the [REC FUNCTION] item on the setting menu [RECORDING SETUP] screen is set to [INTERVAL], [ONE SHOT], and
[LOOP], or when pre-recording is set to [ON].
[L-]
[I-]
[LOOP] (loop recording)
[INTERVAL] (interval recording), [ONE SHOT] (one-shot recording)
[PRE REC] (pre-recording)
[P-]
35 System tally
Illuminated when the system tally is received, if using as the camera extension system in combination with the optional camera adaptor
(AG-CA300G) and base station (AG-BS300).
Information display in center
P2 card recording/playback information display
[BOS]
Top of the stream. From here, playback in the reverse direction is not possible.
Displayed when playback is not possible.
[CANNOT PLAY]
[CARD ERR (1)], [CARD
P2 card error in slot of indicated number
ERR (2)], [CARD ERR (1/2)]
[UPDATING]
Card information is being read.
[CANNOT REC]
[EOS]
Displayed when recording cannot be started by pressing the <REC> button.
End of the stream. From here, playback in the forward direction is not possible.
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which pre-recording is assigned are pressed.
[PRE REC ON], [PRE REC
OFF], [PRE REC INVALID]
[SHOT MARK ON], [SHOT
MARK OFF], [SHOT MARK
INVALID]
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which the shot mark is assigned or the <RET> button on the lens are pressed.
[SLOT SEL], [SLOT SEL
INVALID]
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which [SLOT SEL] is assigned are pressed.
[TEXT MEMO], [TEXT
MEMO INVALID]
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which the text memo is assigned or the <RET> button on the lens are pressed.
Error and warning displays
These are displayed when an abnormality has occurred on the camera or the P2 card, etc. If the display is not corrected by turning the power off then
back on again, either follow the displayed instructions to replace the card, or contact the shop of purchase.
[CLIP DISCONTINUED]
[DIR ENTRY NG CARD]
Consistency with combined clips cannot be obtained by one-clip recording, and the clip cannot be combined at recording of the
next clip.
The P2 card directory is in an irregular layout. Operation is continued, however, data might not be recorded correctly.
Immediately back up the data on the card and use it after formatting it again.
[FORMAT ERR!]
The card does not conform to the P2 standard.
The card cannot be used since it conforms to a different standard.
The battery is flat.
[INCOMPATIBLE CARD]
[LOW BATTERY]
– 77 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
[REC WARNING]
An abnormality occurred during recording. Start the recording again. If the warning display persists, contact the shop of
purchase.
[CARD ERR (1)], [CARD
ERR (2)], [CARD ERR (1/2)] f If the warning continues to be displayed, turn off the power.
f If the warning display persists after retrying recording, replace with another card.
Other
P2 card error in slot of indicated number
[ERROR]
[OVER MAX# CLIPS]
An attempt was made to record more than the maximum number of clips (1000) that can be
recorded to a single P2 card.
[PULL DOWN ERROR]
[REC RAM OVERFLOW]
Abnormality in video pull-down sequence in 24P mode, for example
Overflow of memory for recording
[RUN DOWN CARD]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
The number of rewrites stipulated for the P2 card has been exceeded. Operation is continued, however, recording or playback
might not be performed correctly.
Replacement of the P2 card is recommended.
This is displayed when an abnormality has occurred on the system. Turn off the power then back on again.
[CAM MICON ERROR]
[P2 CONTROL ERROR]
[P2 MICON ERROR]
No response from camera microcontroller
P2 control error
No response from P2 microcontroller
[TEMPORARY PAUSE]
[TURN POWER OFF]
[IRREGULAR FRM SIG]
Displayed when the reference signal for generator lock input is disrupted and recording is
suspended.
An abnormality occurred due to a card being removed while it was being accessed or the system mode was changed.
Switch the power off and back on again.
[VFR ON]
[NO AUDIO RECORDING]
Displayed when audio signals are not recorded because the VFR mode is set.
[WIRELESS RF]
Wireless receiver reception is poor.
Camera system status display
[ABB ACTIVE]
[ATW ACTIVE]
Automatic black balance operation display
Displayed when the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch is set to the <AWB> side while the auto tracking white balance function is
activated.
[ATW]/[ATW LOCK]
[AUTO KNEE ON]/[OFF]
[AWB * ch ACTIVE]
Displayed when the auto tracking white balance function is assigned, if the <WHITE BAL> switch is set to <B>.
Displayed when the <AUTO KNEE> selector switch setting was changed.
Automatic white balance operation display
[AWB P3.2K]/[AWB P5.6K]/
[AWB VAR*.*K]
Displays the assigned color temperature when the <WHITE BAL> switch is set at the <PRST> position. Also, displayed when an
attempt is made to execute the automatic white balance at the <PRST> position.
[BACK LIGHT]/[OFF]
[DRS ON]/[OFF]
[D.ZOOM **]
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which the backlight for iris control is assigned are pressed and the status is switched.
Indicates that the dynamic range stretcher operation is switched.
Displayed when the <BARS> button where digital zoom function is assigned or the <RET> button on the lens is pressed to
switch the status. (×2, ×4, or [OFF] is displayed in the place of **.)
Displayed when the gain value is switched.
[GAIN**dB]
[ND NG]
Displayed when the ND filter is not at the correct position.
Displays the scene file name when the scene file number is changed to switch the scene file.
Displayed when the shutter speed setting was switched.
[SCENE******]
[SHUTTER 1/****]/[OFF]
[SPOT LIGHT]/[OFF]
[FBC ON]/[OFF]
Displayed when the <USER> buttons to which the spot light for iris control is assigned are pressed and the status is switched.
Indicates that the flash band compensation operation is switched.
Checking and displaying shooting status
<DISP/MODE CHK> switch
f When the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch is pushed from the <ON> side towards the <CHK> side during recording standby or during recording, all
information such as the setting status of the shooting functions, functions assigned to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) is
displayed. Releasing the switch returns the display to the normal display after approximately three seconds.
f When the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch is pushed towards the <OFF> side during recording standby or during recording, most of the displays are turned
off. Set it back to <ON>, the normal display returns.
– 78 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
f Items that are displayed on the viewfinder screen are set when the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch is pushed towards the <CHK> side or the [OTHER
DISPLAY] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set.
At item
At item that
goes out by
the display off
l
Display/hide by setting of [OTHER DISPLAY] item
displayed
by the mode
check
Can be hidden individually
by other menu items
—: Not affected
—: Not affected, l: Displayed, ×: Goes out
No
Display item name
[ALL]
[PARTIAL]
[OFF]
l
1
Time code
Does not go out
Does not go out
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
l
l
2
Warning information
HD SDI REMOTE
recording status
3
Does not go out
—
—
—
—
—
l
l
Recording format and
system mode
4
×
×
l
l
5
6
Information (center)
System frequency
×
Does not go out
—
—
—
—
—
×
×
l
l
l
Proxy information
(option)
7
Does not go out
—
—
—
—
l
8
Letterbox recording
Y GET brightness
Extender
—
—
—
l
—
—
—
l
—
—
—
×
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
9
Does not go out
—
10
11
12
—
—
l
Recommended ND filter
Date and time
l
l
—
—
—
[DATE/TIME] item
Does not go
13
Focus bar
—
—
—
[FOCUS BAR] item
l
1
out*
Shooting/recording and
playback frame rate
14
15
16
17
18
×
—
—
×
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
—
l
l
l
—
—
l
l
Audio level meter
[LEVEL METER] item
Audio recording not
available
—
—
—
Shutter speed
Dynamic range stretcher
(DRS) function
×
19
20
21
22
23
24
Iris
Auto iris control
Zoom position
Focus control information
ND filter
×
×
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
—
l
l
l
l
—
—
×
—
—
—
×
[ZOOM/FOCUS] item
[ZOOM/FOCUS] item
—
—
2
Gain
×
l*
<WHITE BAL> switch
position
3
25
×
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l*
Flash band
compensation (FBC)
function
26
×
—
l
27
28
Digital zoom factor
Scene file name
—
—
—
—
—
l
l
l
l
×
×
l
Chromatic aberration
compensation (CAC)
function
29
—
—
—
—
—
l
l
4
30
31
Battery charge level
—
—
[CARD/BATTERY] item
l
l
l*
One-clip recording mode
status
5
×*
—
l
l
l
4
32
33
Media free space
Media information
—
—
—
[CARD/BATTERY] item
[CARD/BATTERY] item
l
l
l*
6
6
×*
l*
l
l
Recording/playback
operation status
7
7
34
35
×*
—
—
l
l
l*
l
l
System tally
Does not go out
—
—
—
*1 Displayed only on the viewfinder screen
*2 0 dB is not displayed
*3 Only [ATW], [LOCK], [P3.2K], [P5.6K], and [VAR*.*K] displayed
*4 Displayed when remaining level is low
*5 Displayed at start and end of recording of new clip
*6 Illuminated by [SLOT SEL] execution
*7 Displayed at top right only during recording or in special recording mode
Mode check display
Almost all information is displayed in mode check.
– 79 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
[STATUS] screen
1 to 6 below are displayed only when the mode check is activated.
1
5
4
T C * 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2
9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
F U L L
I - P AU S E D I ONC 9 0
1 - C L I P
F L UO .
C AC
D
Z x 2
F B C
S L O T 1 :
S L O T 2 :
S U P POR
T E D
NO T
NO
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
60
A B B NG
AWB NG
P 3 .2K
C AR
D
3
MA I N : Y
G
E T
L I GH T
MEMO
1
: B AC
K
T
1 1 9 min
L T . BOX
SD
6
2
: T E X
dB
0
R E T : R E
R E V I EW
C
ND 1
EX
8 3% ND 1
S E P
1
A.REC
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DR S
1/ 1 2 3 . 4
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
2
1
P2 card slot status display
Displays each of the status of P2 card slots 1 and 2.
[ACTIVE]
Card that can be played back/recorded (including card for recording target)
Card currently being played back/recorded
The card is being recognized.
[ACCESSING]
[INFO READING]
[FULL]
P2 card with no remaining recording space.
Write-protected P2 card
[PROTECTED]
[NOT SUPPORTED]
[FORMAT ERROR]
[NO CARD]
Card cannot be used or recognized.
P2 card not in specified format
No card is inserted.
No display
In the USB device mode
2
Assignment information display of <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) and the <RET> button on the lens
Displays the information of the functions assigned to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) or the <RET> button on the lens.
3
4
5
6
Automatic white balance, automatic black balance abnormal display
Displays the status in the mode check when the automatic white balance and automatic black balance do not function correctly.
Battery type display
Displays the battery type currently selected for detection of the battery charge level.
The display position on the mode check screen is different from the normal screen.
SD memory card remaining space in proxy recording (option)
Displays the recording capacity when proxy recording is recorded to the SD memory card.
The capacity is displayed in min when it is less than 120 minutes; in h when it is more than 120 minutes; 99h when it is more than 99 hours.
[PROXY/NETWORK] screen
The proxy and network operation status can be checked on the [PROXY/NETWORK] status screen for the mode check displayed when the <DISP/
MODE CHK> switch is pushed towards the <CHK> side twice.
<PROXY>
1
2
3
4
MEDIA
MODE
SUPER
:P2&SD
:STD 2CH MP4
:UPPER
PROXY BOARD ERROR
<NETWORK>
NETWORK :LAN
ERROR
5
STREAM :ERROR
!PRE REC
6
7
Display item
Display details
PROXY
1
2
3
4
[MEDIA]
Media selection status for proxy recording
[P2], [P2&SD], [OFF]
[MODE]
Setting status for proxy recording mode
[STD 2CH MP4], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 4CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [LOW 2CH MOV]
[SUPPER]
Superimpose setting status for time code
[UPPER], [LOWER], [OFF]
[PROXY BOARD ERROR]
Operation error of proxy interface
– 80 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
Display item
Display details
NETWORK
5
[NETWORK]
[STREAM]
Network type and operation status
[WLAN], [LAN], [OFF]
f If the selected network is not operated, [ERROR] is displayed at the bottom.
6*
Streaming mode and status display
f [RTP]: When RTP mode is selected
f [HTTP]: When HTTP mode is selected
f [ERROR]: Streaming cannot be activated
f [INHIBIT]: When the [STREAMING MODE] item of the menu is set to [INHIBIT]
7*
[ERROR] factor of [STREAM]
Display the factor why streaming is not activated
f [!PROXY MODE]: When proxy setting is not streaming-compatible format
f [!PRE REC]: When pre-recording function is turned on and proxy recording is set
* This is not displayed if the network function is not activated, or if the video encoder board (optional AG-YDX600G) is not installed.
Center marker display
The [MARKER] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set to [ON].
NOTE
@@
t The center marker is displayed only in the viewfinder. It is not displayed in the video output and SDI output.
Safety zone display
The option selected at the [SAFETY ZONE] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is displayed.
[OFF]
[90%]
Does not display.
Displays the range that can be displayed in most household TVs.
[4:3]
Displays the position after the screen is adjusted by 4:3 aspect ratio.
Displays the position after the screen is adjusted by 13:9 aspect ratio.
Displays the position after the screen is adjusted by 14:9 aspect ratio.
[13:9]
[14:9]
NOTE
@@
t When the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the [SYSTEM SETUP] screen is set to [480-59.94i] and [576-50i], and the [ASPECT CONV] item is set
to [SIDE CROP] and [LETTER BOX], this is not displayed even by selecting [4:3], [13:9], or [14:9].
t The center zone is displayed only in the viewfinder. It is not displayed in the video output and SDI output.
Zebra patterns display
The camera can display two types of zebra patterns.
When the ZEBRA switch of the viewfinder is set to on, the zebra pattern currently set in the menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Zebra patterns can also be displayed in the video of the <MON OUT> terminal according to settings.
The level for displaying zebra patterns can be set on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen.
Item
Setting value
Description of settings
Sets the level of zebra pattern 1 tilting to the right.
Sets the level of zebra pattern 2 tilting to the left.
Selects the type of [ZEBRA2].
[ZEBRA1 DETECT]
[ZEBRA2 DETECT]
[ZEBRA2]
[50%] ... [70%] ... [109%]
[50%] ... [85%] ... [109%]
[ON], [SPOT], [OFF]
Underlined settings are factory settings.
– 81 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
[SPOT]: The video level from the setting value of [ZEBRA1] to the setting value of [ZEBRA2] is displayed in the zebra pattern.
=HEUDꢂSDWWHUQꢂꢃ
9LGHRꢂOHYHO
>21@
>2))@
>6327@
>ꢄꢀꢅꢁ@
=HEUDꢂSDWWHUQꢂꢃꢂ
GHWHFWHG
=HEUDꢂSDWWHUQꢂꢄꢂ
GHWHFWHG
ꢀꢁ
To display the zebra pattern on the video for the <MON OUT> terminal, set the [MON/HDMI ZEBRA] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen or
the [SET03:MON/HDMI SETUP] item of SmartUI.
Focus assist function
An enlarged area and focus bar can be displayed to make focusing easier.
Enlarged area
[EXPANDED]
Press the <FOCUS ASSIST> button to enlarge the central area of the screen by approximately 3x to make it easier to focus.
<FOCUS ASSIST> button
EXPANDED
f In the enlarged display, the status display and zebra pattern disappear, and [EXPANDED] is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
@@
t Only the viewfinder screen is displayed enlarged.
t The display is not enlarged with video output, SDI output, and HDMI output, but the status display disappears when various statuses are
displayed.
Focus bar display
[FOCUS BAR]
The focus bar is displayed when the [FOCUS BAR] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set to [ON].
The degree of focus is indicated by the length of the bar.
Not in focus
The bar extends to the right
when the viewfinder is
in-focus.
– 82 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Viewfinder status display
Waveform monitor function
A waveform of the video can be displayed by assigning the waveform monitor function to the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>)
and pressing the assigned <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>). Press the button again to return to the normal display.
f This is not displayed while the focus assist function [EXPANDED] is activated.
f The waveform display cannot be recorded.
– 83 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Handling setting data
Handling setting data
Setting data file configuration
F1 to F6 scene files can be saved internally on the camera matched to scene file numbers.
When an SD memory card is used, a maximum of four data of F1 to F6 can be batch-saved to files in the card for reading and use later on.
Also,one set of setting menu values (including SmartUI setting values) can be saved internally on the camera as a user file, and up to four sets can be
saved to an SD memory card.
The figure below shows the configuration of setting data files on the camera.
$*ꢋ+3;ꢈꢌꢌ3ꢉ$*ꢋ+3;ꢈꢌꢌ(-ꢉ$*ꢋ+3;ꢈꢌꢌ(1
6'ꢁFDUG
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@
ꢂIDFWRU\ꢁGHIDXOWVꢃ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@
ꢂFXUUHQWꢁRSHUDWLRQꢁVWDWXVꢁYDOXHVꢃ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@
ꢀYDOXHVꢁVDYHGꢁRQꢁWKHꢁFDPHUDꢂ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@
ꢀ6'ꢁFDUGꢂ
)ꢃ
)ꢄ
)ꢀꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢄꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢅꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢆꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢇꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢈꢁGHIDXOW
)ꢀꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢀꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
)ꢅ
)ꢆ
)ꢇ
)ꢈ
)ꢃ
)ꢄ
)ꢅ
)ꢆ
)ꢇ
)ꢈ
)ꢃ
)ꢄ
)ꢅ
)ꢆ
)ꢇ
)ꢈ
)ꢃ
)ꢄ
)ꢅ
)ꢆ
)ꢇ
)ꢈ
>6&(1(ꢁ
),/(@ꢁꢃ
)ꢄꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢅꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢆꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢇꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢈꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
)ꢄꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
)ꢅꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
)ꢆꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
)ꢇꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
)ꢈꢁVDYHGꢁYDOXH
>6&(1(ꢁ
),/(@ꢁꢄ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@ꢁVFUHHQ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@ꢁVFUHHQ
>,1,7,$/@ꢊꢃ
>/2$'@ꢉ>6$9(@ꢊꢃ
>6&(1(ꢁ
),/(@ꢁꢅ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@ꢁQXPEHUꢁXQLW
)ꢃꢁWRꢁ)ꢈꢁEDWFK
>&$5'ꢁ)81&7,216@ꢁVFUHHQ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@ꢁĺꢁ>/2$'@ꢉ>6$9(@ꢊꢄ
>6&(1(ꢁ
),/(@ꢁꢆ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@
>86(5ꢁ),/(@
>86(5ꢁ),/(@
>86(5ꢁ),/(@
ꢀIDFWRU\ꢁGHIDXOWVꢂ
ꢀFXUUHQWꢁRSHUDWLRQꢁVWDWXVꢁYDOXHVꢂ ꢀYDOXHVꢁVDYHGꢁRQꢁWKHꢁFDPHUDꢂ
ꢀ6'ꢁFDUGꢂ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁFXUUHQWꢁYDOXH
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁGHIDXOW
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁVDYHGꢁ
YDOXH
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁꢃ
>27+(5ꢁ)81&7,216@ꢁVFUHHQ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁĺꢁ>,1,7,$/@
>27+(5ꢁ)81&7,216@ꢁVFUHHQ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁĺꢁ>/2$'@ꢉ>6$9(@
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁꢄ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁꢅ
>86(5ꢁ),/(@ꢁꢆ
>&$5'ꢁ)81&7,216@ꢁVFUHHQ
>6&(1(ꢁ),/(@ꢁĺꢁ>/2$'@ꢉ>6$9(@
NOTE
@@
t When the [MENU INIT] item on the setting menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen is executed, all current operation status values and values
saved on the camera of F1 to F6, and the current operation status values and values saved on the camera in user files can be batch-
returned to factory defaults. However, [TIME ZONE] settings cannot be returned to factory defaults.
t Operations on setting data files may result in error during playback or when the [PC MODE] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN] screen
is set to [ON]. Set the [PC MODE] item to [OFF] before performing operations.
t When recording is possible by combining to the previous clip by one-clip recording (i.e. when [1"CLIP] is displayed), operations cannot be
performed on scene files or user files. Close the menu and press the <STOP> button for approximately two seconds to stop combining to the
clip, and try the operations again.
Setting up using SD memory cards
An SD or SDHC memory card (optional) can be used as a setup card that stores up to four files of setting menu content.
Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states.
Handling SD memory cards
The SD memory card can be removed and inserted, either before or after the power is turned on.
Inserting SD memory cards
Open the slot cover, insert the card into the SD memory card slot with the label side of the SD memory card (optional) upward, and close the slot cover.
– 84 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Handling setting data
NOTE
@@
t The SD memory card must be inserted with the correct side facing the SD card slot. If the SD memory card is hard to insert, it may be
reversed or upside-down. Do not force it into the slot. Check the orientation of the card before re-inserting it.
t On the camera, use SD memory cards that are compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC standard.
Removing SD memory cards
After opening the slot cover and making sure that the busy lamp is not illuminated, push the SD memory card further into the main unit and then release.
This releases the SD memory card from the card slot, and remove the SD memory card and close the slot cover.
Note the following points when using or storing memory cards.
f Avoid high temperature and humidity
f Avoid water droplets
f Avoid charging with electricity
Store the SD memory card with the card still inserted into the camera and with the slot cover closed.
Performing operations on SD memory cards
Perform operations such as formatting an SD memory card, write setting data to an SD memory card, or read data on a memory card on the setting
menu [CARD FUNCTIONS] screen.
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
If the SD memory card that is formatted in a standard other than the SD/SDHC standards on a device other than the camera is inserted, [FORMAT
ERROR] is displayed at the top right of the screen. In this case, reformat the SD memory card.
Formatting SD memory cards
NOTE
@@
t SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen.
Select the [SD CARD FORMAT] item on the setting menu
[CARD FUNCTIONS] screen, and press the jog dial button.
Select [EXECUTE], and press the jog dial button.
1
2
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
– 85 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Handling setting data
Select [YES] on the confirmation screen, and press the jog
dial button.
3
Error message
Remedy
[SD CARD FORMAT NG NO
CARD]
(No SD memory card is inserted.)
Insert an SD memory card.
[SD CARD FORMAT OK] is displayed, and the SD memory card is
formatted.
The SD memory card may be
defective.
Replace the card.
[SD CARD FORMAT NG ERROR]
(The card cannot be formatted.)
NOTE
@@
t Since data that is deleted by formatting cannot be restored, be
sure to check the data before executing formatting.
The card will not be formatted if the following message is displayed
while the jog dial button is pressed:
[SD CARD FORMAT NG WRITE
PROTECT]
(The card is write-protected.)
Remove the SD memory card and
cancel the protection.
The SD memory card cannot be
accessed.
Wait for accessing to end and then
reformat the card.
[SD CARD FORMAT NG CANNOT
ACCESS]
(The card cannot be accessed.)
How to use scene file data
f Settings matching various shooting conditions can be saved as individual scene file numbers.
f The required files can be read in the [CAM02:SCENE FILE] screen of SmartUI.
f The setting values of scene files can also be changed at each item of the setting menu (page 122). After a scene file is changed, it can also be saved
as individual scene file numbers.
f Even when the [VFR] item (option) and the [F.RATE] item (option) are switched on SmartUI during recording, operation is not changed. The operation
changes after recording completes.
Same applies when the [VFR] item or the [F.RATE] item is changed by switching between [F1] to [F6] of scene files.
r Factory settings
[F1]
File suitable for standard shooting
[F2]: [FLUO.]
[F3]: [SPARK]
[F4]: [B-STR]
[F5]: [CINE V]
[F6]: [CINE D]
File suitable for shooting factoring in the characteristics of fluorescent lighting (e.g. indoor shooting)
File suitable for SD shooting with resolution, hue and contrast enhanced
File suitable for shooting with shadow tones extended (e.g. sunsets)
File suitable for film-like shooting with priority given to contrast
File suitable for film-like shooting with priority given to dynamic range
NOTE
@@
t The [SYSTEM MODE] item is not changed even if a scene file is changed. Set this at each item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP]
screen.
Changing scene file settings
r Renaming scene files
Use the <CAM> button to display the [CAM02:SCENE FILE]
screen of SmartUI, and select the scene file to be changed.
Select [CHANGE], and press the jog dial button.
1
3
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
Select the [NAME EDIT] item on the setting menu [SCENE
FILE] screen, and press the jog dial button.
2
KNEE
MID
NORM1
OFF
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
THIN
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
RETURN
CHANGE
KNEE
MID
NORM1
OFF
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
THIN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
RETURN
CHANGE
When the following screen is displayed, use the jog dial
button to set a 6-character file name.
4
f Turning the jog dial button switches the character display in the
order of space (m) → alphabet characters (A to Z) → numbers (0 to
9) → symbols (;:<=>?@[¥]^_-./).
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
– 86 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Handling setting data
f When a file name is already set, pressing the <RESET> button
while the file name is being set clears the characters.
f Pressing the <MENU> button ends [NAME EDIT]. When the
changed value is fixed, it is held even if the power is turned off or
the dial position is changed. The settings of each item for the scene
file are also held in the same way.
NAME EDIT
SW POSITION F3
S P A R K
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
r Saving F1 scene data to the camera
f To return to the setting menu one up the menu hierarchy, press the
<MENU> button.
Select the [LOAD/SAVE/INIT] item on the setting menu
[SCENE FILE] screen, and press the jog dial button.
1
SCENE FILE
SAVE ?
SCENE FILE
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
RETURN
YES
NO
PUSH SET
LOAD
FRAME RATE
SYNC SCAN TYPE
SYNCHRO SCAN
DETAIL LEVE
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
SAVE
INITIAL
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
f When changes to settings ends after [PROCESSING...] is
displayed, the following message is displayed:
Select [SAVE], and press the jog dial button.
2
SCENE FILE
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
RETURN
LOAD
SAVE
FRAME RATE
SAVE
SYNC SCAN TYPE
SYNCHRO SCAN
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
INITIAL
COMPLETED !
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
f To return settings to their previously saved values after scene file
Select [YES], and press the jog dial button.
3
f To return scene file settings to factory settings, select [INITIAL] in
f To save and read user file settings, and return settings to their
factory settings, perform the same operation as for scene files at
the [USER FILE] item on the setting menu [OTHER FUNCTIONS]
screen.
Saving scene files, etc. to SD memory cards
Up to four each of scene files that have been set or other setting values can be grouped together and saved on or read from SD memory cards.
f With scene files, current setting values are automatically saved on the camera, and that saved data is written to the SD memory card. When data is
read from an SD memory card, the current setting values are rewritten at the same time as data saved internally on the camera.
The following basically explains how to save scene files.
Select the [SCENE FILE] item on the setting menu [CARD
FUNCTIONS] screen, and press the jog dial button.
1
Select [CHANGE], and press the jog dial button.
2
To select other setting values, select [USER FILE].
– 87 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording — Handling setting data
Select [WRITE], press the jog dial button, and select
[EXECUTE], and then press the jog dial button.
4
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
FILE SELECT
READ
1
>>>
WRITE
RETURN
EXECUTE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
TITLE RELOAD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Press and turn the jog dial button to select the file number
(1 to 4).
3
Press the cursor buttons, turn the jog dial button, and select
[YES], and then press the jog dial button.
To apply a setting, press the jog dial button again.
5
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
f In the figure below, [TITLE1] is the file name.
f [WRITE OK] is displayed when writing is complete.
FILE SELECT
READ
1
>>>
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
WRITE
>>>
FILE 1
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 2
YES
NO
PUSH SET
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE EDIT
TITLE RELOAD
T I T L E 1
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Reading files
Perform steps 1 to 3, select [READ] in step 4, and select [EXECUTE], and then press the jog dial button. [READ OK] is displayed when reading is
complete.
For user files, perform the same operation as for scene files at the [USER FILE] item on the [CARD FUNCTIONS] screen.
Re-reading files from an SD memory card
Perform steps 1 to 2, select [TITLE RELOAD] in step 4, and select [YES], and then press the jog dial button to re-read the file.
Adding titles to files
NOTE
1
2
@@
t If [WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR] is displayed, reformat the SD
memory card.
t If [WRITE NG WRITE PROTECT] is displayed, cancel the
protection of the SD memory card.
t If [WRITE NG CANNOT ACCESS] appears, quit all other
operations (such as playback) before proceeding.
t When [WRITE NG ERROR] is displayed, a probable cause is a
defective SD memory card, so replace the memory card.
Turn the jog dial button, select the desired character, and
press the jog dial button to move to the next character.
f Space (m), alphabet character (A to Z), numbers (0 to 9), symbols
(;:<=>?@[¥]^_-./)
f You can clear all characters by the <RESET> button.
When you have finished entering all characters, move the
cursor to the right end of the entered title.
3
Select [YES], and press the jog dial button.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
4
YES
NO
PUSH SET
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
[WRITE OK] is displayed when writing is complete.
– 88 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Power supply
Power supply
A battery or an external DC power supply can be used as power supply.
Using batteries
Batteries with validated connection with the camera are as follows.
r Anton/Bauer batteries
HYTRON50, HYTRON140
DIONIC90, DIONIC160, DIONIC HC
r IDX batteries
ENDURA7, ENDURA10, ENDURA HL9
r PAG batteries
PAG L96e
NOTE
@@
t Other batteries may be supported by changing the setting menu, but we recommend that you use batteries with connection to the camera
validated.
t Before you use a battery, charge it with a battery charger. (For details on charging, refer to each instruction operation.)
Mounting and setting battery
Using Anton/Bauer batteries
Mount an Anton/Bauer battery.
Insert the battery, and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
1
2
Power supply output terminal for lighting
Release lever
Anton/Bauer battery
Light control switch
NOTE
@@
t To remove the battery, keep the release lever of the battery
holder completely down, slide the battery in the opposite
direction of when you mounted it.
NOTE
@@
t The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power supply
output terminal for lighting and a light control switch, which are
convenient when installing light. Contact Anton/Bauer, Inc. for
details on lighting systems.
Set the battery type.
3
Set the battery type with the [BATTERY SELECT] item on the setting
menu [BATTERY SETUP] screen.
Using V-mount type batteries
Mount the V-mount adaptor plate. As shown in the figure, insert and slide in the direction of the arrow.
f When removing the plate, remove by sliding the release lever.
Release lever
– 90 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Power supply
r Setting the battery type
f Set the battery type with the [BATTERY SELECT] item on the setting menu [BATTERY SETUP] screen.
f When using a battery that is not in the [BATTERY SELECT] item, set [TYPE A] or [TYPE B], and set each item according to the characteristics of the
battery. (The default value of [TYPE A] is set to ENDURA HL9 of the IDX battery.)
NOTE
@@
t Contact the point of purchase for information about the V-mount adaptor plate.
t When the V-mount adaptor plate is used, % (percent) display is not possible even if batteries with battery level indicator function are used.
Using NP type batteries
5) Align holes on the bottom of the cover (metal part) with holes on
the case and mount with the screw.
Mount the V-mount adaptor plate onto the camera.
1
Mount the holder plate onto NP type battery case.
2
2)
f When packing comes with the holder plate, apply the packing to the
battery case beforehand.
1) Remove the screw on the bottom of the cover, and remove the
cover.
2) Align the holes in the battery case and the holder plate, and
tighten the mounting screw.
3) Tighten the screw for power supply contact.
3)
1) 5)
4) Insert the top of the removed cover in the direction of the arrow.
4)
Using external DC power supply
Connect the external DC power supply to the <DC IN>
terminal of the camera.
1
r External DC power supply
Connect after making sure that the output voltage of the external DC power
supply is compatible with the rated voltage of the camera.
Select an output amperage for the external DC power supply with a margin
above the total amperage of the connected devices.
The total amperage of connected devices can be calculated with the
following formula.
Total power consumption ÷ Voltage
When the power of the camera is turned on, inrush current is generated.
Insufficient power supply when turning on the power may cause a
malfunction. We recommend using an external DC power supply that can
assure double the capacity of the total power consumption of the camera
and connected devices that are turned on by interlock when the power of the
camera is turned on (such as lenses, wireless microphone receivers). For
the DC cord, use a dual-core shielded wire of AWG18 (nominal cross section
2
area 0.824 mm ) or thicker.
DC cord
f Make sure of the pin alignment of the DC output terminal of the external
DC power supply and the camera <DC IN> terminal, and connect the
polarity correctly.
<DC IN> terminal
External DC power supply
If the +12 V power supply is connected to the GND terminal in error, it
may cause fire or malfunction.
DC IN
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
Turn on the external DC power supply switch (if there is an
external DC power supply switch).
2
NC
Turn the <POWER> switch of the camera <ON>.
3
+12 V
Panasonic Parts No: K1AA104H0038
Manufacturer Parts No: HA16RX-4P (SW1) (76) (Hirose Electric Co.)
– 91 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Power supply
NOTE
@@
t When both the battery and the external DC power supply are
connected, the power supply from the external DC power
supply has priority. The battery may be removed while using the
external DC power supply.
t When using an external DC power supply, always turn the
power switch of the external DC power supply on before turning
the <POWER> switch of the camera <ON>. If the operations
are performed in reverse, the camera may malfunction because
the external DC power supply output voltage rises too slowly.
t When connecting batteries to the <DC IN> terminal, set to
[BATTERY] with the [EXT DC IN SEL] item on the setting menu
[BATTERY SETUP] screen, and set the battery type with the
[BATTERY SELECT] item. However, in that case, % display is
not possible for batteries with battery level indicator function.
– 92 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting and adjusting the lens
Mounting and adjusting the lens
Mounting the lens
Raise the lens lever and remove the mount cap.
Lower the lens lever to firmly clamp the lens.
1
3
Lens lever
Secure the cable through the cable clamp and connect it to
the <LENS> terminal.
4
Mount cap
Align the indentation at the top center of the lens mount with
the center mark of the lens to mount the lens.
2
Cable clamp
Mark
<LENS> terminal
NOTE
@@
t For details on the current from the <LENS> terminal, refer to
Perform lens flange back adjustments.
5
NOTE
@@
t For handling the lens, refer to the lens operating instructions.
t When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to protect the
device.
Flange back adjustment
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide-angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange back (distance from the lens
mounting surface to the image formation surface).
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be readjusted as long as the lens is not changed.
NOTE
@@
t Refer to the lens operating instructions for guidance on adjustment methods and positions of lens parts.
For a normal lens
Mount the lens on the camera.
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.
1
2
Make sure to connect the lens cable.
Approximately 3 m
– 93 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting and adjusting the lens
Place the flange back adjustment chart approximately 3 m
from the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain
an appropriate image output level.
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and turn the
distance ring to bring the chart into focus.
3
4
5
6
7
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position and turn the F.f
(Flange focus) ring to bring the chart into focus.
If the image level is too high, use the filters or the shutter.
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.
At this time, do not move the distance ring.
telephoto and wide-angle positions.
NOTE
8
9
@@
t F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.
Firmly tighten the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position, either manually
or by electric drive.
White shading compensation
Three optionally adjustable data items [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] can be used for white shading compensation with the camera. Set these data
items from the [SHADING SELECT] item on the setting menu [LENS SETUP] screen. Shading compensation is not performed when set it to [OFF].
NOTE
@@
t When white shading adjustment is performed while image is being disturbed due to the generator lock, adjustment may not be performed
correctly. Try white shading adjustment again after the image returns to normal.
Selecting white shading data
f To perform white shading adjustment, select either [USER1],
[USER2], or [USER3].
Select the [SHADING SELECT] item on the setting menu
[LENS SETUP] screen, and press the jog dial button.
1
f With factory settings, no data is stored in [USER1], [USER2], and
[USER3].
LENS SETUP
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
OFF
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
LENS
USER1
USER2
USER3
OFF
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
>>>
>>>
>>>
LENS
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Use the jog dial button to select any one of [USER1],
[USER2], [USER3], or [OFF], and press the jog dial button.
2
Adjusting the white shading
NOTE
@@
t Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the lens aperture is open (OPEN) even when the white shading has been adjusted,
but this is something that is inherent to optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a malfunction.
Set the camera for adjustment.
1
1) Mount the lens on the camera.
f Make sure to connect the lens cable.
2) Set the shutter switch to OFF and the gain to 0 dB.
3) If the lens is equipped with extender function, release the extender
function.
4) Check that either [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] is set with the
[SHADING SELECT] item on the setting menu [LENS SETUP]
screen.
5) Select [EXECUTE] at the [SHADING (USER)] item, and press the
jog dial button.
– 94 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting and adjusting the lens
f The [CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL ZEBRA ON EVF] message
NOTE
@@
appears.
t Since fluorescent lights, mercury lamps, and other such kinds of
lighting tend to flicker, use a light source which is less subject to
flickering such as sunlight or a halogen lamp.
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
USER1
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
t Make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc. also when
the lens aperture is not between F4 and F11.
t Make sure to leave the shutter switch at OFF.
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
Adjust the white balance/black balance.
3
>>>
>>>
1) Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <A> or <B>, and use the <AUTO
W/B BAL> switch to perform automatic white balance adjustment
(AWB).
>>>
LENS
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
2) Perform automatic black balance adjustment (ABB) with the
<AUTO W/B BAL> switch.
3) Use the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch to perform automatic white
balance adjustment (AWB) again.
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON EVF
4
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
Execute the white shading adjustment.
1) Select [YES], and press the jog dial button.
5
NO
PUSH SET
2) The [SHADING ACTIVE] message appears on the screen during
the adjustment.
3) When the adjustment is complete after a few seconds, the
[SHADING OK] message appears.
Set the screen.
2
1) Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of color for the
whole screen.
f If an error message such as [SHADING NG LEVEL OVER] or
[SHADING NG LOW LIGHT] appears, readjust the aperture.
f The adjusted value is automatically stored in the set memory
[USER1], [USER2], or [USER3].
2) Set the lens aperture control to manual, and adjust it so that the
zebra pattern covers the whole viewfinder screen.
If the lens is equipped with extender function, turn on the
f Adjust the position of the lighting because the zebra pattern will
not cover the whole screen if there is any unevenness in the
lighting.
6
In this case, white shading does not need to be adjusted again with
the extender function released.
f Make adjustments to avoid several light sources of different color
temperature (e.g. fluorescent lights and halogen lamp) from
illuminating on the white paper.
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON EVF
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
Chromatic aberration compensation function (CAC)
The chromatic aberration compensation function is a function to automatically compensate for registration error that is caused mainly due to slight
chromatic aberration, which is hard to completely compensate with the lens itself, using the camera recorder unit, and to minimize lateral chromatic
aberration of surrounding image.
When the lens compatible with the chromatic aberration compensation function is mounted, if the camera has the chromatic aberration compensation
data of the lens, then the chromatic aberration compensation function is activated automatically.
NOTE
@@
t In the menu, representative lens model numbers are displayed.
t The chromatic aberration compensation function of the camera is effective only in the horizontal direction.
t The chromatic aberration compensation function does not operate in +18 dB.
t When the lens is for macro shooting, the chromatic aberration compensation function may not operate correctly.
t For addition or change in compatible lenses after release of the camera, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Confirming the chromatic aberration compensation function operation status
The chromatic aberration compensation function is operating if [CAC] is displayed on the upper right of the mode check screen while the menu is not
displayed.
– 95 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting and adjusting the lens
Confirming the chromatic aberration compensation data number and information
r Chromatic aberration compensation function properties
(example)
Select the [CAC PROPERTY] item on the setting menu [LENS
SETUP] screen, and press the jog dial button.
1
a
Select [DISPLAY], and press the jog dial button.
2
CAC PROPERTY
The properties of the chromatic aberration compensation function are
displayed.
ACTIVE CAC FILE NO : 1
FILE NO : 1
b
c
LENS SETUP
MAKER
TYPE
: CANON
:
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
OFF
>>>
KJ10EX4.5B IRSD PS12
VERSION : 1.00-00-0.00
ON
DATA ERROR
PLEASE READ CAC CARD
RETURN
DISPLAY
>>>
d
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
>>>
LENS
a: Data number of chromatic aberration compensation currently in
use
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
b: Data number of chromatic aberration compensation to be
confirmed
Select by turning the jog dial button.
c: Information of chromatic aberration compensation data specified
in b
d: Error message
The file cannot be used if an error message is displayed. Perform
either initialization of the chromatic aberration compensation file, or
read the chromatic aberration compensation file from the SD memory
card again.
Reading the chromatic aberration compensation file from the SD memory card
Select the [CAC CARD READ] item on the setting menu
[LENS SETUP] screen, and press the jog dial button.
Select the chromatic aberration compensation file to be read,
select [YES] on the confirmation screen, and then press the
jog dial button.
1
3
Select [EXECUTE], and press the jog dial button.
2
CAC CARD READ
KJ10EX4.5B IRS
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
OFF
>>>
ON
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
LENS
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE READ
CAC FILE NO:1
READ?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
NOTE
@@
t Up to eight files can be read into the camera.
If you try to read a file when eight files have already been read into
the camera, [READ NG CAC FILE FULL] is displayed. To read a
new file, delete any file before reading the new file.
– 96 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting and adjusting the lens
t When [READ NG FORMAT ERROR] is displayed, the file is
unusable and cannot be read. Make sure that the file can be used
with the camera, or the file is correctly stored in the SD memory
card.
Deleting the chromatic aberration compensation file from the camera
Select the [CAC FILE DELETE] item on the setting menu
[LENS SETUP] screen, and press the jog dial button.
1
CAC FILE DELETE
1:KJ10EX4.5B IRSD PS12
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Select [EXECUTE], and press the jog dial button.
2
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
OFF
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
LENS
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE NO:1
DELETE?
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
YES
NO
PUSH SET
Select the chromatic aberration compensation file to be
deleted, select [YES] on the confirmation screen, and then
press the jog dial button.
3
The display changes to [----] when deletion is complete.
Initializing the chromatic aberration compensation file (returning to the factory settings)
Select the [CAC FILE INIT] item on the setting menu [LENS
SETUP] screen, and press the jog dial button.
NOTE
1
@@
t This operation deletes all the files read on the camera, and
restores a single chromatic aberration compensation file of the
factory setting.
Select [EXECUTE], and press the jog dial button.
2
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
OFF
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Select [YES] on the confirmation screen, and press the jog
dial button.
3
f Initialization is complete when [CAC FILE INIT] →
[PROCESSING...] → [COMPLETED] (these three items are
displayed in order) are displayed.
f When completed, the display returns to the [LENS SETUP] screen.
CAC FILE INIT
CAC FILE INITIAL?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
– 97 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Preparing for audio input
Preparing for audio input
Prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices.
Using the front microphone
Microphones such as the microphone kit AG-MC200G (optional) can be mounted.
Open the microphone holder.
Connect the microphone cable to the <MIC IN> terminal on
the camera.
1
3
Viewfinder
Microphone holder
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw.
2
<MIC IN> terminal
Viewfinder clamping screw
According to the audio channel to be recorded, switch the
input signal to [FRONT] on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI.
4
[
]
CH3 4
/
AUD02:INPUT
CH1
CH2
FRONT
FRONT
W.L. AUTO
W.L. AUTO
REAR MANU REAR MANU
[
] [
] [
] [
LVL
]
IN
LVL
IN
Using a wireless receiver
Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and secure
it with the screws.
According to the audio channel to be recorded, switch
the input signal to [W.L.] on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI.
1
2
[
]
CH3 4
/
AUD02:INPUT
CH1
CH2
FRONT
FRONT
W.L. AUTO
W.L. AUTO
REAR MANU REAR MANU
[
] [
] [
] [
LVL
]
IN
LVL
IN
When using a two channel wireless receiver, select [DUAL] in the
[WIRELESS TYPE] item on the setting menu [AUDIO SETUP] screen.
Using audio devices
Connect the audio device to the <AUDIO IN> terminal of the
camera with the XLR cable.
Set the <LINE>/<MIC> selector switch on the rear panel to
<LINE>.
1
3
According to the channel to which the XLR cable is
connected, switch the input signal to [REAR] on the
[AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI.
2
<LINE>/<MIC> selector
switch
<AUDIO IN CH2/4> terminal
<AUDIO IN CH1/3> terminal
– 98 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Mounting accessories
Mounting accessories
Mounting the camera on a tripod
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the optional tripod adaptor (SHAN-TM700).
Mount the tripod adaptor on the tripod. Mount the camera on the tripod adaptor.
1
2
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you hear a click.
Tripod adaptor
Pan head
NOTE
@@
t Select an appropriate hole in the adaptor, taking into account
the center of gravity of the camera and tripod adaptor
combined.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole matches
the diameter of the pan head screw.
Removing the camera from the tripod adaptor
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to remove it.
Red lever
Black lever
NOTE
@@
t If the tripod adaptor pin does not return to its original position after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever down and move the
black lever in the direction of the arrow again, in order to return the pin to its original position.
Note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin remains in the center.
Attaching the shoulder strap
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap fittings.
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then detach the strap.
Shoulder strap
Press to open the hook
NOTE
@@
t Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.
– 99 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation — Connecting the <DC OUT> terminal with the external recording start/stop switch
Connecting the <DC OUT> terminal with the external recording start/stop switch
It is possible to retrieve 1.5 A current from the <DC OUT> terminal of the camera.
Recording start/stop can be controlled by connecting an external switch to this terminal.
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this terminal, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the camera on a crane.
<DC OUT> terminal
(Connection example)
Cable connector
HR10A-7R-4SC (73)
Hirose Electric Co.
4
3
1
2
LED
Resistance
Recording
start/stop
1
GND
2
TALLY OUT
Open collector output on the camera side
Tally lamp on
Tally lamp off
Low impedance
High impedance
3
Recording start/stop switch
This is connected in parallel to the <REC> button on the camera or
the VTR button on the lens.
4
+12 V
NOTE
@@
t Make sure that polarity is correct before connecting an external
device. Failure to do so may result in a malfunction.
– 101 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips
The images and voices created from one shooting session, together with
additional information such as text memos and metadata are saved as
clips. You can play back and edit clips with the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Thumbnail operations
Thumbnail operation overview
A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices created from one shooting session, together with additional information such as text memos
and metadata.
The following operations can be performed using the cursor and <SET> button while checking the thumbnails of clips displayed on the viewfinder
screen.
f Play back, delete, copy, or restore clips.
f Add or delete a shot mark and text memo on the clip thumbnail.
f Copy part of a clip using the text memo.
f Change the thumbnail image using the text memo.
f Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
f Upload and edit clip metadata from the SD memory card.
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows.
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
PROPERTY
DELETE
ALL CLIP
CLIP PROPERTY
FORMAT
SAME FORMAT CLIPS
SELECTED CLIPS
MARKED CLIPS
REPAIR CLIP
RE-CONNECTION
COPY
EXCH. THUMBNAIL
EXIT
TEXT MEMO CLIPS
CARD STATUS
SLOT CLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
SLOT1
SLOT2
INDICATOR
DATA DISPLAY
DATE FORMAT
THUMBNAIL SIZE
PLAYBACK RESUME
THUMBNAIL INIT
EXIT
DEVICES
PROPERTY SETUP
EXIT
HDD
NETWORK*2
SETUP
ACTIVATE*1
META DATA
EXPORT
LOAD
RECORD
USER CLIP NAME
INITIALIZE
EXPORT PRODUCT SERIAL #
IMPORT ACTIVATION CODE
ACTIVATION LIST
EXIT
EXPLORE
SETUP
EXIT
EXIT
PROPERTY
EXIT
*1 This is a menu to enable the optional functions (extra-cost options). For details, refer to the operating instructions for each option.
*2 Available when the upgrade software key AG-SFU601G (network function (extra-cost option)) is installed. For details, refer to the operating instructions of
AG-SFU601G.
– 103 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Thumbnail screen
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail screen on the viewfinder screen. Press the <THUMBNAIL> button again to return to the
regular display. Also, when changing from the regular display to the thumbnail screen display, all clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen.
Also, press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button from the thumbnail screen to enable thumbnail menu operations.
2
17
1
16
3
4
7
6
5
10
18
9
8
19
Displayed only when the [EVF TYPE] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY
SETUP] screen is set to [B/W].
11 12 13 14 15
1
Display mode
Displays the type of the thumbnail displayed on the screen, and the types of the other information screens.
[ALL]
Displays all clips.
[SAME FORMAT]
Displays clips in the same format as the system format [SYSTEM MODE] item, and [REC FORMAT] item.
[SELECT]
[MARKER]
Displays clips selected with the <SET> button.
Displays clips with shot marks.
[TEXT MEMO]
[SLOT n]
Displays clips with text memo data.
Displays clips in the specified P2 card. (n: indicates slot number 1 to 2.)
[UPDATING..]
Displayed during processing such as screen update. Also during updating the rotating icon [ ] is displayed.
2
Slot number, hard disk drive status
Indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip is recorded. The slot number of the P2 card that contains clips is indicated in yellow. If the clips are
recorded on multiple P2 cards, all slot numbers of the P2 cards that contain the clips are indicated in yellow. The slot numbers are indicated in white
if they contain P2 cards.
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number is displayed with a pink frame.
f [RUN DOWN CARD] (A P2 card on which the maximum number of overwrites has been exceeded.)
f [DIR ENTRY NG CARD] (A P2 card in which the directory structure is not supported.)
The USB hard disk drive is indicated as follows.
Other than the USB host mode
Gray
Gray
Not connected in USB host mode
Hard disk drive recognized and usable in USB host mode
Hard disk drive recognized and thumbnails shown in USB host mode
Hard disk drive recognized and not usable in USB host mode
White
Yellow
Red
3
Time display
Displays any one of the time code [TC] at the start of clip recording/user bits [UB] at the start of clip recording/shooting time [TIME]/shooting date
[DATE]/shooting date and time [DATE TIME]/clip name [CLIP NAME]/user clip name [USER CLIP NAME] according to the setting.
4
5
6
Recording mode
Displays the recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is located.
System format
Displays the format for the clip on which the pointer is located.
Duration/meter display
Displays the duration of the clip on which the pointer is located.
The meter display indicates the playback position in the clip.
– 104 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
7
8
USB host/WLAN/LAN indicator
The USB host indicator is displayed in USB host mode; the WLAN indicator is displayed in WLAN mode; the LAN indicator is displayed in LAN
mode.
Clip number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are allocated in chronological order by shooting
date and time.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording formats, they are displayed in red.
9
[
] Defective clip indicator/[ ] Unknown clip indicator
Displayed for defective clips, which may result from various causes such as turning off the power during recording.
Clips with yellow defective clip indicators can sometimes be restored.
Clips with red defective clip indicators cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
[
] is displayed for clips which differ in format from the P2 standard.
10 [ ] Incomplete clip indicator
Displayed when clips are recorded on multiple P2 cards and either of the P2 cards is not inserted in a P2 card slot.
11 [ ] Shot mark indicator
Displayed for the clip of a thumbnail with a shot mark attached.
12 [ ] Indicator for clips with proxy
Displayed for clips with proxy attached.
13 [ ] Text memo indicator
Displayed for clips with text memo data attached.
14 [ ] Edit copied clip indicator
Displayed on an edit copied clip when the model supports edit copy, such as the AJ-HPM200. For more information about edit copying, refer to the
operating instructions for a model that supports edit copying.
15 [ ] Wide clip indicator
Displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9 aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in HD format.
16 Thumbnail scroll bar
Indicates which part of the whole thumbnail is currently being viewed.
17 Remaining battery charge display
Displays remaining battery level. For details, refer to “Battery charge level display” (page 76) on the “Viewfinder status display” section.
18 [ ] Selected clip indicator
Displays the selection status of the clip when a clip is selected.
19 [
] Not playable clip indicator
Displayed when clips cannot be played back.
NOTE
@@
t The [ ] selected clip indicator and the [
] not playable clip indicator are displayed only when the [EVF TYPE] item on the setting menu
[DISPLAY SETUP] screen is set to [B/W].
Selecting thumbnails
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected on the thumbnail screen.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer (yellow frame) to
the desired clip and press the <SET> button.
1
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a blue frame.
Press the <SET> button again to deselect the clip.
The blue frame display and the selected clip indicator are displayed
when [B/W] is selected with the [EVF TYPE] item on the setting menu
[DISPLAY SETUP] screen.
2
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails on the thumbnail
screen for playback.
NOTE
@@
t While holding down the <SHIFT> button, use the cursor up and
down buttons (`/{) to move the pointer to the first or last clips.
t After selecting a clip, move the pointer to another clip and while
holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the <SET> button to
select all clips from the previously selected clip to the pointer
position.
t While holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the <EXIT> button
to deselect all the clips.
a
b
c
d
e
– 105 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
a: <THUMBNAIL> button
b: <EXIT> button
d: <THUMBNAIL MENU> button
e: <SHIFT> button
c: awsq cursor buttons
r<SET> button
Playing back clips
f During playback of clips, press the <%/REW> button to start 4x
speed reverse playback, and the <FF/)> button to start 4x speed
fast playback. Press the <PLAY/PAUSE> button to return to normal
playback.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
2
3
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the desired
clip.
f During playback of clips, press the <PLAY/PAUSE> button to pause
the playback.
Press the <PLAY/PAUSE> button.
During a pause, press the <%/REW> button to pause the
playback at the beginning of the clip. Press the <%/REW> button
again to pause the playback at the beginning of the previous clip.
f The clip under the pointer will be played back on the viewfinder
screen.
f After playback of the clip under the pointer has ended, subsequent
clips are played back in order on the thumbnail screen, and when
playback of the last clip ends, view returns to the thumbnail screen.
During a pause, press the <FF/)> button to pause the playback
at the beginning of the next clip.
f Pressing the <STOP> button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
NOTE
@@
NOTE
t When playing back clips it is not necessary to select the clips
(blue frames around the thumbnails).
t Clips with clip numbers displayed in red* cannot be played.
* The not playable clip indicator is displayed when [B/W] is selected with
the [EVF TYPE] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY SETUP] screen.
@@
t When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer moves to the
clip that was being played back, regardless of where the playback
started.
t Press the <PLAY/PAUSE> button again to start playback from the
beginning of the clip under the pointer. To continue to play back
from where previously stopped, turn the [PLAYBACK RESUME]
Switching the thumbnail display
The display can be switched so that only those clips matching the specified conditions are displayed on the thumbnail screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button.
2
The thumbnail menu appears.
[ALL CLIP]
Displays all clips.
[SAME FORMAT CLIPS]
[SELECTED CLIPS]
Displays clips of the current system format.
Displays randomly selected clips. The
thumbnails appear in selected order.
[MARKED CLIPS]
[TEXT MEMO CLIPS]
[SLOT CLIPS]
Displays clips with shot marks attached.
Displays clips with text memo data.
<THUMBNAIL MENU> button
Displays clips recorded in the P2 card
inserted in the specified slot.
When [SLOT CLIPS] is selected, [SLOT1] to
[SLOT2] are displayed as a sub-menu, select
the desired slot to display the clips.
Select [THUMBNAIL] from the thumbnail menu.
3
Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of the items.
[SETUP]
[EXIT]
Closes the sub-menu.
Changing thumbnails
Replace thumbnails with images that include previously attached text memos while images are recorded or played back.
Add text memos to images to be changed.
Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail to be changed
and press the <SET> button, and then move the pointer to
the text memo display on the lower row.
1
3
Select the thumbnail menu → [THUMBNAIL] → [TEXT MEMO
CLIPS] to display thumbnails of the clips with text memos.
2
– 106 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Select the thumbnail to be replaced from text memos,
4
place the pointer on it, and select [OPERATION] → [EXCH.
THUMBNAIL] on the thumbnail menu.
NOTE
@@
t Display clip properties by selecting the thumbnail menu →
[PROPERTY] → [CLIP PROPERTY] to confirm the position of the
thumbnail in the [THUMBNAIL] item (the number of frames from
the top of the clip). Since thumbnails usually come from the top of
the clip, 0 is displayed.
Press the <SET> button to display the [YES]/[NO]
confirmation screen, and use the cursor buttons and the
<SET> button to select [YES].
5
The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is replaced.
Shot mark
Shot marks can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish the clip from others.
f To delete a shot mark, place the pointer again and press the
<USER> buttons to which the shot mark recording function is
assigned or the <RET> button on the lens.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to
which you want to attach a shot mark.
2
Press the <USER> buttons to which the shot mark recording
function is assigned or the <RET> button on the lens.
3
f This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the clip at the pointer
position.
<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2> buttons
NOTE
@@
t A shot mark can be attached during recording.
t Add shot marks after recording stops to attach the shot mark to the
most recently recorded clip.
t When adding a shot mark to or deleting the shot mark from a clip
recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all these P2 cards
inserted into card slots.
Text memo
During recording or playback, you can add text memos. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some point or break clips into chunks and copy
the necessary portions.
Adding a text memo
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.
f Press the <USER> buttons to which the text memo recording function is assigned or the <RET> button on the lens during recording/playback.
This adds a text memo at the position where the button was pressed.
f While the thumbnail screen is displayed, press the <USER> buttons to which the text memo recording function is assigned or the <RET> button on the
lens to add a text memo at the beginning of a clip.
– 107 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2> buttons
NOTE
@@
t Up to 100 text memos including voice memos can be recorded to a clip. However, voice memos cannot be recorded/played back on the
camera.
Playing back from the text memo position
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button and select
[THUMBNAIL] → [TEXT MEMO CLIPS] from the thumbnail
2
menu.
The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are displayed in the
upper section of the viewfinder screen. The lower section of the
viewfinder screen shows information about the text memo on the clip
selected by the pointer.
7KHꢀSRLQWHUꢀPRYHVꢀGRZQꢁ
With the pointer located in the lower part, move the pointer
to the desired text memo number using the cursor right and
4
left buttons (Y/I), then press the <PLAY/PAUSE> button.
f Playback will start from the time code position of the text memo
where the pointer is located.
If the <STOP> button is pressed during playback or the playback
has finished at the end of the clip, then the thumbnail screen
appears again with the pointer placed on the thumbnail of the text
memo where the playback started.
'LVSOD\ꢀVWLOOꢀLPDJHꢀOLQNHGꢀWRꢀWH[WꢀPHPR
7KXPEQDLOꢀ
GLVSOD\
f While holding down the <SHIFT> button, use the cursor up and
down buttons (`/{) to move the pointer to the first or last text
memo.
6HOHFWHGꢀQXPEHUꢀꢁEOXHꢂꢀDQGꢀWRWDOꢀQXPEHUꢀꢁZKLWHꢂꢀRIꢀWH[WꢀPHPRꢀ
FOLSV
f Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button and select [EXIT] or press
the <EXIT> button to return the pointer to the upper part of the
thumbnail screen.
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired text
memo to play back and press the <SET> button.
3
The pointer moves to the lower part of the viewfinder screen.
NOTE
@@
t Pressing the <REC> button while the text memo screen is being
displayed will not start recording.
t For AVC-Intra format clips that cannot be played back, text memo
thumbnails are not displayed and may be shown as the thumbnail
image with the [ ] mark.
Deleting text memos
clip.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [DELETE] from the menu.
1
3
When [YES] and [NO] appear to confirm deletion, select [YES] using
the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to delete the text memo.
Move the pointer to the text memo to be deleted and press
the <SET> button.
2
– 108 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Using a text memo to divide a clip and copy the necessary portion
f The portion between the selected text memo and the next one is
copied. If no text memo is found after the selected one, then the part
after the selected text memo to the end of the clip is copied.
clip.
1
f If multiple text memos are selected, the selected sections are
Move the pointer to the text memo to be copied and press
the <SET> button.
2
copied.
f While the clip is being copied, the camera indicates the progress
of the copy process and cancelation status. To discontinue the
copy process, press the <SET> button. When the [YES]/[NO]
confirmation screen is displayed, use the cursor buttons and the
<SET> button to select [YES].
You can select multiple text memos.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [COPY].
3
Use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select the
destination slot, and then select [YES].
4
NOTE
@@
t In clip division and copying using the text memo function, the area
copied may be automatically modified depending on the recording
format of the clip.
f Copying starts.
Deleting clips
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
When the following screen appears, use the cursor buttons
and the <SET> button to select [YES].
1
4
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to
be delete and press the <SET> button to select the clip.
2
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [DELETE] from the thumbnail menu.
3
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-green frames) are
deleted by this operation.
NOTE
@@
t To interrupt deleting, press the <SHIFT> button + <EXIT> button
or the <SET> button to cancel the operation. The already deleted
clips cannot be restored even if the deletion process is aborted.
Restoring clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden power-down during recording or removal of the P2 card being accessed.
NOTE
@@
t The clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored. Delete clips with red defective clip indicators. If the clips cannot be deleted,
format the P2 card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective clip indicator may change from yellow to red, and result in inability to restore the clips.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [REPAIR CLIP] from the thumbnail menu.
1
3
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that you want to
repair the clip, select [YES] using the cursor buttons and the <SET>
button to restore the clip.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to
be restored (defective clips are indicated by defective clip
marks) and press the <SET> button to select the clip.
2
Reconnecting incomplete clips
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied from each card. The reconnection
function generates one clip (the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [RE-CONNECTION] from the thumbnail
menu.
1
3
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select
incomplete clips to be reconnected.
2
When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that you want to
reconnect the clip, select [YES] using the cursor buttons and the
<SET> button to reconnect the incomplete clips.
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with [ ] indicator) are
displayed in line.
– 109 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
NOTE
@@
t Incomplete clip indicators will remain displayed when only some
clips are reconnected, unless all the constituent clips of the original
clip are reconnected.
Copying clips
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD memory card in the desired slot.
f When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that you want to
copy the clip, select [YES] using the cursor buttons and the <SET>
button to copy the clip.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the clip to be
copied, and press the <SET> button to select the clip.
2
NOTE
@@
t If recording using the one-clip recording function in which
the clip can be recorded connected to the previous clip
(when [1"CLIP] is displayed), then copying of clips is not
possible. Close the menu and press the <STOP> button for
approximately two seconds to stop combining to the clip, and try
the operations again.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [COPY] from the thumbnail menu.
3
f Select slot 1, 2, or SD memory card as the copy destination.
NOTE
@@
t Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is being
copied because doing so may cause the card to fail. If defective
clips are generated by accidentally performing one of the above
operations, delete them, and then copy them again.
t When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on the clips
is copied, however, when they are copied to an SD memory card*,
video and sound information is not copied, only thumbnails, clip
metadata, icons, Voice Memo, proxy and real-time metadata.
t When recording capacity on the copy destination is insufficient,
[LACK OF CAPACITY!] is displayed and copying is not performed.
When clips to be copied include defective clips, [CANNOT
ACCESS!] is displayed and copying is not performed. When
selected clips include a clip that has been recorded on the same
card as the destination P2 card, copying is not performed.
t To interrupt copying, press <SHIFT> button + <EXIT> button or the
<SET> button to cancel the operation. The clip being copied will be
deleted from the copy destination.
t When identical clips exist on the destination card, the message
[OVERWRITE?] is displayed. Select [YES] to proceed with
overwrite, or [NO] to not proceed.
Setting clip metadata
Information such as the name of the person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a text memo can be read from the SD
memory card, and can be recorded as clip metadata.
Reading clip metadata (metadata upload)
Insert the SD memory card that contains the clip metadata
(metadata upload file).
1
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
2
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
NOTE
@@
t With the thumbnail screen displayed, press the <THUMBNAIL
MENU> button while pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, select [META DATA]
→ [LOAD] from the thumbnail menu, and then press the
3
<SET> button.
Use the cursor buttons to select the desired file to be read,
and select [YES].
4
The metadata name of the metadata upload file on the SD memory
card is displayed.
– 110 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
f Upload starts.
NOTE
@@
f Uploaded data is retained even if the power is turned off.
t During display of metadata names, press the cursor button (I)
to switch to display of file names. Press the cursor button (Y) to
return to display of metadata names.
Clip metadata items
Clip metadata includes the following items. Underlined items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the SD memory card. Other items are
set automatically during shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 viewer, metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards using a PC.
Download the latest version of the P2 viewer from the following URL and install it to your PC.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
NOTE
@@
t Files which were edited by other than P2 viewer are displayed as [UNKNOWN DATA!], and may not be read.
[GLOBAL CLIP ID]
[USER CLIP NAME]
[VIDEO]
Displays the global clip ID that shows the shooting status of the clip.
1
Displays the clip name set by the user.*
Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate) (frame rate of the clip), [PULL DOWN] (pull-down) (pull-down format), and [ASPECT RATIO]
(aspect ratio).
[AUDIO]
Displays [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of recorded audio) and [BITS PER SAMPLE] (quantizing bits for recorded audio).
[ACCESS]
Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE]
(date of the latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE PERSON] (person who made the latest update of the clip).
[DEVICE]
[SHOOT]
Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial number of the device), and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of shooting), [END DATE] (end date of
shooting), and [LOCATION]/[ALTITUDE]/[LONGITUDE]/[LATITUDE]/[SOURCE]/[PLACE NAME] (altitude, longitude, latitude, and
source of the information and name of the location).
[SCENARIO]
[NEWS]
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and [TAKE NO.].
Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter), [PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and [OBJECT] (object of shooting).
2
[MEMO]*
Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo), [OFFSET] (location of the frame where the text memo is added), [PERSON] (person
who recorded the text memo added to the clip), and [TEXT] (content of the text memo).
[THUMBNAIL]
[PROXY]
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset) and the size (height and width) of the image selected as the thumbnail image.
Displays information such as proxy format when proxy is added.
*1 The [USER CLIP NAME] recording method is selectable. For details, refer to “Selecting the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method” (page 112).
*2 When entering [MEMO], make sure to enter [TEXT]. It is not possible to record only [PERSON] (the person inputting the memo), or [OFFSET] (the recording
position).
Checking and modifying uploaded metadata
Details of metadata uploaded from an SD memory card can be checked.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select [META
DATA] → [PROPERTY] from the thumbnail menu.
2
The following screen is displayed.
While checking the settings for the metadata, use the cursor
buttons to move the pointer to the item to be changed, and
press the <SET> button.
4
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the item to be
checked, and press the <SET> button.
3
Settings of the uploaded metadata can be checked.
– 111 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
f A software keyboard screen is displayed, allowing you to modify the
setting.
f While holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the cursor up or
down button (`/{) to move to the start or end of the content to
change.
Setting whether to record the uploaded metadata
From the thumbnail menu, select [META DATA] → [RECORD] item, and set it to [ON]/[OFF]. This item is set to [OFF] in the factory settings.
Selecting the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method
From the thumbnail menu, select [META DATA] → [USER CLIP NAME], and select the recording method of [USER CLIP NAME] from either [TYPE1] or
[TYPE2].
r [TYPE1] (factory setting)
Status of clip metadata
When clip metadata has been loaded
[USER CLIP NAME] to be recorded
Uploaded data
When no clip metadata has been loaded, or when setting disables recording of loaded clip
metadata
Same as [GLOBAL CLIP ID] (UMID data)
r [TYPE2]
Status of clip metadata
[USER CLIP NAME] to be recorded
Uploaded data + [COUNT] value*
Same as [CLIP NAME]
When clip metadata has been loaded
When no clip metadata has been loaded, or when setting disables recording of loaded clip
metadata
* The [COUNT] value is indicated as a four digit number.
The [COUNT] value is incremented each time a new clip is captured if clip metadata has been read in and [TYPE2] has been selected as the recording method.
The [COUNT] value can be reset using the following method.
Select [META DATA] → [PROPERTY] from the thumbnail menu, and select the [USER CLIP NAME] item to display the following screen. Move the cursor over
[COUNT RESET], and press the <SET> button to reset the [COUNT] value to 1.
NOTE
@@
t When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in the camera, and a one-time continuous recording exceeds the
prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and AVC-Intra 100: approximately five minutes; DVCPRO50 and AVC-Intra 50: approximately ten minutes;
DVCPRO or for DV: approximately 20 minutes), or when a one-time recording extends over more than one P2 card, the recording concerned
will automatically be recorded as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will be provided with its own [COUNT] value.
r Example of recording ([DVCPROHD]) a clip on a single P2 card
Start recording
Recording pause
Recording duration = Approx. 7 min.
Clip 1
Clip 2
[COUNT] value
= 0001
[COUNT] value
= 0002
Approx. 5 min.
Approx. 2 min.
– 112 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
r Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards
Start recording
Recording pause
Clip 1
Clip 2
[COUNT] value
= 0003
[COUNT] value
= 0004
1st card
2nd card
When the thumbnail and property of a clip recorded like the example above is displayed using a P2 device, the thumbnail and [COUNT] value of clip 1
will be displayed.
Initializing the metadata setting
Select [META DATA] → [INITIALIZE] from the thumbnail menu, and press the <SET> button. Select [YES] when the confirmation screen is displayed.
The settings under [META DATA] in the thumbnail menu, including uploaded metadata, can be initialized.
Formatting a P2 card
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
When the following screen appears, select [YES] using the
cursor buttons and the <SET> button.
1
3
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
The selected P2 card is formatted.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [FORMAT] from the thumbnail menu.
2
f When the following screen appears, select the slot number of the P2
card to be formatted and press the <SET> button.
f Select [EXIT] when you do not wish to format the card.
NOTE
@@
t Since data that is deleted by formatting cannot be restored, be
sure to check the data before executing formatting.
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the camera, perform the following operation.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
When the following screen appears, use the cursor buttons
and the <SET> button to select [YES].
1
3
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
The SD memory card is formatted.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [FORMAT] from the thumbnail menu.
2
f When the following screen appears, select [SD CARD] and press
the <SET> button.
f Select [EXIT] when you do not wish to format the card.
NOTE
@@
t SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu screen.
t Since data that is deleted by formatting cannot be restored, be
sure to check the data before executing formatting.
Setting the thumbnail display
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit your preferences.
– 113 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[THUMBNAIL] → [SETUP] from the thumbnail menu.
2
The following screen is displayed.
[INDICATOR]
Select which indicators you want to show on thumbnails and which you want to hide.
[ALL HIDE]
[ON]
Hides all indicators, [MARKER], [TEXT MEMO], [WIDE], and [PROXY].
[OFF] According to the following menu, sets show or hide. This setting is the factory setting.
Switches the shot mark indicator between show and hide (on/off). The factory setting is on.
[MARKER]
[TEXT MEMO] Switches the text memo indicator between show and hide (on/off). The factory setting is on.
[WIDE]
Switches the wide indicator between show and hide (on/off). The factory setting is on.
Switches the proxy indicator between show and hide (on/off). The factory setting is on.
[PROXY]
[DATA DISPLAY]
[DATE FORMAT]
Select the time display field of the clip from the time code [TC]/user bits [UB]/shooting time [TIME]/shooting date [DATE]/shooting
date and time [DATE TIME]/clip name [CLIP NAME]/user clip name [USER CLIP NAME]. The factory setting is the time code.
Select display order for recording date and time from Y-M-D (Year-Month-Day), M-D-Y (Month-Day-Year), or D-M-Y (Day-Month-
Year). The factory setting may vary depending on the region. (AG-HPX600P: M-D-Y, AG-HPX600EJ: D-M-Y, AG-HPX600EN:
D-M-Y)
This setting is reflected in the recording date and time shown in the clip property and the shooting date and time shown when
[DATE] is selected under the item [DATA DISPLAY].
[THUMBNAIL SIZE]
Select the thumbnail displayed on the screen from either [LARGE] (displaying thumbnail in 3×2) or [NORMAL] (displaying
thumbnail in 4×3). This item is set to [NORMAL] in the factory settings.
[PLAYBACK RESUME]
Select a position to restart playback after stopping playback on the thumbnail screen using the <STOP> button.
[ON]
Playback starts from the stop position.
[OFF]
Playback starts from the beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer.
If the pointer is moved after stopping playback, playback will restart from the beginning of the clip where the pointer is placed
regardless of the setting of the [PLAYBACK RESUME] item. Also, attempting to play back from the end of all the available clips
will cause the screen to flash momentarily, indicating that there are no more clips which can be played back.
[THUMBNAIL INIT]
[EXIT]
Return the above thumbnail display settings to the factory settings. Move the cursor to the [THUMBNAIL INIT] item, and press
the <SET> button. Select [YES] when the confirmation screen is displayed.
Return to the previous menu.
Properties
Clip properties and P2 card status are displayed.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed.
Clip properties
Select [PROPERTY] → [CLIP PROPERTY] from the thumbnail menu. The following screen appears.
3
1
2
5
4
1
Clip number
3
Clip information
Displays the indicators added to the clip and the number of text and
voice memos added to the clip.
NOTE
@@
t For clips that cannot be played back, the number is displayed
in red.
t When the [EVF TYPE] item on the setting menu [DISPLAY
The [ ] mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-protected P2
card.
SETUP] screen is set to [B/W], the [
indicator is displayed.
] Not playable clip
2
Thumbnail
– 114 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
NOTE
[DURATION]
[V_FORMAT]
Displays the time length of the clip.
Displays recording format of the clip.
@@
t The camera is not capable of recording or playing back voice
[FRAME RATE] Displays the frame rate for playback.
memos.
[REC RATE]
Displays the recording frame rate. (Only displayed
when using the variable frame rate recording function
to record in native mode.)
4
Clip information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
[CLIP NAME]
[START TC]
Displays clip names.
5
Clip metadata
Displays the time code value at the start of the
recording.
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Move the pointer using
the cursor buttons, and press the <SET> button to check the detailed
content.
[START UB]
[DATE]
Displays the user bit value at the start of the recording.
Displays the date of the recording.
[TIME]
Displays the time at the start of recording.
Modifying recorded clip metadata
Display the metadata details window for the clip to be
modified on the clip properties screen.
1
Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the cursor
buttons.
2
The metadata that can be modified is shown like [CREATOR] in the
following figure.
Press the [OK] button on the keyboard.
4
The modified metadata is written on the clip and the screen returns to
the metadata details window.
NOTE
@@
t To delete each item in [LOCATION] (shooting location data)
of [SHOOT], the item cannot be deleted alone. By setting the
[ALTITUDE] item to empty, other [LONGITUDE] and [LATITUDE]
items are collectively deleted.
t The metadata for a clip with the [ ] incomplete clip indicator
cannot be modified. For the clips recorded on multiple P2 cards,
modify the metadata while all P2 cards are inserted.
t Any [MEMO] with 101 characters or more cannot be modified.
Press the <SET> button.
3
f The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying metadata is
displayed.
f Input characters from the keyboard to modify the metadata.
P2 card status display
r P2 card status display settings
For the P2 card status displayed by selecting [PROPERTY] → [CARD STATUS] from the thumbnail menu, you can select whether to display the status
with P2 card remaining capacity or used memory capacity.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
[REMAIN]
[USED]
Displays remaining capacity on the P2 card as the
P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
Displays used memory capacity on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display.
Select [PROPERTY] → [PROPERTY SETUP] → [P2 CARD
CAP] from the thumbnail menu.
2
When the following screen appears, select the P2 card status display
setting from the [P2 CARD CAP] item.
– 115 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips — Thumbnail operations
Contents of P2 card status display settings
Select [PROPERTY] → [CARD STATUS] from the thumbnail menu. The following screen appears.
r When [REMAIN] is selected r When [USED] is selected
1
2
1
2
3
3
5
4
5
4
1
Write-protect mark
1
Write-protect mark
The [ ] mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
The [ ] mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2
P2 card status (used memory capacity)
2
P2 card status (remaining capacity)
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is shown as a bar graph
and percentage. The bar graph indicator moves to the right as the
used memory capacity increases.
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is shown as a bar
graph and percentage. The bar graph indicator moves to the left as
the remaining capacity decreases.
The following displays may appear, depending on the card status.
The following displays may appear, depending on the card status.
[FORMAT ERROR!]
[NOT SUPPORTED!]
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
[FORMAT ERROR!]
[NOT SUPPORTED!]
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
An unsupported card is inserted on the
camera.
An unsupported card is inserted in the
camera.
[NO CARD]
No P2 card is inserted.
[NO CARD]
No P2 card is inserted.
Use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on the P2 card for data
to be accessed and press the <SET> button to display detailed
information about the P2 card to check specific information such as
the serial number and the user ID.
Use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on the P2 card for data
to be accessed and press the <SET> button to display detailed
information about the P2 card to check specific information such as
the serial number and the user ID.
3
P2 card used memory capacity/total capacity
Displays the P2 card used memory capacity and total capacity. The
units are minutes. Because only the figures in minutes are displayed,
the total used memory capacity for each P2 card may not match the
total memory capacity.
3
P2 card remaining capacity/total capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total capacity. The units
are minutes. Because only the figures in minutes are displayed, the
total remaining memory capacity for each P2 card may not match the
total remaining memory capacity.
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card is displayed
as 100%.
4
Total remaining capacity for the slot
Displays the total remaining capacity for all two slots.
However, the remaining capacity of a write-protected P2 card is not
included in the total available space.
4
Total used memory capacity for all slots
Displays the total used memory capacity for all two slots.
5
Warning mark
5
Warning mark
When the following P2 cards are detected, the [ ] mark is displayed.
When the following P2 cards are detected, the [ ] mark is displayed.
[RUN DOWN CARD]
The maximum number of overwrites on the
P2 card has been exceeded.
[RUN DOWN CARD]
The maximum number of overwrites on the
P2 card has been exceeded.
[DIR ENTRY NG CARD] The directory structure on the P2 card is not
[DIR ENTRY NG CARD] The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
supported.
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed information
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed information
SD memory card status display
The status display enables confirmation of the SD memory card format condition, available memory space, etc.
Select [PROPERTY] → [DEVICES] → [SD CARD] from the thumbnail menu.
[SD STANDARD]
Indicates whether an SD memory card is formatted according to the SD/SDHC standard.
f [SUPPORTED]: Complies with SD/SDHC
f [NOT SUPPORTED]: Does not comply with SD/SDHC
[USED]
Used capacity (bytes)
[BLANK]
Available space (bytes)
[TOTAL]
Total capacity (bytes)
[PROXY REM]
[NUMBER OF CLIP]
[PROTECT]
Remaining capacity in proxy recording (displayed only when the video encoder board is installed)
The number of clips on an SD memory card when clips have been copied to an SD memory card
Write protected
– 116 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Displaying the setting menu on the viewfinder screen
Displaying the setting menu on the viewfinder screen
Setting menu basic operations
You can change camera settings using the setting menu according to the shooting scene and recording details.
f When the thumbnail setting menu is displayed, press the <THUMBNAIL> button to close the menu.
f Setting menu items displayed in blue characters are not available.
a b
a: Jog dial button
b: <MENU> button
Press the <MENU> button when not recording.
With the jog dial button, move the highlight to the item to be
set.
1
4
f Keep pressing the <MENU> button for approximately one second.
f The setting menu screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
SW MODE
MAIN MENU
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
1.SCENE FILE
12dB
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
OFF
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
3.2K
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.IN/OUT SEL
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
TEXT MEMO
USER2
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
Press the jog dial button to set the item.
5
With the jog dial button, move the highlight to the function
to be set.
2
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
MAIN MENU
6dB
12dB
OFF
1.SCENE FILE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
3.2K
5.6K
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.IN/OUT SEL
VAR
BACGHT
USER2
TEXT MEMO
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
6
7
To exit the settings, press the <MENU> button to return to the setting
menu screen.
Press the jog dial button to display the item to set.
3
SW MODE
Press the <MENU> button to close the function setting menu and
return to the normal screen.
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
NOTE
12dB
@@
OFF
t Menu direct close function
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
3.2K
After setting the menu, press and hold the <MENU> button to
directly close the setting menu screen.
t Changing setting values quickly (only for [MASTER PED] and [H
PHASE])
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
TEXT MEMO
USER2
- Fast up
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Press and turn up the jog dial button, and keep pressing it at the
position.
– 118 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Displaying the setting menu on the viewfinder screen
- Fast down
Press and turn down the jog dial button, and keep pressing it at
the position.
Initializing the setting menu items
Set items are saved divided into user files and scene files. Both of the files can be initialized to the factory settings.
Initializing user files (all setting items other than scene files)
By selecting [INITIAL] in the [USER FILE] item of the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen, you can restore the current user file menu setting to its factory
setting.
Initializing [SCENE FILE]
Among six scene files, select the scene file to be initialized from the [CAM02:SCENE FILE] screen of SmartUI. Then by selecting [INITIAL] on the
[LOAD/SAVE/INIT] item of the [SCENE FILE] screen, you can restore the setting value of the selected scene file to its factory setting.
f Scene files other than the current scene file number are not affected.
Initializing user files and scene files concurrently
By selecting [YES] in the [MENU INIT] item of the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen, you can restore the user files and all six scene files to their factory
settings.
– 119 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Setting menu structure
Setting menu structure
The setting menu structure list indicates restrictions as follows.
(OP1)
(OP2)
(OP3)
(OP4)
Available when the video encoder board AG-YDX600G (extra-cost option) is mounted.
Available when the HD/SD SDI input board AG-YA600G (extra-cost option) is mounted.
Available when the upgrade software key AG-SFU601G (network function (extra-cost option)) is installed.
Available when the upgrade software key AG-SFU602G (production package (extra-cost option)) is installed.
When any of those options are not introduced, the corresponding items in the menu are grayed out and cannot be selected.
0$,1ꢀ0(18
6&(1(ꢀ),/(
/2$'ꢁ6$9(ꢁ,1,7
9)5ꢀꢂ23ꢇꢄ
)5$0(ꢀ5$7(ꢀꢂ23ꢇꢄ
6<1&ꢀ6&$1ꢀ7<3(
6<1&+52ꢀ6&$1
'(7$,/ꢀ/(9(/
9ꢀ'(7$,/ꢀ/(9(/
'(7$,/ꢀ&25,1*
&+520$ꢀ/(9(/
&+520$ꢀ3+$6(
&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ$FK
&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ%FK
0$67(5ꢀ3('
$ꢅ,5,6ꢀ/(9(/
'56ꢀ())(&7
*$00$
6<67(0ꢀ6(783
6<67(0ꢀ02'(
5(&ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀꢂ23ꢃꢄ
5(&ꢀ)250$7
&$0(5$ꢀ02'(
6&$1ꢀ5(9(56(
$63(&7ꢀ&219
6(783
6:ꢀ02'(
/2:ꢀ*$,1
0,'ꢀ*$,1
+,*+ꢀ*$,1
$7:
:ꢅ%$/ꢅ35(6(7
86(5ꢀ0$,1
86(5ꢆ
.1((
86(5ꢃ
0$75,;
5(7ꢀ6:
:)0
$872ꢀ.1((ꢀ6:
6.,1ꢀ721(ꢀ'7/
9ꢀ'(7$,/ꢀ)5(4
1$0(ꢀ(',7
5(&25',1*ꢀ6(783
5(&ꢀ)81&7,21
21(ꢀ6+27ꢀ7,0(
,17(59$/ꢀ7,0(
67$57ꢀ'(/$<
35(5(&ꢀ02'(
21(ꢀ&/,3ꢀ5(&
67$57ꢀ7(;7ꢀ0(02
7&ꢀ02'(
8%ꢀ02'(
$8',2ꢀ6(783
,1ꢁ287ꢀ6(/
)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢆ
)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢃ
)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢈ
)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢇ
0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢆ
0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢃ
0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢈ
0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢇ
/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢆ
6',ꢀ287
6',ꢀ287ꢀ&+$5
6',ꢀ0(7$'$7$
6',ꢀ('+
+'ꢀ6',ꢀ5(027(
$872ꢀ5(&ꢀꢂ23ꢃꢄ
021ꢁ+'0,ꢀ=(%5$
7&ꢀ,1ꢁ287ꢀ6(/
7&ꢀ287
/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢃ
/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢈ
/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢇ
7&ꢀ9,'(2ꢀ6<1&
ꢃꢉ0ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢀ6(/
7(67ꢀ721(
)ꢅ0,&ꢀ32:(5
)ꢅ0,&ꢀ/(9(/
5ꢅ0,&ꢀ&+ꢆꢀ/(9(/
5ꢅ0,&ꢀ&+ꢃꢀ/(9(/
+($'5220
:,5(/(66ꢀ:$51
:,5(/(66ꢀ7<3(
&RQWLQXHGꢀRQꢀQH[WꢀSDJH
– 120 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Setting menu structure
',63/$<ꢀ6(783
%$77(5<ꢀ6(783
(9)ꢀ3($.ꢀ/(9(/
(9)ꢀ3($.ꢀ)5(4
(9)ꢀ7<3(
(;7ꢀ'&ꢀ,1ꢀ6(/
%$77(5<ꢀ6(/(&7
%$77(5<ꢀ02'(
+<7521ꢉꢊꢀ1($5
+<7521ꢂꢋꢊꢀ1($5
',21,&ꢀ+&ꢀ1($5
',21,&ꢌꢊꢀ1($5
',21,&ꢂꢍꢊꢀ1($5
(1'85$ꢎꢀ1($5
(1'85$ꢂꢊꢀ1($5
3$*ꢀ/ꢌꢍHꢀ1($5
7<3(ꢀ$ꢀ)8//
(9)ꢀ&2/25
=(%5$ꢂꢀ'(7(&7
=(%5$ꢈꢀ'(7(&7
=(%5$ꢈ
0$5.(5
6$)(7<ꢀ=21(
)2&86ꢀ%$5
'$7(ꢆ7,0(
/(9(/ꢀ0(7(5
=220ꢆ)2&86
&$5'ꢆ%$77
3ꢈ&$5'ꢀ5(0$,1
27+(5ꢀ',63/$<
0(18ꢀ%$&.
7<3(ꢀ$ꢀ1($5
7<3(ꢀ$ꢀ(1'
7<3(ꢀ%ꢀ)8//
7<3(ꢀ%ꢀ1($5
5(&ꢀ&2817(5
7<3(ꢀ%ꢀ(1'
1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ&$1&(/
&$5'ꢀ)81&7,216
6&(1(ꢀ),/(
86(5ꢀ),/(
6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ)250$7
/(16ꢀ6(783
6+$',1*ꢀ6(/(&7
6+$',1*ꢀꢁ86(5ꢃ
&$&
&$&ꢀ3523(57<
&$&ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'
&$&ꢀ),/(ꢀ'(/(7(
&$&ꢀ),/(ꢀ,1,7
,5,6ꢀ*$,1
352;<ꢀ6(77,1*
5(&ꢀ0(',$ꢀꢁ23ꢂꢃ
5(&ꢀ02'(ꢇꢀꢁ23ꢂꢃ
7&ꢀ683(5ꢀꢁ23ꢄꢃ
675($0,1*ꢀ02'(ꢀꢁ23ꢂꢃ,
ꢁ23ꢄꢃ
,5,6ꢀ*$,1ꢀ9$/8(
,5,6ꢀ$'-867
)%ꢀ$'-867
3&ꢆ86%ꢆ/$1
3&ꢀ02'(ꢀ6(/
3&ꢀ02'(
1(7:25.ꢀ6(/ꢀꢁ23ꢄꢃ
3ꢈꢀ%52:6(ꢀꢁ23ꢄꢃ
27+(5ꢀ)81&7,216
86(5ꢀ),/(
$&&(66ꢀ/('
5(&ꢀ7$//<
&/2&.ꢀ6(77,1*
7,0(ꢀ=21(
*/ꢀ3+$6(
+ꢀ3+$6(
6((.ꢀ6(/(&7
0(18ꢀ,1,7
',$*1267,&
9(56,21
237,21ꢀ67$786
02'(/ꢀ1$0(
6(5,$/ꢀ12ꢅ
23(5$7,21
* For [REC MODE], [REC MODE (1080)], [REC MODE (720)], or [REC MODE (SD)] is displayed when the system mode is 1080 mode, 720 mode, or SD mode,
respectively.
– 121 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Menu list
[SCENE FILE] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
Loads, saves, or initializes the setting value of the scene file assigned to the
current scene file number (one number among F1 to F6).
f This setting change does not affect the scene files
other than the current scene file number.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[LOAD]
[SAVE]
Loads data saved in the built-in memory of the camera.
Saves the current value in the built-in memory of the camera.
Returns to the factory settings.
[INITIAL]
VFR (OP4)
Sets whether to allow variable frame rate (VFR).
f This setting is not displayed when [SYSTEM
MODE] is [480i], [576i], and [1080-23.98PsF].
[ON]
Activates the variable frame rate.
f This setting is not available when [SYSTEM
MODE] is [1080i] and an item other than [60i] and
[50i] is selected at [CAMERA MODE].
[OFF]
Does not activate the variable frame rate.
FRAME RATE (OP4)
Selects shooting interval and exposure time when the [VFR] item is [ON] in [1080i]
and [720P].
f This setting is not available when [REC SIGNAL]
[1080-59.94i]
Variable from [1] up to [30] frames (17 steps)
[1], [2], [4], [6], [9], [12], [15], [18], [20], [21], [22], [24], [25], [26],
[27], [28], [30]
is [SDI IN].
f The screen may be disturbed momentarily when
switched to 24 frames.
[1080-50i]
Variable from [1] up to [25] frames (14 steps)
f This item can also be set on the [CAM03:SETUP]
[1], [2], [4], [6], [9], [12], [15], [18], [20], [21], [22], [23], [24], [25]
screen of SmartUI
[720-59.94P]
Variable from [1] up to [60] frames (25 steps)
[1], [2], [4], [6], [9], [12], [15], [18], [20], [21], [22], [24], [25], [26],
[27], [28], [30], [32], [34], [36], [40], [44], [48], [54], [60]
[720-50P]
Variable from [1] up to [50] frames (25 steps)
[1], [2], [4], [6], [9], [12], [15], [18], [20], [21], [22], [23], [24], [25],
[26], [27], [28], [30], [32], [34], [37], [42], [45], [48], [50]
SYNC SCAN TYPE
SYNCHRO SCAN
Selects the synchro scan display setting.
[sec], [deg]
Displays the synchro scan shutter speed used for TV screen shooting.
Continuous pressing of the jog dial button turned up or down will accelerate the
r When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] is [sec]
[60i], [60P]
[30P]
[1/60.0] to [1/249.8] seconds
[1/30.0] to [1/249.8] seconds
[1/24.0] to [1/249.8] seconds
[1/50.0] to [1/250.0] seconds
[1/25.0] to [1/250.0] seconds
[24P]
[50i], [50P]
[25P]
r When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] is [deg]
When the [VFR] item is [OFF]
Can be set with [3d] to [360d], and [0.5d] steps.
When the [VFR] item is [ON] (OP4)
Setting of the [FRAME RATE] item is more than 12P
Can be set with [3d] to [360d], and [0.5d] steps.
Setting of the [FRAME RATE] item is less than 12P
Can be set with [3d] to [22.5d], and [0.5d] steps.
[45d], [90d], [180d], [360d]
DETAIL LEVEL
Adjusts the level of the image outline correction (in the horizontal and vertical
directions).
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
Adjusts the level of outline correction in the vertical direction.
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
Adjusts the level of noise reduction of the detail signal.
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
f Setting in the − direction results in a clearer image, but increases noise slightly.
f Setting in the + direction reduces noise.
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
Adjusts the chroma level.
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
Makes fine adjustments to the chroma phase.
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after white balance Ach
adjustment).
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
COLOR TEMP Bch
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after white balance Bch
adjustment).
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
indicates the factory setting value of scene file number F1.
– 122 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
MASTER PED
Adjusts the master pedestal (black level of the image) as the basis for images.
[−100] ... [+12] ... [+100]
f Press and turn up or down the jog dial button,
and keep pressing it at the position to change the
value faster.
f When the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) or the
extension control unit (AG-EC4G) is connected,
make adjustments with the M-PED volume of the
remote control unit or the extension control unit.
A. IRIS LEVEL
DRS EFFECT
Sets the desired auto iris level.
[−10] ... [0] ... [+10]
Sets the compression level for the high-brightness areas of the dynamic range
stretcher function.
It enables the dynamic range to be expanded by compressing the level of the
video signals in the high-brightness areas where overexposure results during
normal shooting.
f When 1080i and progressive mode are set, the
dynamic range stretcher function is not activated
even if [DRS EFFECT] is set.
f Set the [AUTO KNEE SW] item on the [SW
MODE] screen is set to [DRS] and push the
<OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch
towards the <ON> side to activate the dynamic
range stretcher function.
[1], [2], [3]
f The higher the value of the setting, the higher the compression level of the high-
brightness areas and the level of noise in dark areas.
GAMMA
Selects the gamma curve.
f While the dynamic range stretcher function is
activated and when the [CAMERA] item is set to
[CINE-LIKE], images are not changed even if the
setting is changed.
[HD NORM]
[LOW]
Suitable for HD shooting.
Makes a mellow image using a gamma curve that has a gentle
incline in low-brightness curve. The contrast sharpens.
[SD NORM]
[HIGH]
This is the normal video setting carried over from the DVX100
series.
Expands the tone of dark parts and makes a brighter image
using a gamma curve that has a sharp incline in low-brightness
curve. The contrast softens.
[B.PRESS]
Makes the contrast sharper than [LOW].
[CINELIKE D]
[CINELIKE V]
Uses a gamma curve designed to create cinema-like images.
Uses a gamma curve designed to create cinema-like images
with emphasized contrast.
f When you select [CINE-LIKE] gamma, we recommend setting the lens aperture
lower than normal image level (approximately 1/2) for optimal results.
KNEE
To avoid overexposure, select the compression level (knee point) of the high
intensity video signals received through the MOS sensor.
f While the dynamic range stretcher function is
activated, images do not change when the setting
is changed.
[HIGH]
[MID]
High setting (Compression starts at approx. 100%)
Medium setting (Compression starts at approx. 90%)
Low setting (Compression starts at approx. 80%)
f To set the knee point automatically according
to the signals received, use the <AUTO KNEE>
switch.
[LOW]
MATRIX
Selects the matrix table suitable for the desired color expression during shooting.
[NORM1]
[NORM2]
[FLUO]
Suitable for shooting in the open air or under a halogen lamp.
Suitable for brighter colors than the [NORM1] mode.
Suitable for shooting under fluorescent lights indoors.
Suitable for shooting cinema-like images.
[CINE-LIKE]
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
Switches skin tone details [ON]/[OFF].
Select [ON] to reduce the skin tone details and soften the skin tone.
[ON], [OFF]
Sets the vertical detail.
[THIN]
[MID]
Makes the detail thin.
Makes the detail slightly thick.
Makes the detail thick.
[THICK]
f When images shot with the [THIN] or [MID] setting in progressive mode are
played back on a usual TV monitor (60i: interlaced), you will sense flicker on
horizontal lines and nearly-horizontal diagonal lines. When playing back in
progressive environment, or performing post-processing such as edit, set this
item to [THIN] or [MID] to obtain images with higher resolution than the images
of [THICK] setting.
NAME EDIT
Edits the name of the scene file selected on the [CAM02:SCENE FILE] screen of
SmartUI.
indicates the factory setting value of scene file number F1.
– 123 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen
Item
Remark
SYSTEM MODE
Sets the signal format of the camera.
f This setting is not available in USB device mode.
[1080-59.94i], [1080-23.98PsF] (OP4), [1080-50i], [720-59.94P], [720-50P],
[480-59.94i], [576-50i]
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
f [TURN POWER OFF] is displayed when the setting is changed. Turn off the
power of the camera once, and turn it on again.
f The factory settings may differ depending on the
region.
(AG-HPX600P: [1080-59.94i], AG-HPX600EJ:
[1080-50i], AG-HPX600EN: [1080-50i])
f When OP4 is not installed
The [1080-23.98PsF] setting item is grayed out
and cannot be selected.
REC SIGNAL (OP2)
Selects the input signal. The [SDI IN] item can be selected when the HD/SD SDI
input board (extra-cost option) is installed.
f This item is not displayed when [SYSTEM MODE]
is [1080-23.98PsF].
f When [SDI IN] is selected, images are recorded
with 60i or 50i regardless of the [REC FORMAT]
setting.
[CAMERA]
[SDI IN]
Records camera shooting signals of the camera.
Records input signals to <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
f It is always set to [CAMERA] when the power is turned on.
REC FORMAT
Selects the recording codec, and shooting and recording modes.
f When [REC SIGNAL] is [SDI IN], recording is
performed in a normal mode (60i or 60P) even if
the native recording is selected.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [1080-59.94i]
[AVC-I100/60i],
Recorded using the AVC-I 100 codec. 60i, 30PN (native
f This setting is not available in USB device mode.
[AVC-I100/30PN], recording), and 24PN (native recording) are used for shooting
[AVC-I100/24PN] and recording, respectively.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[AVC-I50/60i],
Recorded using the AVC-I 50 codec. 60i, 30PN (native
[AVC-I50/30PN], recording), and 24PN (native recording) are used for shooting
[AVC-I50/24PN] and recording, respectively.
[DVCPROHD/60i] Recorded using the DVCPRO HD codec. Shooting mode can
be set at the [CAMERA MODE] item. Recording is fixed to 60i.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [720-59.94P]
[AVC-I100/60P],
Recorded using the AVC-I 100 codec. 60i, 30PN (native
[AVC-I100/30PN], recording), and 24PN (native recording) are used for shooting
[AVC-I100/24PN] and recording, respectively.
[AVC-I50/60P],
Recorded using the AVC-I 50 codec. 60i, 30PN (native
[AVC-I50/30PN], recording), and 24PN (native recording) are used for shooting
[AVC-I50/24PN] and recording, respectively.
[DVCPROHD/60P],
Recorded using the DVCPRO HD codec. 60P, 30PN (native
[DVCPROHD/30PN], recording), and 24PN (native recording) are used for shooting
[DVCPROHD/24PN] and recording, respectively.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [480-59.94i]
[DVCPRO50/60i], Recorded using the DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV codec,
[DVCPRO/60i],
[DV/60i]
respectively. Shooting mode can be set with the [CAMERA
MODE] item. Recording is fixed to 60i.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [1080-23.98PsF] (*OP4)
[AVC-I100/24PN] Recorded using the AVC-I 100 codec. 24PN (native recording)
is used for shooting and recording.
[AVC-I50/24PN] Recorded using the AVC-I 50 codec. 24PN (native recording) is
used for shooting and recording.
REC FORMAT
f When [REC SIGNAL] is [SDI IN], recording is
performed in a normal mode (50i or 50P) even if
the native recording is selected.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [1080-50i]
[AVC-I100/50i],
[AVC-I100/25PN] recording) are used for shooting and recording, respectively.
[AVC-I50/50i], Recorded using the AVC-I 50 codec. 50i and 25PN (native
Recorded using the AVC-I 100 codec. 50i and 25PN (native
f This setting is not available in USB device mode.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[AVC-I50/25PN] recording) are used for shooting and recording, respectively.
[DVCPROHD/50i] Recorded using the DVCPRO HD codec. Shooting mode can
be set with the [CAMERA MODE] item. Recording is fixed to
50i.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [720-50P]
[AVC-I100/50P], Recorded using the AVC-I 100 codec. 50P and 25PN (native
[AVC-I100/25PN] recording) are used for shooting and recording, respectively.
[AVC-I50/50P], Recorded using the AVC-I 50 codec. 50P and 25PN (native
[AVC-I50/25PN] recording) are used for shooting and recording, respectively.
[DVCPROHD/50P], Recorded using the DVCPRO HD codec. 50P and 25PN (native
[DVCPROHD/25PN] recording) are used for shooting and recording, respectively.
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [576-50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i], Recorded using the DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV codec,
[DVCPRO/50i],
[DV/50i]
respectively. Shooting mode can be set with the [CAMERA
MODE] item. Recording is fixed to 50i.
indicates factory setting values.
– 124 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
CAMERA MODE
Sets the camera shooting mode when set to [1080-59.94i], [480-59.94i],
[1080-50i], and [576-50i].
f Displayed only when the [SYSTEM MODE] item
is set to [1080-59.94i], [1080-50i], [480-59.94i], or
[576-50i].
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [1080-59.94i] or [480-59.94i]
- The [REC SIGNAL] item is set to [SDI IN].
- The [SYSTEM MODE] item is set to
[1080-59.94i], and the [REC FORMAT] item is
set to other than [DVCPROHD/60i].
- [SYSTEM MODE] is set to [1080-50i], and
the [REC FORMAT] item is set to other than
[DVCPROHD/50i].
[60i], [30P], [24P], [24PA]
r When [SYSTEM MODE] is [1080-50i] or [576-50i]
[50i], [25P]
- Clip connection is underway with one-clip
recording.
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
Compensates image inversion that occurs when a lens for filming or anamorphic
lens is mounted.
[ON], [OFF]
Selects aspect ratio for images recorded with 480i or 576i.
f This setting is not available when the [SYSTEM
MODE] item is [1080-59.94i], [1080-23.98PsF],
[1080-50i], [720-59.94P], or [720-50P].
[SIDE CROP]
Side-crop mode (Crops the left and right edges.)
[LETTER BOX] Letterbox mode (Adds black bands at the top and bottom of the
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
image.)
[SQUEEZE]
Squeeze mode (Squeezes images horizontally.)
SETUP
Sets the setup level of video signals for 480i.
f This item is not displayed when the [SYSTEM
MODE] item is set to [1080-50i], [720-50P], or
[576-50i].
[0%]
Composite output and recording setup levels will both be set
to 0%.
[7.5%A]
Composite output setup level will be set to 7.5%, while
recording setup level will be set to 0%.
indicates factory setting values.
[SW MODE] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
Sets the gain value assigned to the L position of the <GAIN> switch.
[−3dB], [0dB], [3dB], [6dB], [9dB], [12dB]
Sets the gain value assigned to the M position of the <GAIN> switch.
[−3dB], [0dB], [3dB], [6dB], [9dB], [12dB]
Sets the gain value assigned to the H position of the <GAIN> switch.
[−3dB], [0dB], [3dB], [6dB], [9dB], [12dB]
Assigns the auto tracking white balance function to the <WHITE BAL> switch.
f When the <WHITE BAL> switch is set to the
<B> position and this menu is set to [Bch],
pressing the <USER> buttons (<USER
MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to which the auto
tracking white balance function is assigned
does not turn off the auto tracking white balance
function.
[Bch]
Activates the auto tracking white balance function when the
<WHITE BAL> switch is set to the <B> position.
[OFF]
Does not assign the auto tracking white balance function to the
<WHITE BAL> switch.
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
Sets the color temperature assigned to the <PRST> position of the <WHITE BAL> f The color temperature when [VAR] is selected is
switch.
set at the [CAM03:SETUP] screen of SmartUI.
Each time the <AUTO W/B BAL> switch is pushed towards the <AWB> side,
color temperature can be switched to 3200 K, 5600 K, and user-specified variable
value.
[3.2K], [5.6K], [VAR]
[SPOT LIGHT], [BACK LIGHT], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [GAIN:18dB],
[D.ZOOMX2], [D.ZOOMX4], [FBC], [Y GET], [WFM], [PRE REC], [REC
REVIEW], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [SLOT SEL], [A.MONI SEL], [PC
MODE], [INHIBIT]
f [SPOT LIGHT] and [BACK LIGHT] functions
do not work when the remote control unit
(AJ-RC10G) or the extension control unit
(AG-EC4G) is connected.
f When the dynamic range stretcher function is
activated, the digital zoom function is disabled.
USER1
USER2
RET SW
Sets the function assigned to the <USER1> button.
The setting contents are the same as [USER MAIN].
[BACK LIGHT] (page 60)
Sets the function assigned to the <USER2> button.
The setting contents are the same as [USER MAIN].
[TEXT MEMO] (page 60)
Sets the function assigned to the <RET> button of lens.
[PUSH AF], [D.ZOOMX2], [D.ZOOMX4], [REC REVIEW], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT
MARK], [INHIBIT]
f When an auto-focus compatible lens is not
attached, the operation is disabled even if [PUSH
AF] is selected.
f The function assigned to the <RET> button does not work when [INHIBIT] is
selected.
indicates factory setting values.
– 125 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
WFM
Selects the type of waveform to be displayed on the viewfinder screen when the
<USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to which the waveform
monitor function is assigned is pressed.
[WAVE]
Displays as a waveform.
Displays as a vector.
[VECTOR]
[WAVE/VECT]
Changes display in order of [OFF] → [WAVE] → [VECTOR] →
[OFF] each time the button is pressed.
AUTO KNEE SW
Selects the function for the <OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch.
f When 1080i and progressive mode are set, the
dynamic range stretcher function is not activated
even if [DRS] is selected, and the auto knee
function activated when [ON] is selected operates.
[DRS]
Activates the dynamic range stretcher function when the
[ON]
Activates the auto knee function when the <AUTO KNEE>
selector switch is set to <ON>.
f When the dynamic range stretcher function is
activated, the digital zoom function is disabled.
[OFF]
Does not activate the auto knee function when the <AUTO
KNEE> selector switch is set to <ON>.
indicates factory setting values.
[RECORDING SETUP] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
REC FUNCTION
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
- The [REC SIGNAL] item is set to [SDI IN].
- Native recording is set with the [REC FORMAT]
item.
- The [SYSTEM MODE] item is set to
[1080-59.94i] or [480-59.94i], and the [CAMERA
MODE] item is set to [24P] or [24PA].
- Clip connection is underway with one-clip
recording.
[NORMAL]
[INTERVAL]
[ONE SHOT]
[LOOP]
Does not perform special recording.
Sets interval recording.
Sets one-shot recording.
Sets loop recording.
f It is always set to [NORMAL] when the power is turned on.
- The [VFR] item is set to [ON].
ONE SHOT TIME
INTERVAL TIME
[1frm], [2frm], [4frm], [8frm], [16frm], [1s]
f This setting is available only when the [REC
FUNCTION] item is set to [ONE SHOT].
[2frm], [4frm], [8frm], [16frm], [1s], [2s], [5s], [10s], [30s], [1min], [5min],
[10min]
f This setting is available only when the [REC
FUNCTION] item is set to [INTERVAL].
START DELAY
Delays the start of interval recording and one-shot recording approximately one
second.
[ON], [OFF]
f This setting is available only when the [REC
FUNCTION] item is set to [INTERVAL] or [ONE
SHOT].
PREREC MODE
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
[ON], [OFF]
- The [REC SIGNAL] item is [SDI IN].
- The [VFR] item is set to [ON].
Excluding the case when the frame rate and
the number of frames of recording playback are
matched (30P:30PN, 25P:25PN, 24P:24PN)
- The [REC FUNCTION] item is set to other than
[NORMAL].
ONE CLIP REC
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
[ON], [OFF]
- The [REC FUNCTION] item is other than
[NORMAL].
- The [REC SIGNAL] item is [SDI IN].
- The [VFR] item is [ON].
Excluding the case when the frame rate and
the number of frames of recording playback are
matched (30P:30PN, 25P:25PN, 24P:24PN)
START TEXT MEMO
Sets the function that automatically adds a text memo at recording start position
f This setting is not available when the [REC
each time recording is started.
FUNCTION] item is other than [NORMAL].
[ON], [OFF]
f Text memos added when the [START TEXT
MEMO] item is [ON] indicate recording start
position.
To record text memos as character information,
TC MODE
UB MODE
Sets count compensation for the built-in time code generator of the camera.
f This setting is not available when activating in
[24P], [24PA], or [24PN]. Counting is always
performed in the non-drop frame mode.
[DF]
Counts in drop frame mode.
[NDF]
Counts in non-drop frame mode.
[USER], [TIME], [DATE], [EXT], [TCG], [FRM.RATE]
indicates factory setting values.
– 126 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
[AUDIO SETUP] screen
Item
Remark
FRONT VR CH1
Sets whether to enable or disable front volume for CH1 input.
f When audio channel 1 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, front volume is disabled regardless of
the setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
[FRONT]
[W.L.]
Front volume is enabled when CH1 is front microphone input.
Front volume is enabled when CH1 is wireless input.
Front volume is enabled when CH1 is rear input.
[REAR]
[ALL]
Front volume is enabled when CH1 is either front, wireless, or
rear.
[OFF]
Front volume is disabled for CH1.
FRONT VR CH2
FRONT VR CH3
FRONT VR CH4
MIC LOWCUT CH1*
Sets whether to enable or disable front volume for CH2 input.
The setting contents are the same as [FRONT VR CH1].
[OFF]
f When audio channel 2 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, front volume is disabled regardless of
the setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Sets whether to enable or disable front volume for CH3 input.
The setting contents are the same as [FRONT VR CH1].
[OFF]
f When audio channel 3 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, front volume is disabled regardless of
the setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Sets whether to enable or disable front volume for CH4 input.
The setting contents are the same as [FRONT VR CH1].
[OFF]
f When audio channel 4 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, front volume is disabled regardless of
the setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Sets microphone low cut filter for CH1.
[FRONT]
[W.L.]
Works for front microphone input.
Works for wireless input.
Works for rear microphone input.
Off for any input.
[REAR]
[OFF]
MIC LOWCUT CH2*
MIC LOWCUT CH3*
MIC LOWCUT CH4*
LIMITER CH1
Sets microphone low cut filter for CH2.
The setting contents are the same as [MIC LOWCUT CH1].
[OFF]
Sets microphone low cut filter for CH3.
The setting contents are the same as [MIC LOWCUT CH1].
[OFF]
Sets microphone low cut filter for CH4.
The setting contents are the same as [MIC LOWCUT CH1].
[OFF]
Sets CH1 limiter.
[ON], [OFF]
f When audio channel 1 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, limiter does not work regardless of the
setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
LIMITER CH2
LIMITER CH3
LIMITER CH4
25M REC CH SEL
Sets CH2 limiter.
[ON], [OFF]
f When audio channel 2 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, limiter does not work regardless of the
setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Sets CH3 limiter.
[ON], [OFF]
f When audio channel 3 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, limiter does not work regardless of the
setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Sets CH4 limiter.
[ON], [OFF]
f When audio channel 4 is set to [AUTO] at the
[LVL] item on the [AUD02:INPUT] screen of
SmartUI, limiter does not work regardless of the
setting of this item since automatic adjustment
mode is used.
Selects the audio channel to be recorded in DVCPRO and DV formats.
f This item is available only when the [SYSTEM
MODE] item is [480-59.94i] or [576-50i], and
codecs are DVCPRO and DV.
f Regardless of the number of channels of the input
signal to the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal, the
channel set at this item is recorded even if the
[REC SIGNAL] item is set to [SDI IN].
[2CH]
[4CH]
Records only CH1 and CH2.
Records all four channels.
f This setting cannot be changed when clip
connection is underway with one-clip recording.
indicates factory setting values.
– 127 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
TEST TONE
Remark
Selects test signals.
[NORMAL]
Outputs the test tone to CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 when the
<OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch is set to <BARS>,
and audio channel 1 is set to [FRONT] at the [IN] item on the
[AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI.
[ALWAYS]
[CHSEL]
Always outputs the test tone to CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 when the
<OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch is set to <BARS>.
Outputs the test tone to the channel where the [IN] item on the
[AUD02:INPUT] screen of SmartUI is set to [FRONT] when the
<OUTPUT>/<AUTO KNEE> selector switch is set to <BARS>.
(Does not output to CH3/CH4.)
[OFF]
Does not output the test tone.
F.MIC POWER
F.MIC LEVEL
Sets the phantom power of front microphone.
[ON], [OFF]
Selects the front microphone input level.
[−40dB], [−50dB], [−60dB]
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
HEADROOM
Selects the rear microphone CH1 input level.
[−50dB], [−60dB]
Selects the rear microphone CH2 input level.
[−50dB], [−60dB]
Sets the headroom (standard level).
f The factory settings may differ depending on the
[18dB], [20dB]
region.
(AG-HPX600P: [20dB], AG-HPX600EJ: [18dB],
AG-HPX600EN: [18dB])
WIRELESS WARN
WIRELESS TYPE
Sets whether to issue a warning when the reception status of the wireless receiver
is poor.
[ON], [OFF]
Selects the type of wireless receiver.
[SINGLE]
[DUAL]
Single channel type
Dual channel type
f If a single channel type wireless receiver is mounted when [DUAL] is selected,
no sound is recorded even if CH2 and CH4 are set to [W.L.].
indicates factory setting values.
* Frequency response when the microphone low cut filter is used is between 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
[IN/OUT SEL] screen
Item
SDI OUT
Description of settings
Remark
Sets the video output from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal.
[ON]
Outputs video from the output.
[OFF]
Does not output video from the output.
SDI OUT CHAR
Selects whether to superimpose characters to [SDI OUT].
f When the [SYSTEM MODE] item is
[1080-23.98PsF], characters are not
superimposed to the video of [SDI OUT], and this
item is not displayed.
[ON]
Superimposes characters.
[OFF]
Does not superimpose characters.
SDI METADATA
SDI EDH
Sets superimposition of [SDI OUT] metadata (UMID).
[ON]
Superimposes metadata.
[OFF]
Does not superimpose metadata.
Sets superimposition of EDH when [SDI OUT] is the SD signal (480i and 576i).
[ON]
Superimposes EDH.
[OFF]
Does not superimpose EDH.
HD SDI REMOTE
Sets whether to use the recording control function for external devices (such as
recorders) connected to the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal or the <MON OUT>
terminal. (For HD SDI signal output)
f The recording control is output to external devices
when set the item to [ON]. While recording is
being executed, lamps such as the REC lamp,
front tally lamp, and back tally lamp on the
viewfinder, and the tally lamp on the camera are
illuminated.
f The recording control is not output while interval
recording and loop recording.
[ON]
Controls recording operations of external devices.
f For supported external devices (such as
recorders), visit the following website:
http://panasonic.biz/sav/autorec_e/
[OFF]
Does not control recording operations of external devices.
The recording control status is displayed on the
indicates factory setting values.
– 128 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
AUTO REC (OP2)
Selects the function that automatically starts or stops recording by detecting
REC START/STOP mark from the frame rate information of user bits added to the
HD SDI input signal in HD mode.
f Set the user bits added to the HD SDI signal at
the output device of the HD SDI signal as the
frame rate. For setting procedure, refer to the
operating instruction of the output device.
[TYPE1]
[TYPE2]
[OFF]
Performs automatic recording by detecting from LTC of the HD
SDI input signal.
f Set the [REC SIGNAL] item to [SDI IN], and input
the HD SDI signal to the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)>
terminal.
Performs automatic recording by detecting from VITC of the HD
SDI input signal.
f For frame rate information of the user bits, refer to
Does not perform automatic recording.
MON/HDMI ZEBRA
Selects whether the zebra pattern is superimposed over the output signals from
the <MON OUT>, <HDMI>, and <REMOTE> terminals. (The remote VBS signal
also interlocks.)
f This setting interlocks with the setting of [ZBR]
on the [SET03:MON/HDMI SETUP] screen of
SmartUI.
[ON]
Superimposes zebra patterns.
[OFF]
Does not superimpose zebra patterns.
TC IN/OUT SEL
TC OUT
Selects whether to use the <TC IN/OUT> terminal in TC IN or TC OUT.
[TC OUT]
[TC IN]
Uses TC OUT.
Uses TC IN.
Sets the time code type output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[TCG]
Always outputs the time code generator value of the camera.
[TCG/TCR]
Outputs the time code generator value when outputting
camera images, and outputs the played time code value when
outputting playback images.
TC VIDEO SYNC
Sets the output delay of time code output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[RECORDING] Outputs TCG to be recorded without delay.
[VIDEO OUT]
Outputs images according to the delay of output images from
the <MON OUT> and <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminals.
indicates factory setting values.
[DISPLAY SETUP] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
EVF PEAK LEVEL
Adjusts the peaking level of the viewfinder screen.
[−7] ... [0] ... [+7]
Adjusts the peaking frequency of the viewfinder screen.
EVF PEAK FREQ
[LOW]
[HIGH]
Sets the peaking frequency lower.
Sets the peaking frequency higher.
EVF TYPE
Selects the type of viewfinder to be connected.
[COLOR]
[B/W]
Connects the color viewfinder. (AJ-CVF100G, AG-CVF10G)
Connects the black and white viewfinder. (AJ-HVF21KG)
EVF COLOR
Selects whether to display viewfinder images in color or in black and white.
f This setting is not available when the [EVF TYPE]
item is set to [B/W].
[ON]
Displays in color.
[OFF]
Displays in black and white.
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
Sets the level of zebra pattern 1 tilting to the right.
[50%] ... [70%] ... [109%]
Sets the level of zebra pattern 2 tilting to the left.
[50%] ... [85%] ... [109%]
[ON], [SPOT], [OFF]
MARKER
[ON], [OFF]
SAFETY ZONE
[90%], [4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [OFF]
f When the [SYSTEM MODE] item is set to
[480-59.94i] or [576-50i], and the [ASPECT
CONV] item is set to [SIDE CROP] and [LETTER
BOX], the safety zone is not displayed even when
[4:3], [13:9], or [14:9] is selected.
FOCUS BAR
DATE/TIME
Sets the function to indicate the focus level with bar size.
f It is not interlocked with the focus assist button.
[ON]
Displays the focus bar.
[OFF]
Does not display the focus bar.
Sets the date and time display.
[TIME]
Displays hour, minute, and second.
[DATE]
Displays year, month, and day.
[TIME&DATE]
[OFF]
Displays hour, minute, second as well as year, month and day.
Does not display.
LEVEL METER
Sets the audio level meter display.
[ON], [OFF]
indicates factory setting values.
– 129 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
ZOOM/FOCUS
Selects the unit of zoom and focus values.
[NUMBER], [mm/m], [mm/feet], [OFF]
f When [mm/m] or [mm/feet] is selected
Displayed only when an auto-focus compatible lens is attached.
CARD/BATT
Sets the remaining capacity display for P2 card and battery.
[ON], [OFF]
P2CARD REMAIN
Selects the type of P2 card remaining capacity display for recording.
[ONE-CARD]
Displays the remaining capacity of the card currently being
recorded.
[TOTAL]
Displays the total remaining capacity of two cards.
OTHER DISPLAY
Sets other information display items.
[PARTIAL]
[ALL]
Displays partial information.
Displays all information.
Does not display.
[OFF]
MENU BACK
Selects whether to make characters stand out by lowering the background
transmittance while displaying the setting menu.
[ON]
Lowers the background transmittance.
[OFF]
Does not lower the background transmittance.
REC COUNTER
Sets counter operation during recording.
[TOTAL]
Continues counting by integrating until reset with the <RESET>
button.
[CLIP]
Clears the count value when recording starts, and counts time
for each shooting.
indicates factory setting values.
[BATTERY SETUP] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
EXT DC IN SEL
Sets the type of external DC power.
[AC ADAPTER] AC adaptor
[BATTERY] Battery
BATTERY SELECT
BATTERY MODE
Sets the battery type.
[HYTRON50], [HYTRON140], [DIONIC HC], [DIONIC90], [DIONIC160],
[ENDURA7], [ENDURA10], [PAG L96e], [TYPE A], [TYPE B]
Sets the near end.
[AUTO]
Near end is set automatically with the battery selected with
[BATTERY SELECT].
[MANUAL]
Sets the near end voltage manually.
HYTRON50 NEAR
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC HC NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
ENDURA7 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
PAG L96e NEAR
TYPE A FULL
Sets the near end voltage of [HYTRON50]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.4V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [HYTRON140]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.1V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [DIONIC HC]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.1V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [DIONIC90]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.5V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [DIONIC160]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.4V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [ENDURA7]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.4V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [ENDURA10]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.4V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the near end voltage of [PAG L96e]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.1V] ... [15.0V]
Sets the full voltage of [TYPE A]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[12.0V] ... [15.5V] ... [17.0V]
TYPE A NEAR
Sets the near end voltage of [TYPE A]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.0V] ... [15.0V]
TYPE A END
Sets the end voltage of [TYPE A]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [12.7V] ... [15.0V]
TYPE B FULL
Sets the full voltage of [TYPE B]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[12.0V] ... [15.6V] ... [17.0V]
TYPE B NEAR
Sets the near end voltage of [TYPE B]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [13.4V] ... [15.0V]
TYPE B END
Sets the end voltage of [TYPE B]. (Can be adjusted in 0.1 V units.)
[11.0V] ... [12.9V] ... [15.0V]
indicates factory setting values.
– 130 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
NEAR END CANCEL Sets the cancelation of battery near end warning.
[ON], [OFF]
f When this item is set to [ON], flashing of the warning lamp and tally lamp can be
stopped by pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side.
indicates factory setting values.
[CARD FUNCTIONS] screen
f Operations on setting data files may result in error during playback or when the [PC MODE] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN] screen is set to
[ON]. Set the [PC MODE] item to [OFF] before performing operations.
Item
Description of settings
Reads and writes scene files from or in an SD memory card.
[FILE SELECT] Selects a scene file (1 to 4).
Remark
SCENE FILE
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[READ]
Selects and reads the setting value of a scene file (1 to 4)
saved in the SD memory card.
[WRITE]
Saves the setting value of the current scene file (1 to 4) in the
SD memory card.
[TITLE
Updates the title list.
RELOAD]
USER FILE
Reads and writes user files (all setting items other than scene files) from or in an
SD memory card.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[FILE SELECT] Selects a user file (1 to 4).
[READ]
Selects and reads the setting value of a user file (1 to 4) saved
in the SD memory card.
[WRITE]
Saves the setting value of the current user file (1 to 4) in the SD
memory card.
[TITLE
Updates the title list.
RELOAD]
SD CARD FORMAT
Formats an SD memory card.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[LENS SETUP] screen
Item
Description of settings
Sets the parameter for shading compensation.
Remark
SHADING SELECT
[USER1]
[USER2]
[USER3]
[OFF]
User setting 1
User setting 2
User setting 3
Shading compensation off
SHADING (USER)
CAC
Sets the shading parameter for [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] of [SHADING
SELECT].
f This setting is not available when the [SHADING
SELECT] item is [OFF].
Sets whether to activate the lens chromatic aberration correction (CAC) function.
[ON]
Activates when the chromatic aberration correction function
activation is possible.
[OFF]
Does not activate the chromatic aberration correction function.
CAC PROPERTY
Displays the chromatic aberration correction file number currently in use, and
the information of the chromatic aberration correction files already read on the
camera.
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS GAIN
Reads the chromatic aberration correction file from the SD memory card.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
Displays the list of chromatic aberration correction files read on the camera, and
deletes the selected files among them.
Initializes the chromatic aberration correction files read on the camera to the
chromatic aberration correction files of the factory setting.
Sets whether the iris correction control is performed on the camera or the lens.
f Since the FUJINON lens with the extender (such
as x2, x0.8) which was sold prior to the DIGI
POWER type lens activates the iris correction
control on the lens with the extender installed, the
iris control on the camera is not activated properly
when this item is set to [CAMERA].
[CAMERA]
[LENS]
Performs the iris correction control on the camera.
Performs the iris correction control on the lens.
f When an auto-focus compatible lens is not
attached, the selected item is displayed in blue
and cannot be set.
IRIS GAIN VALUE
IRIS ADJUST
Sets the adjustment value for the [IRIS GAIN] item. This setting is enabled when
the [IRIS GAIN] item is set to [CAMERA].
[1], [2], [3]
f When an auto-focus compatible lens is not
attached, the selected item is displayed in blue
and cannot be set.
Force sets iris.
[F2.8], [F16]
indicates factory setting values.
– 131 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
FB ADJUST
Remark
Adjusts the lens flange back.
f This can be adjusted when an auto-focus
compatible lens is attached.
indicates factory setting values.
[PROXY SETTING] screen
Available when the video encoder board (extra-cost option) is mounted. Items are grayed out and cannot be selected when the board is not mounted.
Item
Description of settings
Selects media for recording proxy data.
Remark
REC MEDIA (OP1)
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
- Clip connection is underway with one-clip
recording.
- The [REC FUNCTION] item is set to other than
[NORMAL].
[P2]
Records the proxy data to the P2 card.
[P2&SD]
[OFF]
Records proxy data in both the P2 card and SD memory card.
Does not record proxy data.
- The [VFR] item is set to [ON].
Excluding the case when the frame rate and
the number of frames of recording playback are
matched (30P:30PN, 25P:25PN, 24P:24PN)
REC MODE (1080)
(OP1)
Sets the proxy data recording mode when the 1080 mode is selected.
[STD 2CH MP4], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 4CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [LOW 2CH
MOV]
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
REC MODE (720)
(OP1)
Sets the proxy data recording mode when the 720P mode is selected.
[STD 2CH MP4], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 4CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV]
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
REC MODE (SD)
(OP1)
Sets the proxy data recording mode only when SD mode is selected.
[STD 2CH MP4], [LOW 2CH MOV]
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
TC SUPER (OP3)
Sets superimposition of time code display on proxy data recorded images.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[UPPER]
[LOWER]
[OFF]
Superimposes time code on the upper area of recorded images.
Superimposes time code on the lower area of recorded images.
Does not superimpose time code on recorded images.
STREAMING MODE
(OP1), (OP3)
Selects the proxy streaming function.
f In the following cases, proxy streaming function
is not activated even if set this item to [RTP] or
[HTTP].
- The [P2 BROWSE] item is [OFF].
- The [REC MODE] item for proxy is neither [HQ
2CH MOV] nor [LOW 2CH MOV].
- Proxy recording is set to be performed (the
[REC MEDIA] item is [P2] or [P2&SD]), and the
[PREREC MODE] item is set to [ON].
f If the proxy streaming function is not activated,
[STREAMING ERROR! SEE MODE CHECK
DISPLAY] is displayed at the bottom of the
viewfinder screen.
[INHIBIT]
[RTP]
Stops the proxy streaming function.
Selects the RTP method.
The status can be checked by closing the menu
screen and pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK>
switch towards the <CHK> side twice to display
the [PROXY/NETWORK] screen of the mode
check.
[HTTP]
Selects the HTTP live streaming method.
indicates factory setting values.
[PC/USB/LAN] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
PC MODE SEL
Sets the operation mode of the camera when the [PC MODE] item is set to [ON],
and external devices (such as a hard disk drive and a computer) are connected
with USB 2.0.
f This setting is not available when the [PC MODE]
item is set to [ON].
[USB HOST]
Selects the mode when using a hard disk drive by connecting to
the camera with USB 2.0.
[USB DEVICE] Selects the mode when connecting the camera to a computer
with USB 2.0, and using the P2 card as a mass storage.
PC MODE
Operates the camera in the mode selected at the [PC MODE SEL] item.
f This setting is not available when clip connection
is underway with one-clip recording.
[ON]
Operates in [PC MODE].
[OFF]
Stops [PC MODE] and returns to normal operation.
f It is always set to [OFF] when the power is turned on.
NETWORK SEL
(OP3)
Sets the connection method when making network connection between external
devices (such as a computer) and the camera.
f If [PC MODE] is set to [ON] when OP3 is installed,
the selected item is displayed in blue and cannot
be set.
[WLAN]
[LAN]
Connects with wireless LAN.
Connects with the <LAN> terminal.
indicates factory setting values.
– 132 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
Item
Remark
P2 BROWSE (OP3)
Sets the P2 browsing function.
f If [PC MODE] is set to [ON] when OP3 is installed,
the selected item is displayed in blue and cannot
be set.
[ON]
Activates theP2 browsing function.
Activates the P2 browsing function, and accepts recording
control of the camera as well as settings of time code and user
bits from the connected device.
[ON (+CTRL)]
[OFF]
Deactivates theP2 browsing function.
indicates factory setting values.
[OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen
Item
Description of settings
Remark
USER FILE
Saves, reads, or initializes user files in the built-in memory of the camera.
[LOAD], [SAVE], [INITIAL]
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
- The USB device mode is set.
- Clip connection is underway with one-clip
recording.
f This setting does not affect the items set on the [SCENE FILE] screen.
f User file includes the setting value of SmartUI.
ACCESS LED
REC TALLY
Sets whether to light the access LED of the P2 card.
[ON], [OFF]
Sets the tally lamp display on the viewfinder.
f When the [HD SDI REMOTE] item is set to [ON]
and the recording operation control signal is
output superimposing to the HD SDI signal, the
front tally lamp on the viewfinder and the back
and rear tally lamps on the body are illuminated,
regardless of the setting of this item or recording
status of the camera.
[RED]
Illuminates the red tally lamp on the viewfinder during recording
with the camera. The front tally lamp and the back and rear tally
lamps on the body are illuminated.
[GREEN]
[CHAR]
Illuminates the green tally lamp on the viewfinder during
recording with the camera. The front tally lamp or the tally
lamps on the body are not illuminated
During recording with the camera, the tally lamp on the
viewfinder is not illuminated and the recording status is
displayed only with text on the screen. The front tally lamp or
the tally lamps on the body are not illuminated.
f The screen display for recording always appears regardless of the above
settings.
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
Sets the built-in calendar (date and time).
Sets the time lag against the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
[−12:00] ... [0:00] ... [+13:00]
f This setting is not initialized when initialization is
performed with the [INITIAL] item of [MENU INIT]
and [USER FILE].
GL PHASE
Selects the output signal of which phase is to be locked to the signal input to the
f This setting is not available when the [SYSTEM
MODE] item is set to [480-59.94i], [576-50i], and
[1080-23.98PsF].
[HD SDI]
Locks the phase of HD SDI output signals.
[COMPOSITE] Locks the phase of the down-converted composite signal.
H PHASE
Adjusts the horizontal phase when locking the phase to the signal to the signal
input to the <GENLOCK IN> terminal.
[−512] ... [0] ... [+511]
f Press and turn up or down the jog dial button,
and keep pressing it at the position to change the
value faster.
SEEK SELECT
Selects the position to be cued when the <FF/)> or <%/REW> button is
pressed while playback is paused.
[CLIP]
Top of the clip
[CLIP&T]
Top of the clip and text memo location
MENU INIT
Initializes all the setting menus including all scene files F1 to F6 and user files
(including settings of SmartUI) to the factory settings.
f This setting is not available in the following cases:
- The USB device mode is set.
- Clip connection is underway with one-clip
recording.
indicates factory setting values.
– 133 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations — Menu list
Description of settings
[DIAGNOSTIC] screen
Item
Remark
VERSION
Displays the version of all firmware in the camera.
The version of each firmware can be checked by opening a sub-screen.
(Sub-screen)
[CAM SOFT]
Camera microcomputer software
[SYSCON
SOFT]
System control microcomputer software
[P2CS BL2-1]
[P2CS BL2-2]
[P2CS KR]
[P2CS AP]
[VUP]
P2 control microcomputer boot program 1
P2 control microcomputer boot program 2
P2 control microcomputer kernel
P2 control microcomputer application software
System software for updating all firmware of the camera
File system for updating the camera
[VUP FS]
[CAM FPGA]
[BE FPGA]
Camera FPGA configuration ROM
BE FPGA configuration ROM
[PROXY SOFT] Proxy board software version display (OP1)
[PROXY FPGA] Proxy board FPGA configuration ROM (OP1)
[SDI IN FPGA] FPGA configuration ROM of the SDI signal input board (OP2)
OPTION STATUS
Indicates whether there is an optional board, and displays activated status of the
upgrade software key. The following items are displayed on the sub-screen.
[SDI IN
--- (with board: [ACTIVE], without board: ---)
BOARD]
[PROXY
BOARD]
--- (with board: [ACTIVE], without board: ---)
[PRODUCTION Activate: [ACTIVE]
PACK]
No: [----]
[NETWORK
FUNC.]
Activate: [ACTIVE]
No: [----]
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
Displays the product name of the camera.
Displays the serial number of the camera.
Displays the operation time of the camera.
– 134 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Setting menu basic operations
Setting menu basic operations
SmartUI basic operations
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
1
CAM
TC
NDF SLAVE P -REC
2
3
4
5
0
AUDIO
SETUP
-10
7
6
-18
-20
-30
dB
MEDIA CH1
A
E
E
F
CH2
BATT
F
1
2
HOME
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
THUMBNAIL
KEY LOCK
SET TOP
SHIFT
When the camera is turned on, the [HOME] screen is displayed. The status of the [HOME] screen at previous start-up is retained.
1
<LIGHT> button
Toggles the backlight of SmartUI on and off. Can be operated regardless of the status of the <KEY LOCK> switch.
2
<CAM> button
Displays a settings screen related to the camera image.
Each time you press the button, the settings screens change in order.
3
4
5
<AUDIO> button
Displays a settings screen related to audio.
Each time you press the button, the settings screens change in order.
<SETUP> button
Displays a settings screen related to time code and image output.
Each time you press the button, the settings screens change in order.
<HOME> button
f While another screen is displayed, press this button to return to the [HOME] screen.
f While the [HOME] screen is displayed, press this button to change the status information display at the bottom of the screen.
6
7
<KEY LOCK> switch
Slide to the right to lock the operations of all buttons of SmartUI. Slide to the left to unlock.
* Buttons for thumbnail operations will be locked as well.
<HOLD> button, <COUNTER> button, <RESET> button, <MONITOR SEL> button, <%/REW> button, <STOP> button, <FF/)> button,
and <PLAY/PAUSE> button
f When the [HOME] screen is displayed
The function printed above or below each button is performed.
f When the setting screen is displayed by pressing the <CAM> button, <AUDIO> button, or <SETUP> button on the [HOME] screen
Instead of the printed functions, the functions in the [ ] of SmartUI are assigned to upper or lower buttons corresponding to each setting screen. For
Initializing SmartUI setting menu items
Items configured with SmartUI are saved in the user file.
By selecting [INITIAL] in the [USER FILE] item of the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen, you can restore the user file menu setting to its factory setting.
Use the [MENU INIT] item in the [OTHER FUNCTIONS] screen to restore all of the user files and six scene files to their factory settings.
– 136 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Setting menu structure
Setting menu structure
+20(
&$0(5$
$8',2
&$0ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢂ67$786
&$0ꢀꢄꢂꢃꢂ6&(1(ꢂ),/(
&$0ꢀꢅꢂꢃꢂ6(783
$8'ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢂ/(9(/
$8'ꢀꢄꢂꢃꢂ,1387
$8'ꢀꢅꢂꢃꢂ021,
6(783
6(7ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢂ7&ꢆ8%
6(7ꢀꢄꢂꢃꢂ021ꢆ+'0,ꢂ)250$7
6(7ꢀꢅꢂꢃꢂ021ꢆ+'0,ꢂ6(783
6(7ꢀꢇꢂꢃꢂ/&'
– 137 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — SmartUI menu operation overview
SmartUI menu operation overview
HOME
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
HOLD
COUNTER
RESET MONITOR SEL
LIGHT
CAM
CAM
TC
NDF R-RUN
TC
NDF R-RUN
HOME
0
0
AUDIO
SETUP
AUDIO
SETUP
-10
-10
-18
-20
-30
dB
-18
-20
-30
dB
MEDIA CH1:REAR
MEDIA CH1
A
E
E
F
E
E
F
CH2:REAR
CH3:REAR
CH4:REAR
CH2
BATT
BATT
F
F
1
2
1
2
HOME
HOME
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
/REW
STOP
FF/
PLAY/PAUSE
CAMERA
AUDIO
SETUP
CAM01:STATUS
AUD01:LEVEL
SET01:TC/UB
[
][
RST CH3 4
]
[
] [
]
/
CAMO1:STATUS
AUD01:LEVEL
CH1
SET01: TC UB RST
CAC ACTIVE
VAR 3.2K
25P
CH2
MF 64
h
min
F-RUN
s
frm
[
A
Z46
1/60.0
12dB
SPOT F5.6
100
23
SET R-RUN
[
] [
] [
] [
]
[
] [
] [
]
]
–
+
–
+
TCG TCMD
+
-
CAM
AUDIO
SETUP
CAM02:SCENE FILE
AUD02:INPUT
SET02:MON/HDMI FORMAT
[
]
/
CAMO2:SCENE FILE
AUD02:INPUT
CH1
CH3 4
SET02:MON/HDMI FORMAT
HDMI: 1080 i / 720P
CH2
FRONT
F1:
F2:FLUO.
F3:SPARK
F4:B-STR
F5:CINE V
F6:CINE D
FRONT
W.L. AUTO
AUTO
576 i L.BOX
VBS
CROP
W.L. AUTO
F1
EXEC
REAR MANU REAR MANU
SQU
[
] [ ]
FILE READ
[
] [
] [
] [
LVL
]
[
] [
]
IN
LVL
IN
MON D.CON
CAM
CAM
AUDIO
AUDIO
SETUP
CAM03:SETUP
AUD03:MONI
SET03:MON/HDMI SETUP
[
]
/
CAMO3:SETUP
AUD03:MONI
CH3 4
SET03:MON/HDMI SETUP
WB VAR
3.2K
F.RATE
25P
STEREO: CH1/2
CH1
ON
ST
ST
ON
OFF
OUT
ON
OFF
CHR
ON
OFF
ZBR
OFF
CH2
MIX
[
]
[
] [
]
VFR
-
+
[
] [
]
[
] [
] [
]
SEL 1 SEL 2
SETUP
SETUP
SET04:LCD
[
]
SET04:LCD
RST
BACK
LIGHT
3
CONTRAST
33
[
] [
]
-
+
– 138 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
Menu list
[CAMERA] screen
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
CAM01:STATUS
Displays the camera image related status.
CAMO1:STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAC ACTIVE
VAR 3.2K
25P
MF 64
Z46
SPOT F5.6
1/60.0
12dB
Displays whether the chromatic aberration
compensation function is activated.
[CAC ACTIVE], [CAC---]
Displayed only when the lens that supports the
chromatic aberration compensation function is
attached.
—
—
1
Displays the focus control information.
[MF**], [AF**]
Displayed only when an auto-focus compatible lens
is attached.
Any number between [99] and [00] is displayed in
the place of **. When the distance to the in-focus
subject becomes shorter, the value decreases.
2
Displays the zoom position.
—
—
3
[Z00] - [Z99], [Z***mm]
Displays the auto iris settings and the iris
F value.
[BACK], [SPOT], [F*.*], [OPEN], [CLOSE], [NC]
4
Displays the white balance control mode
and the color temperature.
[ATW], [ATW LOCK], [Ach], [Bch], [P3.2K],
[P5.6K], [VAR*.*K]
—
—
5
6
Displays the frame rate.
[**P], [24PA], [60i (50i)], [**:**PN], [**:60i
(50i)]
Displays the shutter value.
Displays the gain status.
—
—
7
8
[1/***], [***.*d]
[−3dB] to [18dB]
CAM02:SCENE FILE Switches the scene files.
[FILE]
[F1] to [F6]
<%/REW> button
Selects the number to switch the scene files.
[READ]
<STOP> button
Changes the operation according to the selected scene file.
indicates factory setting values.
– 139 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
CAM03:SETUP
Configures the white balance variable value and variable frame rate (VFR).
[VFR] (OP4)
[ON], [OFF]
Toggles the variable frame rate on/off.
f This setting is not available when the setting
menu on the viewfinder screen is open.
f Other conditions where the setting is not
available are same as the setting menu [VFR]
item on the viewfinder screen.
<%/REW> button
f During recording, operation is not changed even
if the setting is changed. The setting is applied
after recording is completed (and after clip
connection is completed in one clip recording).
[−]
<FF/)> button
Decreases the setting value of the selected item.
[+]
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
Increases the setting value of the selected item.
[→]
Moves the item selection to the right. When the item selection moves to the right edge, it moves back to
the left edge.
[F.RATE] (OP4)
[1] - [60]
Sets the variable frame rate.
f This setting is not available when the setting
menu on the viewfinder screen is open.
The available maximum frame rate value varies
depending on the settings.
f Other conditions where the setting is not
available are same as the setting menu [FRAME
RATE] item on the viewfinder screen.
<MONITOR SEL> button
f During recording, operation is not changed even
if the setting is changed. The setting is applied
after recording is completed (and after clip
connection is completed in one clip recording).
[WB VAR]
[2.4K] to [3.2K] to [9.9K]
Specifies the color temperature for the variable
function where any color temperature can be
specified.
indicates factory setting values.
– 140 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
[AUDIO] screen
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
AUD01:LEVEL
Configures the audio levels for audio channel 1/2 and audio channel 3/4.
r When audio channel 1/2 is selected
[−]
<%/REW> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 1.
[+]
<STOP> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 1.
[−]
<FF/)> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 2.
[+]
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 2.
[RST]
Resets the audio volume of audio channel 1/2 to the user-preset value.
<RESET> button
Press this button for three seconds to save the current audio volume values of audio channel 1/2 as
the user-preset values. The user-preset position is indicated as the down arrow ↓ on the audio volume
display.
[CH3/4]
Toggles the audio volume setting screen between audio channel 3 and 4.
This operation also switches the audio channels output to the speaker, earphone, and <AUDIO OUT>
terminal. The display channels for audio level meter and audio volume on the [HOME] screen also switch.
<MONITOR SEL> button
r When audio channel 3/4 is selected
[−]
<%/REW> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 3.
[+]
<STOP> button
<FF/)> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 3.
[−]
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 4.
[+]
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
Decreases the audio volume value of audio channel 4.
[RST]
Resets the audio volume of audio channel 3/4 to the user-preset value.
Press this button for three seconds to save the current audio volume values of audio channel 3/4 as
the user-preset values. The user-preset position is indicated as the down arrow ↓ on the audio volume
display.
<RESET> button
[CH1/2]
Toggles the audio volume setting screen between audio channel 1 and 2.
This operation also switches the audio channels output to the speaker, earphone, and <AUDIO OUT>
terminal. The display channels for audio level meter and audio volume on the [HOME] screen also switch.
<MONITOR SEL> button
indicates factory setting values.
– 141 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
AUD02:INPUT
Selects the audio input signal and sets the recording adjustment method.
r When audio channel 1/2 is selected
[IN]
[FRONT]
Selects the input signal to be recorded to audio
channel 1.
Records the microphone input signal connected to
the <MIC IN> terminal.
[W.L.]
Records the input signal from the wireless receiver.
<%/REW> button
[REAR]
Records the audio input signal from the audio
device or microphone connected to the <AUDIO
IN> terminal.
[LVL]
[AUTO]
Selects the method to adjust the recording level for Enables automatic adjustment.
audio channel 1.
<STOP> button
[MANU]
Enables manual adjustment. The setting contents
are the same as [AUD01:LEVEL].
[IN]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
1.
Selects the input signal to be recorded to audio
channel 2.
<FF/)> button
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
<MONITOR SEL> button
[LVL]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
Selects the method to adjust the recording level for 1.
audio channel 2.
[CH3/4]
Toggles the audio input setting screen between CH3/CH4. Setting contents that switch in coordination are
the same as the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen.
r When audio channel 3/4 is selected
[IN]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
1.
Selects the input signal to be recorded to audio
<%/REW> button
<STOP> button
channel 3.
[LVL]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
Selects the method to adjust the recording level for 1.
audio channel 3.
[IN]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
1.
Selects the input signal to be recorded to audio
channel 4.
<FF/)> button
[LVL]
The setting contents are the same as audio channel
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
<MONITOR SEL> button
Selects the method to adjust the recording level for 1.
audio channel 4.
[CH1/2]
Toggles the audio input setting screen between CH1/CH2. Setting contents that switch in coordination are
the same as the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen.
AUD03:MONI
Selects the audio to be output to the speaker, the <PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT> terminal.
r When audio channel 1/2 is selected
[SEL1]
[CH1]
Selects the audio to be output to the speaker, the
<PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT>
terminal.
Monaural output from audio channel 1.
[ST]
<%/REW> button
Stereo output from audio channel 1 and 2.
[CH2]
Monaural output from audio channel 2.
[SEL2]
[ST]
Selects the audio to be output from the speaker,
the <PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT>
terminal when [ST] is selected at [SEL1].
Stereo output from audio channel 1 and 2.
<STOP> button
[MIX]
Mixed output from audio channel 1 and 2.
[CH3/4]
<MONITOR SEL> button
Toggles the audio monitor setting screen between CH3/CH4. Setting contents that switch in coordination
are the same as the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen.
r When audio channel 3/4 is selected
[SEL1]
[CH3]
Selects the audio to be output to the speaker, the
Monaural output from audio channel 3.
<PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT>
terminal.
[ST]
<%/REW> button
Stereo output from audio channel 3 and 4.
[CH4]
Monaural output from audio channel 4.
[SEL2]
[ST]
Selects the audio to be output from the speaker,
the <PHONES> terminal, and the <AUDIO OUT>
terminal when [ST] is selected at [SEL1].
Stereo output from audio channel 3 and 4.
<STOP> button
[MIX]
Mixed output from audio channel 3 and 4.
[CH1/2]
<MONITOR SEL> button
Toggles the audio monitor setting screen between CH1/CH2. Setting contents that switch in coordination
are the same as the [AUD01:LEVEL] screen.
indicates factory setting values.
– 142 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
[SETUP] screen
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
SET01:TC/UB
Sets the time code or user bits.
When an item other than [UB] is selected for the counter display on the [HOME] screen, the time code setting screen appears, and when
[UB] is selected on the [HOME] screen, the user bits setting screen appears.
r Time code settings screen:
f To set the time code, press the <%/REW> button to change to the time code setting mode.
f The setting values of each digit of the time code are from [0] to [9] (decimal).
[TCG]
When the <%/REW> button is pressed, [SET] is
displayed in black and white inversion, and the time
code setting mode is set.
When the <%/REW> button is pressed again,
[SET] returns to the normal display, and the time
code setting mode exits.
Starts and exits the time code setting mode.
f The time code setting is applied when the setting
mode exits.
<%/REW> button
[TC_MD]
[F-RUN]
Selects the advance setting mode for the built-in
time code generator.
Use this function to advance the time code
continuously, regardless of the P2 card recording
operation. Set to this position to, for example, set
the time code to the current time or externally lock
the time code.
[R-RUN]
<STOP> button
Use this function to advance the time code only
during recording. A time code recorded normally will
be continuously recorded.
f If a clip is deleted, or if the frame rate is set to
[24P]/[24PA] and the recording continues to
a frame other than [24P]/[24PA], continuous
recording may fail.
[−]
<FF/)> button
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
<COUNTER> button
<RESET> button
Decreases the setting value of the selected digit in the time code.
[+]
Increases the setting value of the selected digit in the time code.
[TC/UB]
Switches to the user bits setting screen.
[RST]
Resets all time code setting values to 0.
[→]
<MONITOR SEL> button
Moves the selected digit in the time code to the right. When the selected digit moves to the right edge, it
moves back to the left edge.
r User bits settings screen:
f To set the user bits, press the <%/REW> button to change to the user bits setting mode.
f The setting values of each digit of the user bits are from [0] to [F] (hexadecimal).
[UBG]
When the <%/REW> button is pressed, [SET] is
displayed in black and white inversion, and the user
bits setting mode is set.
When the <%/REW> button is pressed again,
[SET] returns to the normal display, and the user
bits setting mode exits.
Starts and exists the user bits setting mode.
f The user bits setting is applied when the setting
mode exits.
<%/REW> button
[TC_MD]
<STOP> button
Switches to the advance setting mode for the built-in time code generator. The setting contents are the
same as when [TCG] is selected.
[−]
<FF/)> button
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
<COUNTER>
Decreases the setting value of the selected digit in the user bits.
[+]
Increases the setting value of the selected digit in the user bits.
[TC/UB]
Switches to the user bits setting screen.
[RST]
<RESET> button
Resets all user bits setting values to 0.
[→]
<MONITOR SEL> button
Moves to the right of the selected digit in the user bits. When the selected digit moves to the right edge, it
moves back to the left edge.
indicates factory setting values.
– 143 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Using SmartUI — Menu list
Screen
Corresponding button
Setting details and setting value
SET02:MON/HDMI
FORMAT
Sets the formats of video output from the <MON OUT> and <HDMI> terminals.
[MON]
[AUTO] (HDMI:[1080i/720P])
Sets the signal format type output from the <MON
OUT> terminal.
With this setting, the signal format to be out put
from the <HDMI> terminal is also switched.
Displayed only in the HD mode.
The SDI signal is output according to the setting
of the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the setting menu
[SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
f The 1080i or 720P signal is also output from the
<HDMI> terminal according to the [SYSTEM
MODE] item setting.
f For [1080-23.98PsF], the signal pulled down to
1080/59.94i is output from both <MON OUT> and
<HDMI> terminals.
[480i] or [576i] (HDMI:[480P] or [576P])
Displayed only in the HD mode.
The SDI signal of 480i or 576i is output.
f The 480P or 576P signal is output from the
<HDMI> terminal.
<%/REW> button
[SDI] (HDMI:[480P] or [576P])
Displayed only in the SD mode.
According to the setting of the [SYSTEM MODE]
item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen,
the SDI signal of 480i or 576i.
f The 480P or 576P signal is output from the
<HDMI> terminal.
[VBS] (HDMI:[480P] or [576P])
A composite video signal is output.
f The 480P or 576P signal is output from the
<HDMI> terminal.
[D.CON]
[CROP]
Sets the aspect for the down-conversion output
signal in the HD mode. This item is not displayed in
the SD mode.
Side-crop mode (Crops the left and right edges.)
[L.BOX]
<STOP> button
Letterbox mode (Adds black bands at the top and
bottom of the image.)
[SQU]
Squeeze mode (Squeezes images horizontally.)
SET03:MON/HDMI
SETUP
Sets the output setting of the <MON OUT> and <HDMI> terminal.
[OUT]
[ON], [OFF]
[ON], [OFF]
Enables or disables the output from the <MON
OUT> terminal.
<%/REW> button
[CHR]
Specifies whether characters are superimposed
over the output from <MON OUT>, <HDMI>, and
<REMOTE> terminals.
<STOP> button
This setting is disabled when a remote control unit (AG-EC4G) is connected, and the settings on the
remote control unit or extension control unit supersede.
[ZBR]
[ON], [OFF]
Specifies whether the zebra pattern is
superimposed over the output from <MON OUT>,
<HDMI>, and <REMOTE> terminals.
f This setting is not available when the setting
menu on the viewfinder screen is open.
<FF/)> button
SET04:LCD
Performs the display settings of SmartUI.
[−]
Decreases the setting value of the selected item. Press and hold this button to continuously decrease the
<FF/)> button
setting value.
[+]
<PLAY/PAUSE> button
<RESET> button
Increases the setting value of the selected item. Press and hold this button to continuously decrease the
setting value.
[RST]
Resets the setting value of the selected item to its factory setting value.
[→]
Moves the item selection to the right. When the item selection moves to the right edge, it moves back to
the left edge.
[BACK LIGHT]
[1] ... [3] ... [5]
Sets the luminance of SmartUI.
[CONTRAST]
[0] ... [33] ... [63]
<MONITOR SEL> button
Sets the contrast of SmartUI.
f The SmartUI screen may be hidden depending
on the setting value.
In such a case, press the <HOME> to return to
the [HOME] screen and hold down the <LIGHT>
and <RESET> buttons. The setting value of
[CONTRAST] is reset to the factory setting.
indicates factory setting values.
– 144 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
USB connection to a computer in the device mode
By connecting the camera to a computer via USB 2.0, the P2 card inserted in the camera can be used as mass storage.
Connecting to a computer
Connect the USB cable to the <USB2.0> terminal (device).
NOTE
1
@@
t The [PC MODE] can be assigned to the <USER> buttons
(<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) at the [USER MAIN],
[USER1], and [USER2] items on the setting menu [SW MODE]
screen respectively. However, when the menu is open, pressing
the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>)
does not activate the function.
t Before connecting the camera using the USB cable, install
P2 software to a computer from the CD-ROM provided with
the camera. For the USB driver, select “AG-HPX600”. The
USB driver only supports Windows. For details, refer to the
installation manual.
NOTE
@@
t The USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the camera. Prepare
a commercial USB 2.0 cable (double-shielded for noise
suppression).
t A USB connection cable of up to 5 m is supported, however, a
cable of 3 m or shorter is recommended as preferable.
t The camera supports only USB 2.0. Ensure your computer
supports USB 2.0.
t When connecting the camera to a computer via USB, ensure
that no other device is connected to the computer via USB.
t When connecting the camera via USB, do not eject the P2 card.
t When USB is connected, the P2 card access LED turns off
when not accessed.
t When the camera is operating in the USB device mode, no
recording/playback operation or clip thumbnail operation is
allowed.
t When the camera is operating in the USB device mode, the P2
card remaining capacity and status are not displayed. Audio
is not output from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal. The audio
level meter is not displayed on the viewfinder and the monitor
connected to the camera.
During USB connection, [USB DEVICE CONNECTED] is displayed
at the center of the viewfinder screen and status area of the [HOME]
screen of SmartUI. If not connected properly, [USB DEVICE
DISCONNECTED] is displayed.
<USB2.0> terminal (device)
Set the [PC MODE SEL] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/
LAN] screen to [USB DEVICE], and set the [PC MODE] item
to [ON].
2
PC/USB/LAN
PC MODE SEL
PC MODE
USB DEVICE
OFF
USB DEVICE
CONNECTED
NETWORK SEL
P2 BROWSE
OFF
OFF
Exit the USB device mode.
3
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
There are three ways to do so:
f Turn the <POWER> switch of the camera to <OFF>.
f Switch the [PC MODE] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN]
screen to [OFF].
f Press the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>)
to which [PC MODE] is assigned.
USB host mode
Connect a hard disk drive (HDD) that supports USB 2.0 to the camera to save the card data, view the saved clips in thumbnail, and write back to the P2
card.
Switching to the USB host mode
f During USB host mode, [USB HOST CONNECTED] is displayed at
the center of the viewfinder screen and status area of the [HOME]
screen of SmartUI. If the hard disk drive is not connected properly,
[USB HOST DISCONNECTED] is displayed.
Set the [PC MODE SEL] item on the setting menu [PC/USB/
LAN] screen to [USB HOST], and set the [PC MODE] item to
[ON].
1
f The camera enters the USB host mode.
– 146 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
f The USB host mode and normal mode can be switched by pressing
NOTE
@@
the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to
which [PC MODE] is assigned if the function is assigned to the
<USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>). However,
if the thumbnail screen is displayed, pressing the <USER> buttons
(<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) does not switch the mode.
t In the USB host mode, you can play the P2 card contents, but
cannot record the camera image or external output.
The clips written to the hard disk drive must be written back to
the P2 card for playback.
Exit the USB host mode.
3
There are three ways to do so:
f Turn the <POWER> switch of the camera to <OFF>.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
2
f The thumbnail screen is displayed.
f With the thumbnail screen closed, switch the [PC MODE] item on
the setting menu [PC/USB/LAN] screen to [OFF].
f Ensure that [USB HOST] is displayed at the bottom-right of the
screen.
f Press the <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>)
to which [PC MODE] is assigned.*
f If a hard disk drive is connected, the HDD mark on the top-right
turns on. However, a red mark indicates that the hard disk drive
contents cannot be copied. Check the type of the hard disk drive.
* If the thumbnail screen is displayed, pressing the <USER> buttons
(<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) does not exit the USB host mode.
Using the USB host mode
Hard disk drives that can be used:
f Hard disk drives that support USB 2.0 connection
f Storage unit that has Panasonic USB 2.0 interface
- For details on the compatible unit, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
NOTE
@@
t Although the camera supports the USB bus power (5 V, 0.5 A), some hard disk drives may not be bootable. In such a case, supply power to
the hard disk drive in another way.
t While connecting a hard disk drive to the camera, use the fully charged or external DC power supply to avoid problems in copying or
formatting operations.
t Even if the hard disk drives are turned off, do not connect multiple hard disks using a hub. Also, do not connect any other devices other than
a hard disk drive using a hub when a hard disk drive is connected.
t Hard disk drives over 2 TB (2048 GB) are not supported.
Viewing hard disk drive information
Information about the hard disk drive connected via USB can be viewed by the following methods:
For [TYPE S] or [P2STORE]
Switch to the USB host mode.
1
7
8
9
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
2
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
3
1
2
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button and select [HDD] →
[EXPLORE] from the thumbnail menu.
4
3
The screen switches to the hard disk drive information display screen.
4
5
6
Press the <SET> button to switch the screen.
– 147 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
2
3
4
5
[VENDOR]
The vendor name of the hard disk drive is displayed.
[MODEL]
The model name of the hard disk drive is displayed.
[SIZE]
The total space of the hard disk drive is displayed.
[USED]
The usage capacity of the hard disk drive is displayed at the upper
section. (Unit: GB)
The number of P2 cards saved on the hard disk drive is displayed at
the bottom section.
10
11
12
6
7
[FREE CAP.]
The free space in the hard disk drive (GB) is displayed.
Press the <EXIT> button to return to the previous screen.
Partition number
The partition number of the hard disk drive is displayed.
The partition number is on a single P2 card basis.
For [FAT]
NOTE
@@
1
2
t Up to ten numbers are displayed in the screen. If there are
more than 11 partitions, use the cursor buttons ({) to scroll
down.
3
t Up to 23 P2 cards can be recorded to the hard disk drive.
8
[MODEL]
4
5
The model name of the P2 card on the recording source is displayed.
6
NOTE
@@
t Press the cursor buttons (I) to switch to [PARTITION NAME].
Use the cursor buttons (Y) to return to the model name display.
Press the <SET> button to switch the screen.
9
[DATE]/[TIME]
Date and time when the data in the partition is saved.
Press the <EXIT> button to return to the previous screen.
[PARTITION]
1
10 [SERIAL]
The serial number of the P2 card on the recording source is
The hard disk drive type is displayed. The available functions differ
depending on the hard disk drive type.
displayed.
Hard disk
drive type
Features
Available functions
11 [VERIFY]
The setting and result of verification are displayed.
A special format to enable
fast write/write-back on a
card basis.
Perform [FORMAT] on
the camera to obtain this
format.
Thumbnail display, write/
write back on a card
basis, write-back on a
clip basis, format
[ON/FINISHED] Verification was performed and the verification result
matches.
[TYPE S]
[ON/FAILED]
Verification was performed but the verification result
does not match.
[OFF]
[----]
Verification was not performed.
Indicates P2 STORE.
No writing operation is
allowed.
Thumbnail display, write
back on a card basis,
write back on a clip basis
No verification information available.
[P2STORE]
[FAT]
NOTE
A hard disk drive that the
heading basic partition
is FAT16 or FAT32 in a
Thumbnail display, write
back on a clip basis,
format
@@
t Clips after the 1001st clip are not displayed even if the hard disk
drive type is FAT.
computer and that requires f After formatting, it can
the CONTENTS directory in
the partition root.
be used as the [TYPE
S] hard disk drive.
t For the FAT formatted hard disk drives, only the information in
the initial partition is displayed.
Hard disk drive other than
the above.
t If there is an invalid partition in P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G), the
partition information is displayed in gray.
f Displayed when the
root does not have the
CONTENTS directory, or
when the file system is not
FAT16 or FAT32, such as
NTFS.
format
12 [NAME]
f After formatting, it can
be used as the [TYPE
S] hard disk drive.
[OTHER]
[PARTITION NAME] is displayed.
A [PARTITION NAME] can be entered from the software keyboard by
selecting [CHANGE PARTITION NAME] in the [OPERATION] menu
while the thumbnails are displayed. (Up to 20 characters)
– 148 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
Formatting the hard disk drive
f A confirmation message is displayed again. Select [YES] to format
the hard disk drive.
Switch to the USB host mode.
1
f After formatting, it can be used as the [TYPE S] hard disk drive.
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
2
3
NOTE
@@
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
t After formatting the hard disk drive, all contents of the hard disk
drive are deleted. You cannot partially format the hard disk to
keep some partitions.
t The hard disk drive formatted with the camera is rewritten with
a computer, the operation with the camera and data on the hard
disk drive are not guaranteed afterwards.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button and select [HDD] →
[EXPLORE] from the thumbnail menu.
4
The screen switches to the hard disk drive information display screen.
Select [OPERATION] → [FORMAT (HDD)] from the menu, and
use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select [YES].
t Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored.
Always check data before formatting.
5
Writing to the hard disk drive
Switch to the USB host mode.
Select [YES].
1
6
f Writing starts.
f A progress bar is displayed during a write operation. To cancel
writing, press the <SET> button and select [YES] for the cancel
confirmation.
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
2
If the hard disk drive is not formatted with the camera, refer to
drive.
f [COPY COMPLETED!] is displayed when writing completes.
NOTE
Insert the P2 card.
@@
3
t To bypass verification at writing, select [HDD] → [SETUP] from
the thumbnail menu, and set [VERIFY] to [OFF]. The time until
writing completes shortens, but no data writing verification is
performed.
t Select [ALL SLOT] to write the contents of all the P2 cards
inserted in the camera in bulk to the hard disk.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
4
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select [HDD] →
[EXPORT] from the thumbnail menu to specify the slot of the
P2 card which contains data to write to the hard disk drive.
5
NOTE
@@
t If the type of the hard disk drive is [TYPE S], writing is available only on a card basis. Up to 23 P2 cards can be saved to the hard disk drive.
Each set of data in the P2 cards saved in the hard disk drive is recognized as a separate drive in a computer.
t If you want to write a P2 card containing a defective clip to a hard disk drive, we recommend that you fix the defective clip.
t If you cancel the process during verification, writing from that P2 card to the hard disk drive is already completed.
Writing back to the P2 card
You can select clips from the hard disk drive to write back to the card.
Switch to the USB host mode.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select
[OPERATION] → [COPY] from the thumbnail menu, and then
select the slot of the P2 card to be written back.
1
6
7
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
2
3
Select [YES].
Insert the P2 card to which you want to write back the clips
into the slot.
f Writing back to the P2 card starts.
f [COPY COMPLETED!] is displayed when writing back completes.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select [HDD]
→ [EXPLORE] from the thumbnail menu to navigate to the
partition containing the data to read, and then select the
partition using the <SET> button.
4
NOTE
@@
t No verification is performed when you select a clip to write.
Select the clip in the thumbnail to write back to the P2 card
from the hard disk drive.
5
– 149 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connection through the <USB2.0> terminal
Writing back to the P2 card when the hard disk drive type is [TYPE S] or [P2STORE]
You can write back on a card basis. Format the P2 card to be written back in advance.
Switch to the USB host mode.
Select [YES].
1
6
Writing to the card starts.
f [COPY COMPLETED!] is displayed when writing back completes.
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
2
3
NOTE
@@
Insert the P2 card to which you want to write back the clips
into the slot.
t You cannot perform an import operation to P2 cards of different
models on a partition basis. Import on a clip basis.
t To bypass verification at writing back, select [HDD] → [SETUP]
from the thumbnail menu, and set [VERIFY] to [OFF]. The time
until writing back completes shortens, but no data writing back
verification is performed.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button, and select [HDD]
→ [EXPLORE] from the thumbnail menu to navigate to the
partition containing the data to read, and then select the
partition using the <SET> button.
4
t If you write back a clip to a P2 card other than the P2 card to which
that clip was originally saved, the clip written back may be an
incomplete clip. In that case, merge the clips.
Select [OPERATION] → [IMPORT] from the thumbnail menu,
and select the slot where the empty P2 card is installed.
5
Notes when using a hard disk drive
f Use the hard disk drive (including [P2STORE]) in the following conditions.
- Use the hard disk drive within its operational range (such as temperature).
- Do not place the hard disk drive in a location that is unstable or subject to vibration.
f Some hard disk drives may not function properly.
f A hard disk drive with the SATA (serial ATA) or PATA (parallel ATA) interface connected with a USB conversion cable may not be recognized.
f Use a hard disk drive with a sufficient space for a copy operation.
f During a format or copy operation, do not unplug the cable, eject the target P2 card, or turn off the camera or the hard disk drive. Reboot of the
camera and hard disk drive reboot may be required. For the power supply for the camera, use the fully charged battery or external DC power supply.
f Because the hard disk drive is a very sensitive device, there is a chance that you may not be able to read or write data depending on your usage.
f Please note that Panasonic has no responsibility for data loss caused from a hard disk drive failure or other defects and any direct or indirect damage
related to these.
f If the contents of the hard disk drive used for a copy operation from the camera are replaced using another computer, the behavior of that hard disk
drive with the camera or its data is not guaranteed afterwards.
f Use the drive mount converter published in the support desk at the following Web site to mount the connected hard disk drive to a specified folder.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
– 150 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connecting to the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)
Connecting to the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)
f Connect the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional) to remote-control some functions.
f When you connect AJ-RC10G and set the <POWER> switches of the camera and AJ-RC10G to <ON>, the camera automatically enters the remote
control mode.
<REMOTE> terminal
AJ-RC10G
NOTE
@@
t When connecting and disconnecting the dedicated cable, ensure that you turn the <POWER> switches of the camera and AJ-RC10G to
<OFF>.
t Do not use any cable other than the AJ-RC10G dedicated cable or dedicated optional cable. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
t The <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) and the <MENU> button do not activate during AJ-RC10G connection.
t Refer to an AJ-RC10G manual in the supplied CD.
t For details on the current from the <REMOTE> terminal, refer to “Details of the connector signals” (page 173).
– 151 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting to External Devices — Connecting to the extension control unit (AG-EC4G)
Connecting to the extension control unit (AG-EC4G)
f Connect the extension control unit AG-EC4G (optional) to remote-control some functions.
f When you connect AG-EC4G and set the <POWER> switches of the camera and AG-EC4G to <ON>, the camera automatically enters the remote
control mode.
<REMOTE> terminal
AG-EC4G
NOTE
@@
t When connecting and disconnecting the dedicated cable, ensure that you turn the <POWER> switches of the camera and AG-EC4G to
<OFF>.
t Do not use any cable other than the AG-EC4G dedicated cable or dedicated optional cable. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
t The <USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) and the <MENU> button do not activate during AG-EC4G connection.
t For details on the current from the <REMOTE> terminal, refer to “Details of the connector signals” (page 173).
– 152 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Inspections before shooting
Inspections before shooting
Before recording, perform the following inspection to ensure that the system operates properly. It is recommended that you check the image using a
color video monitor.
Preparing to inspect
f Ensure that the P2 card access LED lights in orange for the card
slot to which the P2 card is inserted. If both card slots have P2
cards inserted, the orange access LED for the P2 card slot of the P2
card inserted first (the one that completed an access first) lights up,
and the green P2 card access LED for the P2 card inserted second
lights up.
Attach an adequately charged battery.
1
2
Turn the <POWER> switch <ON>, and check the battery
charge level indicator on the viewfinder screen.
If the remaining battery level is low, replace the battery with an
adequately charged one.
f If the P2 card access LED for the P2 card slot to which the P2 card
is inserted flashes in green or does not light up, that P2 card is not
available for recording.
9 9 min B 9 0%
1 - C L I P
U S E R - 1
C AC D Z x 2
Insert a P2 card into a card slot and close the slot cover.
3
1
2
Inspecting the camera unit
Set the zoom to the electric zoom mode and check the
behavior of the electric zoom.
Set the iris to manual mode and rotate the iris ring to check
the manual iris adjustment.
1
4
Ensure that the image changes between telescopic and wide-angle.
Set the iris back to automatic adjustment mode, and check
the followings by switching the <GAIN> switch setting to
<L>, <M>, and then <H>:
5
Set the zoom to the manual zoom mode and check the
behavior of the manual zoom.
2
Rotate the manual zoom lever and ensure that the image changes
between telescopic and wide-angle.
f The iris is adjusted for objects with same degree of brightness as
the setting changes.
f The gain value display on the viewfinder screen changes as the
setting changes.
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode, and ensure that
the automatic adjustment works when the lens is pointed at
objects with different degree of brightness.
3
If a lens with an extender is attached, set the extender to its
usage position to ensure that it works properly.
6
Inspecting the memory recording functions
Inspecting the P2 card recording
On the viewfinder screen display, ensure that the remaining
P2 card capacity is sufficient.
Use the <REC> button on the handle to check the same
1
4
Perform the same inspection for the VTR button on the lens.
Press the <REC> button and check the following:
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to switch to the thumbnail
screen, and from the thumbnail, playback the clip you just
recorded.
2
5
f The orange P2 access LED flashes.
f [REC] is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
f No system warning is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Ensure that the clip plays back properly.
If two P2 cards are inserted in the P2 card slots, press the
<USER> buttons (<USER MAIN>/<USER1>/<USER2>) to
which [SLOT SEL] is assigned and switch the target P2 card.
6
Press the <REC> button again.
3
Ensure that the P2 access LED turns to orange, and that the [REC]
display disappears from the viewfinder screen.
playback functions operate properly.
Inspecting the audio level automatic adjustment
Press the <AUDIO> button to display the [AUD02:INPUT]
Set the [LVL] item in CH1/CH2 to [AUTO].
1
3
screen of SmartUI.
Set the [IN] item in CH1/CH2 to [FRONT].
2
– 154 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Inspections before shooting
Turn the microphone connected to the <MIC IN> terminal
to an appropriate audio source, and ensure that both level
displays for CH1/CH2 change according to the audio volume.
4
Inspecting the audio level manual adjustment
Press the <AUDIO> button to display the [AUD02:INPUT]
screen of SmartUI.
Turn the microphone connected to the <MIC IN> terminal to
an appropriate audio source, and adjust the audio volume
settings for CH1/CH2.
1
5
6
Set the [IN] item in CH1/CH2 to [FRONT].
Set the [LVL] item in CH1/CH2 to [MANU].
2
3
4
Select the [+] item of CH1/CH2 to ensure that the level
displays increase.
Press the <AUDIO> button to display the [AUD01:LEVEL]
screen of SmartUI.
Inspecting the earphone and speaker
Adjust the <MONITOR> dial and ensure that the speaker
volume changes.
Connect an earphone to the <PHONES> terminal.
1
2
Ensure that the speaker is muted and the output from the microphone
is directed to the earphone.
Adjust the <MONITOR> dial and ensure that the earphone
volume changes.
3
Inspections for using an external microphone
Connect the external microphone to the <AUDIO IN CH1/3>
and <AUDIO IN CH2/4> terminals and push the <LINE>/<MIC>
selector switch towards the <MIC> side.
Press the <AUDIO> button to display the [AUD02:INPUT]
screen of SmartUI.
1
3
Set the [IN] item in CH1/CH2 to [REAR].
4
Toggle the microphone input <+48V> ON/OFF switch
according to the power supply for the external microphone.
2
Turn the microphone to an audio source, and confirm that
the audio level display on the viewfinder screen or on
SmartUI changes according to the audio volume.
5
For microphones with an external
power supply
<+48V>
You can check each channel by connecting one microphone to each
channel.
<OFF>
For microphones with an internal
power supply
Inspections for the clock, time code, and user bits
Set the user bits as needed.
Press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI.
1
12
Ensure that the number in the counter display changes regardless of
the recording status.
Set the time code.
2
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK>
13
Press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI.
3
side and check the date and time displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
If [DATE], [TIME], or the time zone is incorrect, set the correct date/
Press the <COUNTER> button to display [TC].
4
Press the <SETUP> button to display the [SET01:TC/UB]
screen of SmartUI.
5
NOTE
@@
t Note that date and time data based on [DATE], [TIME], or
the time-zone setting is recorded in the clip and affects the
playback order in the thumbnail operations.
Set the [TC_MD] item to [R-RUN].
6
7
Press the <HOME> button to display the [HOME] screen of
SmartUI.
Press the <REC> button.
8
9
Ensure that the number in the counter display changes when the
recording starts.
Press the <REC> button again.
Ensure that the number in the counter display stops changing when
the recording stops.
Press the <SETUP> button to display the [SET01:TC/UB]
screen of SmartUI.
10
11
Set the [TC_MD] item to [F-RUN].
– 155 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Maintenance
Maintenance
Charging the built-in battery
The camera uses the built-in battery to remember the date and time.
If the camera is not turned on for more than a half year, the built-in battery runs out and [ ] may appear on the viewfinder screen.
In that case, connect an external DC power supply or a new battery and charge the built-in battery by leaving the camera turned off for approximately
four hours. Set the date and time after the charge completes.
If [ ] is still displayed after charging, the built-in battery needs to be replaced. Consult the shop of purchase.
– 156 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
Warning system
Warnings description list
If an error is detected immediately after the camera turns on or during operation, the <WARNING> lamp and the lamp on the viewfinder screen indicate
the error.
Warning
lamp
Description of the warning and
recording/playback behavior
Priority Warning type
Viewfinder screen display
Tally lamp
Action to take
1
Flashes four
times every
second
Flashes four
times every
second
Error in the P2 microcomputer
or control. The current operation
will stop.
Check the factor display*
and consult the place of
purchase.
[SYSTEM ERROR] factor
1
System error
1
display* flashes in red.
An error occurred in the built-in
memory because the P2 card
being accessed was ejected.
Both of the access LEDs flash in
orange.
Turn off the power. If the
Flashes four
times every
second
Flashes four
times every
second
P2 card removal [TURN POWER OFF] flashes
clip in the ejected P2 card
contains errors, fix the
errors.
2
error
in red.
[LOW BATTERY] flashes in red
and an empty remaining battery
indicator bar flashes. (Displayed
even if its display setting is turned
off in the setting menu.)
The battery has run out.
Flashes once
every second
Recording and playback will stop.
If the voltage drops further, the
power is automatically turned off.
3
4
5
Battery empty
illuminated
Change the batteries.
Flashes four
times every
second after
the recording
finishes
Lights up after
the recording
finishes
P2 card fully
recorded
The P2 card space is used up.
Delete some clips or insert
a new card.
[
FULL] flashes in red.
3
Recording will stop.*
Turn off the power and on
again, and then check your
recording and playback.
If the recording operation
fails, change the P2 card.
Flashes four
times every
second
Flashes four
times every
second
Error in recording.
The recording may stop or
2
[REC WARNING] factor display*
flashes in red.
Recording error
4
continue.*
Correct recording is not
possible due to corruption of the
<GENLOCK IN> input signal,
and the recording is suspended
temporarily. The clip will be
divided.
f Recording resumes when
the signal returns to normal.
However, recording does not
resume in interval recording,
one-shot recording, and loop
recording.
[TEMPORARY PAUSE
IRREGULAR FRM SIG] flashes
in red.
Flashes four
times every
second
Flashes four
times every
second
Corruption of
standard signal
Check the <GENLOCK IN>
signal.
6
The error indicates poor
wireless audio reception
condition. Recording continues
without receiving the wireless
microphone signal.
Flashes four
times every
second (for
Check the microphone
power supply and the
reception status of the
wireless receiver.
Flashes four
times every
second
Low wireless
signal reception
7
8
9
[WIRELESS RF] flashes in red.
One remaining battery indicator
bar flashes. (Also displayed when
the [OTHER DISPLAY] item
recording only)
The battery is about to run out.
The current operation will
Battery nearly
empty
Flashes once
every second
Flashes once
every second
Change the batteries as
needed.
5
on the setting menu [DISPLAY
SETUP] screen is set to [OFF].)
continue.*
The remaining P2 card capacity
is two minutes or less (the
remaining indicator display is less as needed or insert an
than one minute). This warning is additional card.
issued only during recording.
Flashes
Flashes
Change the P2 cards
P2 card nearly
full
The remaining P2 card capacity
indicator flashes.
once every
second during
recording.
once every
second during
recording.
*1 [P2 SYSTEM ERROR] factor display
f [P2 MICON ERROR]: P2 microcomputer is not responding.
f [P2 CONTROL ERROR]: Error occurred in the P2 recording control.
f [CAM MICON ERROR]: Camera microcomputer is not responding.
*2 [REC WARNING] factor display
f [CARD ERROR*]: Error in P2 card (the slot number of the error card is displayed on *). Recording will stop.
f [REC RAM OVERFLOW]: Recording RAM overflow. Recording will stop.
f [PULL DOWN ERROR]: Image pull-down error in 24P, 25P, and 30P. Recording continues.
f [OVER MAX NUMBER CLIPS]: An attempt was made to record more than the maximum number of clips (1000) to one P2 card.
f [ERROR]: Other recording errors.
*3 The warning stops if the following operations are made.
f Press the playback related buttons.
f Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
f Eject the P2 card or insert another card.
*4 The warning stops if the following operations are made.
f Press the <REC> button.
– 157 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
f Press the playback related buttons.
f Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
f Eject all the cards.
*5 The warning can be stopped by setting the [NEAR END CANCEL] item to [ON] and pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side.
Error code
Indicates the error code on the [HOME] screen of SmartUI when something has caused an error on the camera. Check the types of warning, and deal
Code No.
E-27
Description
Type of warnings
Recording control error (viewfinder screen [P2 CONTROL ERROR])
P2 card removal error (viewfinder screen [TURN POWER OFF])
1. System error
E-30
2. Card removal error
P2 streaming microcontroller error (viewfinder screen [P2 MICON
ERROR])
E-38
E-3F
1. System error
Camera unit error (viewfinder screen [CAM MICON ERROR])
1. System error
Error in image sequence, generator lock input signal, or SDI input
signal (viewfinder screen [IRREGULAR FRM SIG], [PULL DOWN
ERROR])
E-40
5. Recording error, 6. Reference signal error
5. Recording error
Recording error to P2 cards, etc. (viewfinder screen [REC RAM
OVERFLOW], [CARD ERROR*], [OVER MAX# CLIPS], [ERROR])
00000011
Card warning code
Code No.
Description
Recording
Operation continues, but immediately back
up data on the card, and format the card
before using it again.
Indication on SmartUI
The directory structure on the P2 card is
not supported. ([DIR ENTRY NG CARD]
(slot number) is displayed on the viewfinder
screen.)
E-70
E-71
The warning code is displayed on
the [HOME] screen of SmartUI.
The maximum number of overwrites on the Operation continues, but recording
P2 card has been exceeded. ([RUN DOWN or playback may not be performed
CARD] (slot number) is displayed on the
viewfinder screen.)
properly. Replacement of the P2 card is
recommended.
Warning/error displays in the thumbnail operation and the USB host mode
r Thumbnail
Message
Description
Action to take
Data cannot be accessed due to a content defect or some
other reason.
CANNOT ACCESS!
Ensure the health of the media and the clips.
For a clip with the [
generated with AVC-Intra 100 or AVC-Intra 50, the thumbnail
cannot be modified in the text memo position.
] mark, where a thumbnail cannot be
Set the [SYSTEM MODE] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM
SETUP] screen according to the clips.
CANNOT CHANGE!
CANNOT COPY!
Images cannot be copied.
Check the copy conditions.
CANNOT DELETE!
CANNOT FORMAT!
Images cannot be deleted due to contents version mismatch. Match the device and contents version.
A P2 card problem or some other reason prevents formatting. Check the P2 card.
Clips cannot be remerged because either clips that are not
CANNOT RE-CONNECT!
recorded across multiple P2 cards are selected or other
reasons.
Check the selected content.
Clips cannot be restored because contents that cannot be
restored are selected or other reasons.
CANNOT REPAIR!
Check the selected content.
LACK OF CAPACITY!
There is not enough recording capacity left on the card.
Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.
When all necessary P2 cards are not inserted, an attempt is
made to add a shot mark to the clips recorded across multiple
P2 cards.
Insert all P2 cards with the recorded clips and ensure that the
MISSING CLIP!
[
] incomplete clip indicator disappears, and then add the
shot mark.
NO CARD!
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
Insert the relevant medium.
Copy the selected clip to a card that does not contain the
original clip.
NO COPY TO SAME CARD!
NO FILE!
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the original clip.
The specified file does not exist.
Check the file.
Clips cannot be copied because the clips already copied and Check the selected clips, and remove either the original clips
SAME CLIP IS SELECTED!
TOO MANY CLIPS!
the original clips are selected.
or copied clips, and then perform the copy operation.
Too many clips are selected.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
UNKNOWN CONTENTS
FORMAT!
Contents version is mismatched.
Match the device and content versions.
The metadata character code is UTF-8. Enter valid characters
using a viewer.
UNKNOWN DATA!
The metadata character code is invalid.
For the counter addition setting, the user clip name plus the
Characters in the clip name had to be deleted when adding a counter value can only contain up to 100 bytes. Characters in
USER CLIP NAME MODIFIED!
WRITE PROTECTED!
counter value.
the clip name are automatically deleted when the total number
of characters exceeds this limit.
The P2 or SD card is write-protected.
Insert write-enabled media.
– 158 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
r Soft keyboard
Message
Description
Measure
An attempt is made to enter a [PERSON] (user who enters
the memo) when a text memo is not available.
CANNOT CHANGE!
Enter the [TEXT] (text information) first.
Change the input value.
CANNOT SET!
INVALID VALUE!
The entered value is invalid.
r Hard disk drive (USB host mode)
Message
Description
Measure
CANNOT ACCESS CARD!
CANNOT ACCESS TARGET!
CANNOT FORMAT!
An error occurred while accessing the P2 card.
An error occurred while accessing the connection target.
The hard disk drive cannot be initialized.
Check the P2 card.
Check the hard disk drive status or the connection.
Change the connected hard disk drive.
Reboot the hard disk drive or connect another hard disk drive.
CANNOT RECOGNIZE HDD!
The destination target cannot be properly recognized.
CARD IS EMPTY! CANNOT
COPY!
The copy operation is not performed because the card is
empty.
The P2 card to copy is empty.
A warning indicates that the copy operation cannot be
The copy operation cannot be performed because the target
FORMAT P2 CARD!
performed at the hard disk drive → P2 import because the P2 P2 card is not empty. Format the card using a P2 device and
card is already recorded.
try again.
There is not enough space on the connected target, so use a
new hard disk drive or formatted hard disk drive.
LACK OF CAPACITY!
HDD DISCONNECTED!
Not enough space left on the hard disk drive.
Reconnect the USB connection cable. If the hard disk drive
does not operate properly, turn it off and turn it back on again.
The hard disk drive is disconnected.
The copy operation cannot be performed because the P2 card
MISMATCH COMPONENT!
capacities and models do not match between the source and Use the P2 cards of the same model, or import on a clip basis.
the target.
The maximum number of partitions is 23, so use a new hard
disk drive or formatted hard disk drive.
TOO MANY PARTITIONS!
TOO MANY TARGETS!
There are too many partitions.
Disconnect the devices, turn off the camera, and then turn it
Multiple devices are connected.
back on again.
UNKNOWN DEVICE
CONNECTED!
Disconnect the devices, turn off the camera, and then turn it
A non-compatible DVD drive or other device is connected.
back on again.
VERIFICATION FAILED!
The compare check performed after copying failed.
Copy the data again.
– 159 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Updating the camera firmware
Updating the camera firmware
There are two ways to update the firmware:
1
Use the dedicated tool P2_Status_Logger to check and apply the update.
This option is available only to customers who register to PASS (P2 Asset Support System).
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of your device and to access the download page of
the required firmware.
For details about downloading and using P2_Status_Logger, refer to the pages displayed after logging in to PASS.
Other benefits are offered to registered customers. For details, refer to the PASS (P2 Asset Support System) site (http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e).
2
Check the version using the camera and apply the update
Check the version of the camera on the setting menu [DIAGNOSTIC] screen, and access the latest information about the firmware described in the
following NOTE, and then download the firmware as needed.
NOTE
@@
t Update completes by loading the downloaded files to the camera via the SD memory card. For details on update, visit the support desk at the
following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
t Use the SD memory card that complies to the SD or SDHC standard.
Always use the camera to format the SD memory card.
– 160 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the
Optional Board
High-resolution proxy video recording and high-quality recording with
the digital input from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal are available by
installing an optional board to the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
When installing the video encoder board, consult the shop of purchase. For instructions to add the board, refer to the manual supplied with the video
encoder board.
r Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
Install this board to enable high-resolution proxy video recording.
The materials recorded with the camera can be converted to a compressed data file to save into a different area than that of the original materials.
Images can be saved in high-resolution H.264/AVC format as well as MPEG4 format. For audio, besides AAC, uncompressed audio (LPCM) is
supported.
In addition to the traditional MPEG4 format, the MOV format more suitable for nonlinear editing is available.
Video files, audio files, and real-time metadata file (time code, user bits, and UMID information) can be saved to the P2 card and SD memory card at the
same time.
The recorded materials can be saved as a smaller data file to allow efficient clip check or editing.
Proxy settings
Setting menu
When recording the proxy data using the camera, use the setting menu [PROXY SETTING] screen. After a video encoder board is added, the following
setting menu becomes available.
Item
Description of settings
Selects media for recording proxy data.
Remark
REC MEDIA
[P2]
Records the proxy data to the P2 card.
—
[P2&SD]
[OFF]
Records proxy data in both the P2 card and SD memory card.
Does not record proxy data.
REC MODE (1080)
REC MODE (720)
REC MODE (SD)
TC SUPER
Sets the recording mode of proxy data. (Only in 1080i mode)
—
—
—
[STD 2CH MP4], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 4CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [LOW 2CH MOV]
Sets the proxy data recording mode when the 720P mode is selected. (Only in 720P mode)
[STD 2CH MP4], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 4CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV]
Sets the proxy data recording mode (in the SD mode only).
[STD 2CH MP4], [LOW 2CH MOV]
Sets superimposition of time code display on proxy data recorded images.
[UPPER]
[LOWER]
Superimposes the time code display at the top of the recorded video.
—
Superimposes the time code display at the bottom of the recorded
video.
[OFF]
Does not superimpose time code on recorded images.
indicates factory setting values.
f In the following modes, the proxy data is not recorded even if the [REC MEDIA] item is set to [P2] or [P2&SD].
- Interval recording (including one-shot recording)
- Loop recording
f The proxy function cannot be set when recording can be done to combine to the precedent clip during one-clip recording (when [1"CLIP] is
displayed). Close the menu and press the <STOP> button for approximately two seconds to stop combining to the clip, and try the operations again.
f The proxy setting menu may change if the SD memory card data, where the user file settings are saved with [WRITE] selected at the [USER FILE]
item on the setting menu [CARD FUNCTIONS] screen using the camera without this board, is read into the camera with this board.
Checking the setting status
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch on the camera towards the <CHK> side twice to check the menu values of [REC MEDIA], [REC MODE], and [TC
SUPER] with the mode check function.
Checking the version information
The following version information is displayed in the [VERSION] item of the setting menu [DIAGNOSTIC] screen.
Item
PROXY SOFT
PROXY FPGA
Description of settings
The software version of this board is displayed.
The FPGA version of this board is displayed.
Remark
– 162 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
Recording modes and recording signals (video/audio)
Video
Audio
Number of
channels
Recording mode File format
Frame
rate
Bit rate per
channel
Sampling
frequency
Resolution
Codec
Bit rate
Codec
STD 2CH MP4
SHQ 2CH MOV
HQ 4CH MOV
HQ 2CH MOV
LOW 2CH MOV*
MP4
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MPEG-4
Simple Profile
30 fps/
24 fps/
25 fps
1500 kbps
AAC-LC
2ch
64 kbps
768 bps
64 kbps
64 kbps
64 kbps
24 kHz
48 kHz
48 kHz
48 kHz
48 kHz
320×240
(QVGA)
H.264
High Profile
30 fps/
24 fps/
25 fps
3500 kbps
1500 kbps
1500 kbps
800 kbps
LPCM
2ch
4ch
2ch
2ch
960×540
640×360
640×360
H.264
High Profile
30 fps/
24 fps/
25 fps
AAC-LC
AAC-LC
AAC-LC
H.264
High Profile
30 fps/
24 fps/
25 fps
1080i mode
480×270
352×240
H.264
Baseline
Profile
30 fps/
24 fps/
25 fps
(SIF_NTSC)
576-50i mode
352×288
(SIF_PAL)
* In the 720P mode, [LOW 2CH MOV] cannot be set.
Recording the proxy data
Set the [REC MEDIA] item to [P2] or [P2&SD] and press the <REC> button to start proxy recording at the same time as recording of the sources.
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side twice to display the proxy data recording information on the viewfinder screen.
Recording to the SD memory card
To record the proxy data, use Panasonic SD or SDHC memory cards with an indication of class 2 or higher. Refer to our support page at the following
website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
When recording the proxy data to an SD memory card, always format the card using the camera.
Checking the SD memory card
Insert the SD memory card into the camera.
Use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select
[PROPERTY] → [DEVICES] → [SD CARD].
1
2
4
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button.
3
f The format status is displayed in the [SD STANDARD] item.
If [NOT SUPPORTED] is displayed, format the card with the
camera.
– 163 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
f In the [PROXY REM] item, check the remaining recording time of
f Deleting the clips recorded on the P2 card on the thumbnail screen
the proxy data.
does not delete the proxy data recorded on the SD memory card.
The remaining SD memory card capacity displayed (PROXY REM)
indicates the remaining proxy recording, but it may differ from
the actual available space. If short recordings are repeated, the
available recording time may decrease significantly compared to the
available space. When the remaining capacity exceeds 999 min,
[999min] is displayed.
f The proxy data cannot be recorded to the SD memory card
containing data for updating.
NOTE
@@
t While recording to the SD memory card, the remaining capacity
can be checked with the mode check on the viewfinder screen.
t If the [REC MEDIA] item on the setting menu [PROXY SETTING]
screen is set to [P2&SD] and the proxy data cannot be recorded
to the SD memory card, [SD CARD WRITE ERR] is displayed
when recording starts. In that case, check the SD memory card.
If the proxy is not recorded to the SD memory card, the remaining
time is not displayed.
f In the [NUMBER OF CLIPS] item, check the number of clips
recorded in the SD memory card.
If the number of clips exceeds 1000, no additional proxy data can be
recorded to the SD memory card even if there is available capacity.
f Shot marks and text memos cannot be added to the clips in the SD
memory card,
t Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always
check the data before formatting.
Formatting the card
Insert the SD memory card into the camera.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button.
1
3
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
Use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select
[OPERATION] → [FORMAT] → [SD CARD] → [YES].
2
4
This completes formatting the SD memory card.
Proxy data recording time (approximate)
Recording time
(per 1 GB)
Recording mode
Total recording rate
STD 2CH MP4
SHQ 2CH MOV
HQ 4CH MOV
HQ 2CH MOV
LOW 2CH MOV*
Approx. 1650 kbps
Approx. 5060 kbps
Approx. 1780 kbps
Approx. 1650 kbps
Approx. 950 kbps
Approx. 78 min
Approx. 25 min
Approx. 72 min
Approx. 78 min
Approx. 135 min
* When [SYSTEM MODE] is [720-59.94P] or [720-50P] mode, [LOW 2CH MOV] cannot be set.
(These are reference values for continuous recording with Panasonic products. The recording time may differ depending on the scene or the number of
clips.)
Proxy recording in one-clip recording mode
Proxy recording is possible even in the one-clip recording mode. Since proxy data is also grouped together in the same way as a combined clip, it can
be handled as a single clip in a P2 viewer, for example. However, note the following when recording the proxy data to SD memory cards.
f When the SD memory card is removed and replaced while combining of clips is in progress, proxy recording is not performed to the SD memory card
until combining of subsequent clips ends. Check available space and the number of the files (maximum 1000 clips) before using the card. In case
you want to continue proxy recording after changing the SD memory cards during the process, press the <STOP> button for two seconds to finish the
merge, and start recording as a new clip.
f The proxy data in the SD memory card that the recording interrupted does not match the clip data recorded to the P2 card, resulting in incomplete
data.
f During a clip merge, some menu items displayed in the [PROXY SETTING] screen cannot be changed. Press the <STOP> button for approximately
two seconds to stop combining to the clip, and try the operations again.
Checking the proxy data
f The [ ] indicator is displayed for the material clips with the proxy data recorded.
f The detailed information of the recorded proxy data can be viewed in the clip property.
f The proxy data is recorded to the P2 card or SD memory card as a video/audio file and real-time metadata file.
- Video/audio file:XXXXXXXX.MP4 or XXXXXXXX.MOV
- Real-time metadata file:XXXXXXXX.BIN
The time code, user bits, and UMID information are recorded to the frame unit.
Use a P2 viewer to check the proxy data. Some versions of the P2 viewer may not be able to check the data.
For information on the P2 viewer, visit the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
NOTE
@@
t Since clips with the proxy data recorded with this board mounted will be treated as unknown clips in some P2 devices,
(unknown clip
indicator) is displayed on their thumbnails and the following operations are not available. (Except in the [STD 2CH MP4] mode)
- [DELETE]
- [REPAIR CLIP]
- [RE-CONNECTION]
- [COPY]
– 164 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
- [EXCH. THUMBNAIL]
- Adding and deleting [TEXT MEMO] and [SHOT MARK]
Playback is supported.
On these devices, individual clips with proxy data combined from multiple clips are displayed as an incomplete clip [ ]. (Except in [STD 2CH
MP4] mode)
Checking detailed information of the proxy data
The operation method or the panels may differ based on the models and versions of the camera.
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
1
[FORMAT]
The file format of the recorded data is
displayed.
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
[VIDEO CODEC]
[VIDEO FRAME RATE]
[VIDEO BIT RATE]
[VIDEO RESOLUTION]
[ASPECT RATIO]
[TC SUPER]
Video codec information of the recorded data
is displayed.
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button and select
[PROPERTY] → [CLIP PROPERTY] from the thumbnail menu.
2
Video frame rate information of the recorded
data is displayed.
A screen like the one below is displayed. Use the cursor buttons to
move the cursor to the [PROXY] item.
Video bit rate information of the recorded
data is displayed.
The video resolution of the recorded data is
displayed.
The aspect ratio of the recorded data is
displayed.
An indication whether the TC (time code)
display is superimposed over the recorded
video.
[AUDIO CODEC]
Audio codec information of the recorded data
is displayed.
[AUDIO BIT RATE]
Audio bit rate information of the recorded
data is displayed.
[AUDIO SAMPLING
RATE]
Audio sampling rate information of the
recorded data is displayed.
[NUM.OF AUDIO CH]
The number of audio channels of the
recorded data is displayed.
Press the <SET> button.
3
Detailed information about the proxy data is displayed as below.
Error displays about proxy data recordings
If an error occurs during recording the proxy data, check the entries in the following table and take necessary actions.
Error displays
(viewfinder screen)
Behavior and cause
Action to take
[PROXY BOARD ERROR] or Proxy data recording will stop, but recording of the original
The proxy data will not be properly recorded. Turn the camera
off and turn it back on again to check the recording and
playback.
[PROXY REC WARNING]
material will continue.
f Error in the board
[PROXY BOARD ERROR]
f Proxy data recording error
[PROXY REC WARNING]
f If a proxy data recording error occurs, the proxy data currently
being recorded will be processed as below:
- The proxy data being recorded to the P2 card will be
deleted.
- The proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will
not be restored.
[NEAR END (SD)]
[EOM (SD)]
Recording of the original materials and proxy data will continue. After finishing recording, insert a new SD memory card.
f The remaining SD memory card capacity is getting low
(approximately shorter than one minute).
Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop, but
recording to the P2 card will continue.
f The remaining SD memory card capacity ran out.
After finishing recording, insert a new SD memory card.
f The proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will
be deleted.
To restore the deleted proxy data, select clips in the P2 card
– 165 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — Video encoder board (AG-YDX600G)
Error displays
(viewfinder screen)
Behavior and cause
Action to take
[SD CARD WRITE ERR]
Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop, but
recording to the P2 card will continue.
Check the status of the SD memory card and insert a
This error message is displayed when the [REC MEDIA]
item on the setting menu [PROXY SETTING] screen is set
to [P2&SD] and the proxy data cannot be recorded to the SD
memory card.
r If the error message is displayed when recording
starts:
f The SD memory card format is different
f The SD memory card contains more than 1000 clips
f An attempt is made to record to an SD memory card
containing data for updating the firmware of the camera.
r If the error message is displayed during recording:
f The SD memory card was ejected during recording
f An error occurred in recording to the SD memory card
[NO SD CARD!] or [SD CARD Proxy data will not be recorded to the SD memory card, but
Check the status of the SD memory card.
PROTECTED]
recording to the P2 card will be performed.
f No SD memory card is inserted. [NO SD CARD!]
f The SD memory card is write-protected. [SD CARD
PROTECTED]
Copying the proxy data to a SD memory card
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail
screen.
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the clip to be
copied, and press the <SET> button.
2
Press the <THUMBNAIL MENU> button.
3
Use the cursor buttons and the <SET> button to select
[OPERATION] → [COPY] → [SD CARD] → [YES].
4
NOTE
@@
t If [EOM (SD)] is displayed and the proxy data being recorded to
the SD memory card is deleted, perform this procedure to copy
the proxy data from the P2 card, and enable the deleted proxy
data to be restored.
t The original materials will not be copied.
– 166 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Additional Functions from the Optional Board — HD/SD SDI input board (AG-YA600G)
HD/SD SDI input board (AG-YA600G)
High-quality recording with the digital input from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal is available by installing the HD/SD SDI input board (AG-YA600G).
When installing the board, consult the shop of purchase. For instructions to install the board, refer to the manual supplied with the HD/SD SDI input
board.
r HD/SD SDI input board (AG-YA600G)
High-quality recording with the digital input from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal is available by installing this board.
In the HD mode, recording can be started and stopped automatically using the information added to the HD SDI input signal. (Auto recording function)
f SDI input settings
To record the SDI input signal with the camera, select [SDI IN] at the [REC SIGNAL] item on the setting menu [SYSTEM SETUP] screen.
Item
Description of settings
REC SIGNAL
Selects the input signal.
[CAMERA]
Records the camera shooting signal of the camera.
[SDI IN]
Records the SDI input signal from the <SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal.
f Auto recording function setting
To enable the auto recording function with the camera, select [TYPE1] or [TYPE2] at the [AUTO REC] item on the setting menu [IN/OUT SEL] screen.
Item
AUTO REC
Description of settings
[TYPE1]
[TYPE2]
[OFF]
Performs automatic recording by detecting from LTC of the HD SDI input signal.
Performs automatic recording by detecting from VITC of the HD SDI input signal.
Does not perform automatic recording.
– 167 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Dimensions and specifications
Dimensions and specifications
Dimensions
144 mm
(5-21/32 inches)
267 mm
(10-1/2
inches)
199 mm
(7-27/32
inches)
96 mm
(3-25/32
inches)
350 mm (13-25/32 inches)
Specifications
General
Power
DC 12 V (11.0 V – 17.0 V)
Power consumption
22 W (when the optional boards AG-YDX600G and AG-YA600G are installed)
18 W (body only)
58 W (with all optional accessories connected and maximum power supplied from each output terminal)
indicates safety items.
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Weight
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
10% to 85% (relative humidity)
−20°C to 60°C (−4°F to 140°F)
Approx. 2.8 k] (6.2 lbs.) (body only, excluding the battery and accessories)
Continuous operation time
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Approx. 240 minutes (when using Anton/Bauer DIONIC90: when the optional AG-CVF10G is installed)
Body only
144 mm×267 mm×350 mm
(5-21/32 inches×10-1/2 inches×13-25/32 inches)
(excluding protrusion)
Camera unit
Pickup devices
Lens mount
2/3-type, MOS×1
2/3-type bayonet
ND filter
4-position (CLEAR, 1/4ND, 1/16ND, 1/64ND)
−3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB (for 18 dB, assign [GAIN:18dB] to the <USER> button)
ATW, ATW LOCK, Ach, Bch, preset 3200 K, preset 5600 K, VAR (2400 K to 9900 K)
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz
Gain settings
Color temperature settings
Shutter speed
60i/60p mode
30P mode
1/60 (off), 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
1/30 (off), 1/50, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 sec.
1/24 (off), 1/50, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 sec.
24P mode
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz
50i/50P mode
25P mode
1/50 (off), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
1/25 (off), 1/50, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 sec.
Shutter speed
(Synchro scan)
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz
When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec]
60i/60p mode
30P mode
1/60.0 – 1/249.8 seconds
1/30.0 – 1/249.8 seconds
1/24.0 – 1/249.8 seconds
24P mode
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz
When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec]
50i/50P mode
25P mode
1/50.0 – 1/250.0 seconds
1/25.0 – 1/250.0 seconds
– 169 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Dimensions and specifications
Shutter speed (slow)
Available only when the [VFR] item on the setting menu [SCENE FILE] screen is set to [OFF]
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz
60i/60p mode
30P mode
1/15, 1/30 seconds
1/15 seconds
24P mode
1/12 seconds
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz
50i/50P mode
25P mode
1/12.5, 1/25 seconds
1/12.5 seconds
Shutter open angle
Available only when the [VFR] item on the setting menu [SCENE FILE] screen is set to [OFF]
Configurable between 3 deg and 360 deg (in a 0.5 deg step)
Available only when the [VFR] item on the setting menu [SCENE FILE] screen is set to [ON]*
[FRAME RATE]
setting is more than
12P
Configurable between 3 deg and 360 deg (in a 0.5 deg step)
[FRAME RATE]
setting is less than
12P
Configurable between 3 deg and 22.5 deg (in a 0.5 deg step)
45 deg, 90 deg, 180 deg, 360 deg
Variable frame rate*
Sensitivity
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
1/2/4/6/9/12/15/18/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/30 (frame/sec.)
1/2/4/6/9/12/15/18/20/21/22/23/24/25 (frame/sec.)
720-59.94P
720-50P
1/2/4/6/9/12/15/18/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/36/40/44/48/54/60 (frame/sec.)
1/2/4/6/9/12/15/18/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/37/42/45/48/50 (frame/sec.)
F12 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080/59.94i)
F13 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080/50i)
Image S/N
59 dB (standard)
Digital zoom
×2, ×4
* Can be set when the upgrade software key AG-SFU602G (production pack (extra-cost option)) is installed.
Memory card recorder
Recording media
System format
P2 card
1080-59.94i, 1080-23.98PsF*, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i, 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV format switch
Recording format
Recording video signal
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97p, 1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98p, 1080/23.98pA, 1080/23.98pN, 720/59.94p, 720/29.97p,
720/29.97pN, 720/23.98p, 720/23.98pN, 480/59.94i, 480/29.97p, 480/23.98p, 480/23.98pA, 1080/50i, 1080/25p,
1080/25pN, 720/50p, 720/25p, 720/25pN, 576/50i, 576/25p
Recording and playback time
AVC-Intra 100
AVC-Intra 50
DVCPRO/DV
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO/DV
16 GB×1 approx. 16 min, 16 GB×2 approx. 32 min
32 GB×1 approx. 32 min, 32 GB×2 approx. 64 min
64 GB×1 approx. 64 min, 64 GB×2 approx. 128 min
16 GB×1 approx. 32 min, 16 GB×2 approx. 64 min
32 GB×1 approx. 64 min, 32 GB×2 approx. 128 min
64 GB×1 approx. 128 min, 64 GB×2 approx. 256 min
16 GB×1 approx. 16 min, 16 GB×1 approx. 32 min
32 GB×1 approx. 32 min, 32 GB×2 approx. 64 min
64 GB×1 approx. 64 min, 64 GB×2 approx. 128 min
16 GB×1 approx. 32 min, 16 GB×2 approx. 64 min
32 GB×1 approx. 64 min, 32 GB×2 approx. 128 min
64 GB×1 approx. 128 min, 64 GB×2 approx. 256 min
16 GB×1 approx. 64 min, 16 GB×2 approx. 128 min
32 GB×1 approx. 128 min, 32 GB×2 approx. 256 min
64 GB×1 approx. 256 min, 64 GB×2 approx. 512 min
Recording playback time becomes 1.25 times longer in 24PN native recording.
The times above are for continuous recording of one clip. Depending on the number of clips, the overall recording time
may be shorter than the above.
* Available only when the upgrade software key AG-SFU602G (production pack (extra-cost option)) is installed.
Digital video
Sampling frequency
AVC-Intra 100/
DVCPRO HD
Y: 74.1758 MHz, PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)
Y: 74.2500 MHz, PB/PR: 37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 6.75 MHz
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 3.375 MHz
Quantizing
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50: 10 bits
DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV: 8 bits
Video compression format
AVC-Intra 100
AVC-Intra 50
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
DVCPRO HD
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 370M)
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 314M)
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
DV Compression (IEC 61834-2)
– 170 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Dimensions and specifications
Digital audio
Recording audio signal
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD
48 kHz/16 bits, 4ch
DVCPRO50
48 kHz/16 bits, 4ch
DVCPRO/DV
48 kHz/16 bits, 2ch/4ch switch
Headroom
20 dB/18 dB (switchable menu)
Video input/output
<SDI OUT/IN (OP)> terminal
HD SDI = BNC×1, 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
SD SDI = BNC×1, 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
When the HD/SD SDI input board (extra-cost option) is installed, the SDI input function is available (switched the SDI input
in the menu).
<MON OUT> terminal
<HDMI> terminal
HD SDI = BNC×1, 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
SD SDI = BNC×1, 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
VBS = BNC×1, 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω (Can be switched to HD SDI/SD SDI/VBS with the SmartUI setting.)
HDMI×1 (HDMI type A terminal, not compatible with VIERA Link)
Audio input/output
<MIC IN> terminal
f XLR (3-pin)×1
- +48 V supporting menu
- −40 dBu/−50 dBu/−60 dBu (switchable menu)
<AUDIO IN> terminal
f XLR (3-pin)×2
Input high impedance, <LINE>/<MIC> (switch)
- LINE: 0 dBu
- MIC: −50/−60 dBu (menu), MIC+48 V ON/OFF (switch)
WIRELESS IN terminal
<AUDIO OUT> terminal
Speaker
25-pin, D-SUB, −40 dBu, 2ch supported
Pin jack×2 (CH1, CH2), output: 316 mV, 600 Ω
20 mm diameter, round×1
Other input/output
<GENLOCK IN> terminal
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
BNC×1, 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω
f TC IN/OUT menu
- IN: BNC×1, 0.5 V [p-p] to 8 V [p-p], 10 kΩ
- OUT: BNC×1, 2.0±0.5 V [p-p], low impedance
<DC IN> terminal
XLR×1, 4-pin, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V)
<DC OUT> terminal
<REMOTE> terminal
<LENS> terminal
4-pin, DC 12 V (DC 11.0 V to 17.0 V), maximum output current 1.5 A
10-pin
12-pin
<VF> terminal
20-pin
<LAN> terminal*
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
<USB2.0> terminal (device)
<USB2.0> terminal (host)
<USB2.0> terminal (host)*
Placed on the right side of the body. Type B, 4-pin, USB ver.2.0 compliance
Placed on the right side of the body. Type A, 4-pin, USB ver.2.0 compliance
Placed inside the cover on the left side of the body. Type A, 4-pin, USB ver.2.0 compliance, for attachment of the wireless
module AJ-WM30
* When the upgrade software key AG-SFU601G (network function (extra-cost option)) is installed, the network functions of the wired LAN and wireless LAN are
enabled.
Options
Color viewfinder
AG-CVF10G
AG-YDX600G
AG-YA600G
AJ-WM30
Video encoder board
HD/SD SDI input board
Wireless module
Upgrade Software Key
Upgrade software key
AG-SFU601G
AG-SFU602G
– 171 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Dimensions and specifications
Supported formats when the video encoder board (AG-YDX600G) is installed
Weight
Approx. 50 ] (0.11 lbs.)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
149 mm×55 mm×31 mm
(5-7/8 inches×2-5/32 inches×1-7/32 inches)
File format
MP4 (ISO/IEC14496 standard)
MOV (QuickTime format)
Video compression format
MPEG4 Simple Profile
H.264/AVC Baseline Profile
H.264/AVC High Profile
Audio recording format
AAC-LC
Linear PCM
Supported formats when the HD/SD SDI input board (AG-YA600G) is installed
Weight
Approx. 13 ] (0.03 lbs.)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
70 mm×50 mm×7 mm
(2-3/4 inches×1-31/32 inches×9/32 inches)
Video format (complies to the
AG-HPX600P/AG-HPX600EJ/
AG-HPX600EN video format)
HD: 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 720/59.94P, 720/50P
SD: 480/59.94i, 576/50i
Audio format (complies to the
AG-HPX600P/AG-HPX600EJ/
AG-HPX600EN audio format)
48 kHz, 16 bits, CH4 (AVC-Intra 100, AVC-Intra 50, DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50)
48 kHz, 16 bits, CH2/CH4 switch (DVCPRO/DV)
– 172 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Details of the connector signals
Details of the connector signals
DC IN
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
NC
+12 V
Panasonic Parts No: K1AA104H0038
Manufacturer Parts No: HA16RX-4P (SW1) (76) (Hirose Electric Co.)
DC OUT
1
2
3
4
GND
R TALLY (open collector)
REC SW
UNREG+12 V (max. 1.5 A)
Panasonic Parts No: K1AY104J0001
Manufacturer Parts No: HR10A-7R-4SC (73) (Hirose Electric Co.)
NOTE
@@
t Make sure that the polarity of the external power supply is correct.
FRONT MIC IN
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Panasonic Parts No: K1AY103A0001
VF
Manufacturer Parts No: HA16PRM-3SG (72) (Hirose Electric Co.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UNREG-12V
UNREG-12V
A9.0V
DC 12 V power (AJ-HVF21KG: approx. 0.35 A)
DC 12 V power
DC 9 V power (not used)
Viewfinder PB signal GND
Viewfinder PR signal GND
Viewfinder Y signal output
Viewfinder Y signal GND
VF-PB-GND
VF-PR-GND
VF-Y
VF-Y-GND
VF-CLK
Serial data clock pulse signal
VF-WR
Pulse signal for serial/parallel conversion data
reading
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
GND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VF-DATA
UNREG-GND
ZEBRA-SW
PEAKING
SPARE
Serial data signal for serial/parallel conversion
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Zebra signal ON/OFF
Peaking control (not used)
Spare (not used)
Panasonic Parts No: K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Parts No: HA16PRM-3SG (72) (Hirose Electric Co.)
VF-PR
Viewfinder PR signal output
Viewfinder PB signal output
Marker ON/OFF (not used)
F.AUDIO LEVEL adjustment (not used)
F.AUDIO LEVEL GND (not used)
GND
VF-PB
MARKER-SW
FRONT-VR
VR-GND
2
1
3
UNREG-GND
Panasonic Parts No: K1AB120H0001
Manufacturer Parts No: HR12-14RA-20SC (Hirose Electric Co.)
REMOTE
1
2
CAM DATA (H)
CAM DATA (C)
CAM CONT (H)
CAM CONT (C)
R/C ON
3
4
5
6
R/C VIDEO OUT
R/C VIDEO GND
NC
7
8
9
UNREG+12 V (max. 0.6 A)
GND
NOTE
10
@@
t Ensure that the total current from the DC OUT, REMOTE, VF, and
Panasonic Parts No: K1AY110JA001
Manufacturer Parts No: HR10A-10R-10SC (71) (Hirose Electric Co.)
LENS terminals does not exceed 2.5 A.
– 173 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specification — Details of the connector signals
LENS
1
2
RET-SW
REC
3
GND
4
IRIS-AUTO
IRIS-CONT
UNREG+12 V (max. 0.4 A)
IRIS-POSI
5
6
7
8
IRIS-G-MAX
EXT-POSI
9
10
11
12
ZOOM-POSI
FOCUS-POSI
SPARE
Panasonic Parts No: K1AY112JA001
Manufacturer Parts No: HR10A-10R-12SC (71) (Hirose Electric Co.)
Wireless receiver interface
1
CH-1 SHIELD
CH-1 HOT
GND
2
Audio input from the wireless receiver:
CH1 HOT
3
CH-1 COLD
Audio input from the wireless receiver:
CH1 COLD
4
5
GND
UNREG +12 V
RX ON
GND
Power supply for the wireless receiver
6
Power remote output for the wireless receiver
7
RF WARN
RM5
RF warning input from the wireless receiver
8
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
GND
9
RM4
10
11
12
13
14
15
SPARE 1
SPARE 2
EXT CLK
CLK SHIELD
CH-2 SHIELD
CH-2 HOT
Audio input from the wireless receiver:
CH2 HOT
16
CH-2 COLD
Audio input from the wireless receiver:
CH2 COLD
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Power supply for the wireless receiver
+5.6 V
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO RET
VIDEO EN
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
RM 1 (RM CLK)
RM 2 (RM DATA)
RM 3 (RM WR)
RM+5 V
RM GND
Panasonic Parts No: K1GB25A00010
Manufacturer Parts No: HDBB-25S (05) (Hirose Electric Co.)
– 174 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
M
Menu
S
SmartUI
N
O
P
R
T
– 176 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
U
V
Viewfinder
W
Z
– 177 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection
points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
EU
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
EU
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Cd
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
Declaration of Conformity
with the requirements of Technical Regulation on the Restriction Of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(adopted by Order №1057 of Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine)
The Product is in conformity with the requirements of Technical Regulation on the Restriction Of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment (TR on RoHS).
The content of hazardous substance with the exemption of the applications listed in the Annex №2 of TR on RoHS:
1. Lead (Pb) – not over 0,1 % or 1000wt ppm;
2. Cadmium (Cd) – not over 0,01 % or 100wt ppm;
3. Mercury (Hg) – not over 0,1 % or 1000wt ppm;
4. Hexavalent chromium (Cr6+) – not over 0,1 % or 1000wt ppm;
5. Polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) – not over 0,1 % or 1000wt ppm;
6. Polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) – not over 0,1 % or 1000wt ppm.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
©Panasonic Corporation 2012
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|